Yamaha HTR-6063 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: HTR-6063

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Owner’s Manual

AV Receiver English for Canada

En 2

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

Features and capabilities ...................................................4

Using the TV OSD to operate the unit .............................5

View or modify content for the current input source

<Content window> ...........................................................5

Configuring settings for this unit

<ON SCREEN menu>......................................................5

Adjust settings for each input source

<OPTION menu> ............................................................. 6

About this manual............................................................. 7

Supplied accessories......................................................... 7

Part names and functions..................................................8

Front panel........................................................................8

Rear panel.........................................................................9

Front panel display .........................................................10

Remote control ...............................................................11

On-screen display ...........................................................12

CONNECTIONS

Connecting speakers ........................................................ 13

Speaker channels and functions...................................... 13

Speaker layout ................................................................ 14

Connecting speakers and subwoofer .............................. 17

Connecting external components....................................21

Cable plugs and jacks .....................................................21

Connecting a TV monitor............................................... 22

Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices............25

Connecting game consoles ............................................. 29

Connecting a multi-format player

or an external decoder .................................................... 29

Connecting an external amplifier ................................... 30

Connecting a SCENE link

playback-compatible device ...........................................30

Using the Trigger function to link

external component power..............................................31

Connecting audio/video recording devices.....................31

Connecting the FM/AM antennas .................................. 32

Setting up the speaker parameters automatically

(YPAO).............................................................................. 33

PLAYBACK

Basic playback procedure ............................................... 40

Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control) ..... 40

Changing input settings with a single key

(SCENE function) ............................................................ 41

Registering input sources/sound program...................... 41

Enjoying the desired sound field effect.......................... 41

Selecting sound programs and sound decoders.............. 41

Sound programs.............................................................. 45

Configuring the settings of this unit

while viewing the TV screen ........................................... 47

Basic operations via the TV screen display ................... 47

Configuring settings specific to

an individual input source (OPTION menu)................. 49

OPTION menu display and setup................................... 49

OPTION menu ............................................................... 50

Confirming and operating input sources

from the Content window ............................................... 53

Displaying the Content window on the TV screen......... 53

Switching the display between the Now playing view

and the Content browse view ......................................... 53

FM/AM tuning ................................................................. 54

Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning)..... 54

Confirming and operating the FM/AM tuner

from the Content window............................................... 56

Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ........... 58

Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock................. 58

Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™ .................................... 58

Playing iPod/iPhone from the menu screen

(Menu browse control) ................................................... 59

Operating basic playback functions

via the remote control (Simple remote control) ............. 61

Playing back iPod™/iPhone™

with wireless connection................................................ 61

Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components ...... 63

Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver................................................... 63

Pairing Bluetooth™ components ................................... 63

Using Bluetooth™ components ..................................... 64

En 3

SETUP

Configuring input sources (Input menu) .......................65

Configuring input sources .............................................. 65

Input menu......................................................................66

Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu) ...............69

Editing a scene................................................................ 69

SCENE menu..................................................................70

Setting sound program parameters

(Sound Program menu) ...................................................71

Editing sound programs..................................................71

CINEMA DSP parameters ............................................. 72

Parameters usable in certain sound programs ................74

Parameters usable in surround decoder .......................... 75

Setting various functions (Setup menu) .........................76

Operating the Setup menu ..............................................76

Setup menu .....................................................................77

Manages settings for speakers ........................................77

Setting the audio output function of this unit .................81

Setting this unit’s video output function.........................82

Setting HDMI functions .................................................83

Setting this unit’s multi-zone function ........................... 85

Making the receiver easier to use ...................................86

Language ........................................................................87

Confirming information of this unit

(Information menu) .........................................................88

Selecting information .....................................................88

Controlling other components

with the remote control.................................................... 89

Keys connecting external components ...........................89

Default remote control code settings.............................. 90

Registering remote control codes

for external component operations ................................. 90

Resetting all remote control codes .................................91

Extended functionality that can be configured

as needed (Advanced Setup menu).................................92

Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu ...............92

Setting the impedance of speakers .................................92

Avoiding crossing remote control signals

when using multiple Yamaha receivers .......................... 93

Changing TV format ...................................................... 93

Removing HDMI video output up-scaling limits........... 93

Initializing various settings for this unit......................... 94

Using the HDMI Control function ................................. 95

Using multi-zone configuration ...................................... 98

Connecting Zone2 .......................................................... 98

Controlling Zone2 .......................................................... 99

APPENDIX

Troubleshooting ............................................................. 100

General ......................................................................... 100

HDMI™ ....................................................................... 102

Tuner (FM/AM) ........................................................... 103

iPod™/iPhone™ .......................................................... 104

Bluetooth™ .................................................................. 104

Remote control ............................................................. 105

Glossary .......................................................................... 106

Audio information ........................................................ 106

Sound program information ......................................... 107

Video information ........................................................ 107

Video conversion .......................................................... 108

Information on HDMI™............................................... 109

About trademarks.......................................................... 109

Specifications.................................................................. 110

Index ............................................................................... 112

En 4

INTRODUCTION

■ Built-in high-quality, high-power 7-channel amplifier

■ 6 HDMI input jacks (5 + 1 VIDEO AUX) supporting Audio Return Channel and 3D

video signal

■ 1-button input/sound program switching (SCENE function)................................41

■ Speaker connections for 2- to 7.1-channel configurations

– Speaker impedance configuration............................................................................................................18

– Speaker channels and functions ...............................................................................................................13

– Speaker layout..........................................................................................................................................14

– Speaker cable connection.........................................................................................................................17

– Subwoofer cable connection ....................................................................................................................20

– High quality playback using bi-amplification connections .....................................................................18

■ Automatic settings for speaker acoustic parameters

(YPAO - Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) ......................................33

■ External component connection (max. 16 inputs) and playback

– External component connection...............................................................................................................21

– Protective cover for front panel jacks ........................................................................................................7

– Configuring the settings specific for each input source <OPTION menu>.............................................49

– Playback from external components........................................................................................................40

– Playback from an iPod/iPhone with wired connection ............................................................................58

– Playback from an iPod/iPhone with wireless connection ........................................................................61

– Playback from a Bluetooth component (Bluetooth and components sold separately) ............................63

■ FM/AM tuner

– Receiving an FM/AM broadcast..............................................................................................................54

– Presetting stations ....................................................................................................................................54

– Simple preset tuning ................................................................................................................................54

– Changing FM mode (Stereo/Mono).........................................................................................................56

■ Multi-channel, multi-format playback

– Sound field effect selection......................................................................................................................41

– Playback without sound field effects .......................................................................................................42

– Stereo playback........................................................................................................................................42

– Compressed-music playback ...................................................................................................................44

■ Front panel information display/on-screen display (OSD) on the TV screen

– Switching information on the front panel display ...................................................................................10

– Operating this unit using the on-screen display.......................................................................................12

■ Volume adjustment functions

– Easy listening at low volumes <Adaptive DRC> ....................................................................................51

– Adjusting volume between input sources <Volume Trim> .....................................................................52

■ Remote control operation

– External component operation with this unit’s remote control................................................................89

■ Playing back the audio source in another room

– Using the internal amplifier for playback ................................................................................................18

– Using the external amplifier for playback ...............................................................................................98

– Configuring the settings for another room...............................................................................................98

– Controlling the external component in another room ..............................................................................99

■ Other features

– Standby mode after a specific amount of time <Sleep timer>.................................................................11

– Charging the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode <iPod Standby Charge> ..........................67

Features and capabilities

Most of this unit’s functions can be operated by following instructions displayed on the TV screen.

Refer to “Using the TV OSD to operate the unit” on the following pages for information on

functions that can be controlled using the on-screen display.

INTRODUCTION

En 5

This unit features a sophisticated on-screen display (OSD) for the TV screen. The OSD is designed to enable visual guidance that simplifies operations. The OSD mainly displays the ON SCREEN and

OPTION menus, as well as the Content window that displays the content of current input sources.

■ Select an input source, SCENE and sound program

– Select an input source ..............................................................................................................................47

– Select a SCENE .......................................................................................................................................48

– Select a sound program............................................................................................................................48

View or modify content for the current input source <Content

window>

■ Operate the AM/FM tuner

– Display a list of preset stations for selection ...........................................................................................57

– Display information on the station currently received.............................................................................56

– Perform operations such as searching for and registering stations using the Utility <Utility> ...............56

■ Display the list of iPod music sources

– Display the list of iPod music sources for selection ................................................................................59

– Perform operations such as play, stop and pause using the TV screen <Menu browse control> ............59

– Perform basic playback functions such as play, stop and pause

via the remote control <Simple remote control> .....................................................................................61

Configuring settings for this unit <ON SCREEN menu>

– Display the ON SCREEN menu on the TV screen..................................................................................47

■ Select and configure an input source

– Select an input source ..............................................................................................................................47

– Play the audio/video signal from the selected input source.....................................................................40

– Change the input source name <Rename/Icon Select> ...........................................................................66

– Select the audio input jack separately from the video input jack <Audio In>.........................................67

– Specify a format for digital audio signals <Decoder Mode>...................................................................67

– Enhance the sound of compressed audio <Enhancer>.............................................................................67

– Output a video signal input from another input source

while playing a multi-channel audio signal <Video Out> .......................................................................68

– Charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode <Standby Charge>......................................67

■ Select and configure a SCENE

– Select a SCENE .......................................................................................................................................48

– Register or clear settings for a selected SCENE <Save>, <Reset> .........................................................70

– Turn on a Yamaha BD/DVD player or CD player connected to this unit automatically

when a SCENE is selected <SCENE IR>................................................................................................70

■ Select and adjust a sound program (sound program)

– Select a sound program............................................................................................................................48

– Adjust sound program parameters ...........................................................................................................71

■ Display settings information for this unit

– Display audio signal information <Audio Signal>..................................................................................88

– Display video signal information <Video Signal> ..................................................................................88

– Display HDMI signal information <HDMI - Monitor Info.>..................................................................88

■ Adjust acoustic parameters to match your speakers and listening environment

– Specify speaker acoustic parameters automatically

(Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer - YPAO).......................................................................33

– Set up this unit’s speaker configuration simply <Power Amp Assign> ..................................................77

– Specify settings for each speaker <Configuration>.................................................................................78

– Control volume control for each speaker <Level> ..................................................................................79

– Apply speaker distance settings <Distance> ...........................................................................................79

– Control equalizer sound quality <Parametric EQ>..................................................................................80

– Adjust test tone speaker <Test Tone> ......................................................................................................80

■ Adjust audio signals output from this unit

– Correct lag between audio and video signals <Lipsync> ........................................................................81

– Select a dynamic range adjustment method <Dynamic Range> .............................................................81

– Specify the maximum volume <Max Volume> .......................................................................................81

– Specify the initial volume <Initial Volume>............................................................................................82

– Adjust DSP effect and volume level <Adaptive DSP Level>..................................................................82

■ Adjust video signals output from this unit

– Convert analog video signal to another type of signal <Analog to Analog Conversion> .......................82

– Specify the resolution and aspect ratio of analog video signal converted to HDMI or specify upscaling

resolution for 480i/576i- or 480p/576p-HDMI output signal <Processing> ...........................................83

Using the TV OSD to operate the unit

INTRODUCTION

Using the TV OSD to operate the unit

En 6

■ HDMI settings

– Assign the audio input source for the TV <TV Audio Input>.................................................................84

– Listen to TV audio with HDMI cable connection <ARC (Audio Return Channel)>..............................84

– Transmit HDMI audio/video to the TV during standby mode <Standby Through> ...............................85

– Change the output destination of HDMI input audio signals <Audio Output>.......................................85

■ Enable listening in multiple rooms (multi-zone function)

– Adjust Zone2 volume <Zone2 Set>.........................................................................................................85

■ Specify other functions for this unit

– Enter standby mode automatically when no operations are performed <Auto Power Down>................86

– Adjust the brightness of the front panel display <Dimmer> ...................................................................86

– Change the wall paper displayed on the TV screen <Wall Paper>..........................................................86

– Specify the function of the TRIGGER OUT jack for controlling external components

<Trigger Output> .....................................................................................................................................87

– Prohibit changes to settings <Memory Guard> .......................................................................................87

■ Select a language

– Change the language displayed on the TV screen <Language>..............................................................87

Adjust settings for each input source <OPTION menu>

– Display the OPTION menu on the TV screen .........................................................................................49

– Select the 5.1-channel signal playback method <Extended Surround>...................................................51

– Adjust bass and treble levels <Tone Control> .........................................................................................50

– Enable low-volume background music <Adaptive DRC>.......................................................................51

– Adjust the volume of input sources <Volume Trim>...............................................................................52

– Adjust the vertical position of dialogues <Dialogue Lift> ......................................................................51

INTRODUCTION

Using the TV OSD to operate the unit

En 7

About this manual

Supplied accessories

Check that you received all of the following parts.

• Remote control

• Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) x 2

• YPAO microphone

• AM loop antenna

• Indoor FM antenna

• VIDEO AUX input cover

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• This manual is created prior to production. Design and

specifications are subject to change in part as a result of

improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and

product, the product has priority.

• “

dHDMI1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the

remote control. Refer to the “Remote control” (☞

p. 11) for the

information about each position of the parts.

• J

1 indicates that the reference is in the footnote. Refer to the

corresponding numbers on the bottom of the page.

• ☞

indicates the page describing the related information.

• Click on the “ ” at the bottom of the page to display the

corresponding page in “Part names and functions.”

Front panel

Rear panel

Front panel display

Remote control

■ Attaching the VIDEO AUX input cover (supplied)

To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input

cover to the VIDEO AUX jacks when you do not use the jacks.

To remove the cover, push the left section of it.

Attach the cover

PUSH

Remove the cover

■ Installing batteries in the remote control

When inserting batteries in the remote control, remove the

battery compartment cover from the reverse side of the remote

control, and insert two AAA batteries into the battery

compartment so that they match with the polarity markings (+

and -).

Replace the batteries with new ones if the remote control can

only be operated within a narrow range.

NOTE

If there are remote control codes for external components

registered to the remote control, removing the batteries for more

than 2 minutes, or leaving exhausted batteries in the remote

control, may clear the remote control codes. If this should occur,

replace the batteries with new ones, and set the remote control

codes.

Battery compartment

cover

Battery compartment

INTRODUCTION

En 8

Front panel

a MAIN ZONE A (MAIN ZONE Power)

Switches this unit between on and standby mode.

b HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator

Lights up in any of the following cases while the unit is in standby

mode.

• When the Standby Through function is enabled and audio/video

from an external component connected with HDMI is output to a TV

during standby mode (☞

p. 85).

• When an iPod/iPhone, which is placed in the Yamaha iPod universal

dock, is charging while the unit is in standby mode (☞

p. 61).

This indicator also lights up when the Yamaha iPod wireless receiver

is connected to this unit (☞

p. 61).

c YPAO MIC jack

Connect the supplied YPAO microphone and adjust the speaker balance

automatically (☞

p. 33).

d ZONE2

When this unit is connected to an external amplifier located in another

room, this key switches that amplifier between on and standby

(☞

p. 99).

When speakers in another room are connected to this unit, this key

switches the built-in amplifier for those speakers on and off (☞

p. 99).

e ZONE CONTROL

Switches to Zone2 operation mode. This unit, or its remote control,

can be used to select input sources or adjust volume for an external

amplifier in another room or the built-in amplifier for speakers in

another room (☞

p. 99).

f INFO

Changes the information displayed on the front panel display

(☞

p. 10).

g MEMORY

Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (☞

p. 54). J1

h PRESET j / i

Selects an FM/AM preset station (☞

p. 56). J1

i FM/AM

Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM or AM (☞

p. 54). J1

j Front panel display

Displays information on this unit (☞

p. 10).

k TUNING jj / ii

Changes FM/AM tuner frequencies (☞

p. 54). J1

l PURE DIRECT

Switches this unit to Pure Direct mode (☞

p. 44).

m PHONES jack

For plugging headphones in. Sound effects applied during playback

can also be heard through the headphones.

n INPUT l / h

Selects an input source from which to playback. Press either the left or

right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order.

o SCENE

Switches the input source and the sound program with a single button

(☞

p. 41). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to switch

on.

p TONE CONTROL

Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers/headphones

(☞

p. 40).

q PROGRAM l / h

Selects a sound program (☞

p. 41). Press the left or right key

repeatedly to cycle through sound programs.

r STRAIGHT

Changes a sound program to straight decoding mode (☞

p. 42).

s VIDEO AUX jacks

For connecting game consoles to this unit temporarily (☞

p. 29).

Attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when not using this jack

(☞

p. 7).

t VOLUME

Adjusts the volume level.

Part names and functions

VIDEO

AUX

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

VOLUME

DVD

RADIO

INPUT

PROGRAM

SCENE

VIDEO

AUDI OLR

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

YPAO MIC

PURE DIRECT

FM AM

HDMI IN

ZONE2 ZONE CONTROL

MAIN ZONE

p rn q

omt

jd g h lfe i kb

1 : Usable when you have selected TUNER input.

INTRODUCTION

Part names and functions

En 9

Rear panel

a DOCK jack

For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as

YDS-12), iPod wireless receiver (YID-W10), or Bluetooth wireless

audio receiver (YBA-10) (☞

p. 58, p. 61, p. 63).

b HDMI OUT jack

For connecting an HDMI - compatible TV to output audio/video

signals (☞

p. 23).

c ANTENNA jacks

For connecting AM and FM antennas (☞

p. 32).

d MONITOR OUT jacks

e REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting an external component that supports the remote

control function (☞

p. 30).

f HDMI1-5 jacks

For connecting external components equipped with HDMI-

compatible outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞

p. 25).

g SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting the front, center, surround and surround back speakers

(☞

p. 17). Connect the presence speakers (☞p. 17) or the speakers for

Zone2 (☞

p. 18) to the EXTRA SP jacks.

h Power cable

For connecting this unit to an AC wall outlet.

i AV1-6 jacks

For connecting to external components equipped with audio/video

outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞

p. 26).

j AV OUT jacks

For outputting audio/video signals received when analog inputs (AV3-

6 or AUDIO1-2) are selected (☞

p. 31).

k AUDIO1-2 jacks

For connecting external components equipped with analog audio

outputs to input sound into this unit (☞

p. 28).

l TRIGGER OUT jack

For connecting an external component that supports the trigger

function to operate it linked with operation of this unit (☞

p. 31).

m MULTI CH INPUT jacks

For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output

(☞

p. 29).

n AUDIO OUT jacks

For outputting audio signals received when analog jacks, such as the

AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are selected (☞

p. 31).

o ZONE2 OUT jacks

Outputs sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a different

room. (☞

p. 98).

p PRE OUT terminals

For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external

power amplifier (☞

p. 20, p. 30).

VIDEO jack For connecting a TV capable of receiving video

input, and outputting video signals to it (☞p. 23).

COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks

For connecting TV that are compatible with

component video signals, using three cables to

output video signal (☞p. 23).

HDMI

OUT

ARC

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

AUDIO

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTERSINGLE

HDMI

OUT

ARC

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

AUDIO

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTERSINGLE

(

)

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MULTI CH INPUT

PTI

HDMI 1

(

DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI

DMI

ENTE

I-AMP

UBW

FER

SUR.BACK

URROUN

RIGGER OUT

+12

.1A MAX

FRON

ENTER

REMOTE

PEAKER

ANTENN

Distinguishing the input and output jacks

The area around the audio/video output jacks is marked

in white to prevent connection errors. Use these jacks to

output audio/video signals to a TV or other external

component.

Output jacks

DOCK

OPTICAL

(

)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MULTI CH INPUT

COAXIAL

(

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4 HDMI 5

CENTER

SURROUND SURROUND

BACK/BI-AMP

SINGLE

EXTRA SP

ZONE2/

PRESENCE

FRONT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

SUBWOOFER

SUR.BACK

SURROUND

TRIGGER OUT

+12V

0.1A MAX.

FRONT

CENTER

ARC

REMOTE

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

AUDI O

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTERSINGLE

DOCK

OPTICAL

(

)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MULTI CH INPUT

COAXIAL

(

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4 HDMI 5

CENTER

SURROUND

BACK/

BI-AMP

SINGLE

EXTRA SP

ZONE2/

PRESENCE

FRONT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

SUBWOOFER

SUR.BACK

SURROUND

TRIGGER OUT

+12V

0.1A MAX.

FRONT

CENTER

ARC

REMOTE

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

AUDI O

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTERSINGLE

SPEAKERS

ANTENNA

GND

adbfc g

ijk

m pl

INTRODUCTION

Part names and functions

En 10

Front panel display

a HDMI indicator

Lights up during normal HDMI communication when any of the

HDMI1-5 inputs are selected.

b CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when a sound field effect that uses CINEMA DSP

technology is selected.

c ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on

(☞

p. 44).

d CINEMA DSP 3D indicator

Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated (☞

p. 43).

e Tuner indicator

Light up according to the status of a received station (☞

p. 54).

f SLEEP indicator

Lights up when the sleep timer is on (☞

p. 11).

g ZONE2 indicator

Lights up when the audio output to Zone2 is enabled (☞

p. 99).

h MUTE indicator

Flashes when audio is muted.

i VOLUME indicator

Displays the current volume level.

j Cursor indicators

Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available

for operations.

k Multi information display

Displays a range of information on menu items and settings.

l Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

SL SR

SBL SBRSB

Front speaker L

Surround speaker L

Subwoofer

Front speaker R

Surround speaker R

Center speaker

Surround back

speaker L

Surround back

speaker R

Surround back

speaker J1

Presence speaker L

Presence speaker

■ Switching information on the front panel display

The front panel can display sound programs and surround

decoder names as well as the active input source.

Press fINFO repeatedly to cycle through input source J2 →

sound program → surround decoder in order.

SWSW

SL SR

SBL SBR

Standard

MOVIE

VOL.

Input source name

Sound program (DSP program)

STEREO

SLEEP

VOL.

TUNED

SL SR

MUTE

ENHANCER

ZONE

SBL SBRSB

jk lj

abcdefihg

1 : “SB” is displayed when using a 6.1-channel configuration only.

2 : During FM/AM reception, the frequency is displayed instead of the input source.

INTRODUCTION

Part names and functions

En 11

Remote control

a Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

b MAIN/ZONE2

Switches the zone to be operated by the remote control between the

Main zone and Zone2 (☞

p. 99).

c SOURCE A (SOURCE Power)

Switches an external component on and off.

d Input selector

Select an input source on this unit from which to playback.

e Radio control keys

Operates the FM/AM tuner. These keys are used when using the tuner

input.

f INFO

Cycles the information displayed on the front panel display (the name

of the currently selected input source, the sound program, the

surround decoder, the FM/AM tuner frequency, etc.).

g Sound selection keys

Switch between the sound field effect (sound program) you are using

and the surround decoder (☞

p. 41).

h SLEEP

Switches this unit to standby mode automatically after a specified

period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press this key repeatedly to

set the time for the sleep timer function.

The SLEEP indicator lights up when the sleep timer is on.

i SCENE

Switch the input source and the sound program with a single button

(☞

p. 41). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to switch on.

j ON SCREEN

Turns on and off the ON SCREEN menu.

k Cursor B / C / D / E, ENTER, RETURN

l External component operation keys

Operate recording, playback, and menu displays etc. for external

components (☞

p. 89). J1

m Numeric keys

Enter numbers.

n TV control keys

Operate a monitor such as a TV.

o CODE SET

Sets remote control codes for external component operations

(☞

p. 90).

p RECEIVER A (RECEIVER Power)

Switches this unit between on and standby mode.

q SOURCE/RECEIVER

Switches remote control key function to operate this unit or an

external component (☞

p. 89). Operate an external component when

this key glows green, or this unit when this key glows orange.

r OPTION

Turns on and off the OPTION menu (☞

p. 49).

s VOLUME +/-

Adjust the volume level (☞

p. 40).

t MUTE

Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (☞

p. 40).

SCENE

RETURN

VOLUME

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHTSLEEP PURE DIRECT

HDMI

AUDIO

1234

125

V-AU X

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

MOVIE MUSIC

DVD

RADIO

MUTE

ENTER

7856

1234

REC

ENT

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

POP-UP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

MAIN

ZONE 2

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

MULTI

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1234

RECEIVER

[ A ]

TUNER

TUNING

HDMI1-5 HDMI1-5 jacks

V-AUX Front panel VIDEO AUX jacks

AUDIO1-2 AUDIO1-2 jacks

AV1-6 AV1-6 jacks

[A] Changes the external component to operate with

the lExternal component operation keys

without changing inputs. J1

MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH INPUT jacks

DOCK A Yamaha iPod universal dock, iPod wireless

receiver, or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

connected to the DOCK jack.

TUNER FM/AM tuner

FM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM.

AM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM.

MEMORY Presets radio stations.

PRESET F / G Selects a preset station.

TUNING H / I Changes tuning frequencies.

Cursor B / C / D / E Select menu items and change settings when

menus, etc, are displayed.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen when menus are

displayed, or close the menu.

Sleep 120min. Sleep 90min.

Sleep 60min.Sleep 30min.Sleep Off

1 : You can use lExternal component operation keys for each input source to operate registered components. Remote control codes must be registered for each input

in advance if you want to operate external components (☞

p. 90).

INTRODUCTION

Part names and functions

En 12

On-screen display

When a TV is connected to this unit, the supplied remote control can be used to specify and verify this

unit’s settings via menus and options displayed on the TV screen.

The following displays are available in the on-screen display.

■ Displaying the following menus or viewing the current status of this unit on the

TV screen

• ON SCREEN menu

Press ON SCREEN to display the ON SCREEN menu.

• OPTION menu

Press OPTION to display the OPTION menu.

• Content window

Press Input selector to display the Content window.

ON SCREEN menu

Detailed settings for this unit can be

configured. Use this menu to select desired

settings, change their values, or check the

current status of this unit.

Refer to “SETUP” (☞

p. 65) for details.

OPTION menu

Configure the optional settings for each input

source. Settings such as “Tone Control” and

“Volume Trim” are applied to this unit

regardless of the input source.

Refer to “Configuring settings specific to an

individual input source (OPTION menu)”

(☞

p. 49) for details.

Content window

Includes the Content browse view and the

Now playing view. The Now playing view

displays the status of the source from which

music is currently played back. Adjust

settings for music content from the Content

browse view.

Refer to “Confirming and operating input

sources from the Content window” (☞

p. 53)

for details.

En 13

CONNECTIONS

This unit uses acoustic field effects and sound decoders to bring you the impact of a real movie theater or concert hall. These effects will be brought to you with ideal speaker positioning and

connections in your listening environment.

Speaker channels and functions

■

Front left and right speakers

The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo

sound) and effect sounds.

Front speaker layout:

Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening

position in the front of the room. When using a projector screen,

the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the

screen from the bottom.

■

Center speaker

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals,

etc.).

Center speaker layout:

Place it halfway between the left and right front speakers. When

using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of

the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned.

When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen.

■

Surround left and right speakers

The surround speakers are for effect and vocal sounds with the 5.1-

channel speakers providing rear-area sounds. When used with 6.1/

7.1-channel (including surround back channel), sound for right and

left rear-area is output.

Surround speaker layout:

Place the speakers at the rear of the room on the left and right sides

facing the listening position. They should be placed between 60

degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position and with the

speaker tops at a height of 1.5 – 1.8 m from the floor.

■

Presence left and right speakers

The presence speakers are used for front effect sounds. When used

in combination with the sound programs (☞

p. 41), a sound with a

richer and more spatial presence is possible.

Presence speaker layout:

Place the left and right presence speakers 0.5 – 1 m to the outside

of the left and right front speakers respectively. The tops of the

presence speakers should be 1.8 m above the floor.

■

Surround back left and right speakers

Outputs the rear effect. When used with 6.1ch sound, sound from

the left and right sound surround back speakers is mixed and output

from a single speaker. When used with 5.1ch sound, sound from

surround back speakers is distributed between the left and right

surround speakers.

Surround back speaker layout:

When used with 7.1ch sound, arrange the left and right speakers

towards the listening position, to the rear of the listening position.

Arrange the left and right speakers at least 30 cm apart. The same

separation as with the front left and right speakers is optimum.

When used with 6.1ch sound, arrange these to the rear of the

listening position.

■

Subwoofer

The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-frequency

effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS. Use a

subwoofer that is equipped with built-in amplifier.

Subwoofer speaker layout:

Place it to the outside of the front left and right speakers facing

slightly inward to reduce echoes from the wall.

Connecting speakers

Ex.

CONNECTIONS

Connecting speakers

En 14

Speaker layout

■

Enjoying the 7.1 channel audio source

■ 7.1-channel speaker layout

(7 speakers + subwoofer)

■ Connections of speakers

Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the

speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back

speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Presence speaker

connection” for details on connecting speakers (☞

p. 17).

■ Assigning a speaker configuration

A speaker configuration must be assigned to this unit to activate the

speakers. Use the “Power Amp Assign” function to easily apply the

appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker

configuration. Speakers for this layout can be activated at the

default “Power Amp Assign” setting (☞

p. 77).

■

Adding the presence speakers for a richer

sound field effect

■ Presence speaker layout

(7 speakers + subwoofer + presence speakers)

■ Connections of speakers

Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the

speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back

speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Presence speaker

connection” for details on connecting speakers (☞

p. 17).

■ Assigning a speaker configuration

A speaker configuration must be assigned to this unit to activate the

speakers. Use the “Power Amp Assign” function to easily apply the

appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker

configuration. Speakers for this layout can be activated at the

default “Power Amp Assign” setting (☞

p. 77).

Audio from a 7.1-channel audio source can be played back with

no degradation with this speaker configuration.

Speaker jacks FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER

EXTRA SP jack No used

Front speaker L

Front speaker R

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Surround speaker L

Surround

speaker R

Surround back speaker RSurround back speaker L

30 cm or more

Power Amp Assign 7ch Normal (Default)

This unit automatically selects the presence speakers or

surround back speakers to output sounds according to the

selected sound program.

When the sound program is changed, the speakers that output

the sound are switched between the presence speakers and

surround back speakers automatically.

Front

speaker L

ron

spea

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Surround speaker L

Surround

speaker R

Presence speaker R

Presence

speaker L

Surround back speaker RSurround back speaker L

30 cm or more

Speaker jacks FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER

EXTRA SP jack Presence L/R speakers

Power Amp Assign 7ch Normal (Default)

Continues to the

CONNECTIONS

Connecting speakers

En 15

■

Enjoying the 7.1 channel audio source

without surround back speakers

■ 5.1-channel speaker layout

(5 speakers + subwoofer)

■ Connections of speakers

Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the

speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back

speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Presence speaker

connection” for details on connecting speakers (☞

p. 17).

■ Assigning a speaker configuration

A speaker configuration must be assigned to this unit to activate the

speakers. Use the “Power Amp Assign” function to easily apply the

appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker

configuration. Speakers for this layout can be activated at the

default “Power Amp Assign” setting (☞

p. 77).

■

Using the front speakers that support bi-

amp connections for a high quality sound

■ 5-channel speaker layout

(Front speakers (Bi-amp) + 3 speakers)

■ Connections of speakers

Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the

speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back

speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Bi-amp connection” for

details on connecting speakers (☞

p. 17, p. 18).

■ Assigning a speaker configuration

Use the “Power Amp Assign” function which can easily apply the

appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker

configuration (☞

p. 77).

This unit can mix 7.1-channel audio source down to 5.1-channel

sound. This enables 7.1-channel sound without surround back

speakers.

Speaker jacks FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SUBWOOFER

EXTRA SP jack No used

Front speaker L

Front speaker R

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Surround speaker L

Surround

speaker R

Power Amp Assign 7ch Normal (Default)

Using the front speakers that support bi-amp connections

reproduces a high quality sound.

Front speaker L

(Bi-amp connection)

Front speaker R

(Bi-amp connection)

Center speaker

Surround speaker L

Surround

speaker R

Subwoofer

Speaker jacks FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER

EXTRA SP jack No used

Power Amp Assign 5ch BI-AMP

Continues to the

CONNECTIONS

Connecting speakers

En 16

■

Using speakers in two rooms (Zone2

function)

■ 7.1-channel speaker layout + Zone2

(7 speakers (in main zone) + subwoofer (in main

zone) + front speakers (in secondary zone))

Main zone

Zone2

■ Connections of speakers

Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the

speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back

speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Multi-zone audio system

using the internal amplifier of this unit” for details on connecting

speakers (☞

p. 17, p. 18).

■ Assigning a speaker configuration

Use the “Power Amp Assign” function which can easily apply the

appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker

configuration (☞

p. 77).

Front speaker L

Front speaker R

Center speaker

Subwoofer

Surround

speaker R

Surround speaker L

Surround back speaker L Surround back speaker R

30 cm or more

Front

speaker R

Front speaker L

In addition to the main room, speakers in another room can also

be controlled.

When the built-in amplifier for the speakers in another room is

turned on, the speakers that output the sound are switched from

the surround back speakers to the speakers in another room

automatically. J1

Speaker jacks FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER

EXTRA SP jack Zone2 speakers

Power Amp Assign 7ch + 1ZONE

1 : Sound cannot be output from both the surround back speakers and the speakers

in the second zone at the same time.

CONNECTIONS

Connecting speakers

En 17

Connecting speakers and subwoofer

Connect your speakers to their respective terminals on the rear panel.

■ Front/Center/Surround/Surround back speaker and

Subwoofer connection

■ Presence speaker connection

When using the presence speakers, connect the speakers to the

EXTRA SP jacks as shown in the diagram below.

The presence speakers (PL/PR) that output front effect sounds can

be connected to this unit. With the sound programs (☞

p. 45),

sound with a richer and more spatial presence can be created.

CAUTION

• Remove the AC power cable of this unit from the power outlet before connecting the speakers.

• Generally speaker cables consist of two parallel insulated cables. One of these cables is a different color, or has a line running along it, to indicate different polarity. Insert the different colored (or lined) cable into the “+”

(positive, red) terminal on this unit and the speakers, and the other cable into the “–” (negative, black) terminal.

• Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP

WIRES!” will appear on the front panel display when this unit is switched on.

CENTER

SURROUND SURROUND

BACK/BI-AMP

SINGLE

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

BACK/

BI-AMP

SINGLE

FRONT

TI CH INPUT

HDMI

SUBWOOFE

UR.BA

OUT

MAX

ENTE

NE2

OUT

URR

UND

UR.BA

PRE

OUT

FER

ENTER

SubwooferCenter speaker

Front speaker Surround

speaker

Surround back

speaker

RL RL

DOCK

OPTICAL

(

)

AUD

IO 1

AUD

IO 2

MULTI CH INPUT

COAXIAL

(

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4 HDMI 5

CENTER

SURROUND SURROUND

BACK/BI-AMP

SINGLE

EXTRA SP

ZONE2/

PRESENCE

FRONT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

SUBWOOFER

SUR.BACK

SURROUND

TRIGGER OUT

+12V

0.1A MAX.

FRONT

CENTER

ARC

REMOTE

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

AUDIO

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTERSINGLE

DOCK

OPTICAL

(

)

AUD

IO 1

AUD

IO 2

MULTI CH INPUT

COAXIAL

(

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4 HDMI 5

CENTER

SURROUND

BACK/

BI-AMP

SINGLE

EXTRA SP

ZONE2/

PRESENCE

FRONT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

SUBWOOFER

SUR.BACK

SURROUND

TRIGGER OUT

+12V

0.1A MAX.

FRONT

CENTER

ARC

REMOTE

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

AUDIO

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTERSINGLE

SPEAKERS

ANTENNA

GND

EXTRA SP

ZONE2/

PRESENCE

Presence

speaker R

Presence

speaker L

• Connection of presence speakers is recommended to take full

advantage of the effects of CINEMA DSP sound programs.

• Although you can connect both surround back speakers and

presence speakers to this unit, you cannot output sounds from

those speakers at the same time.

0.5 – 1 m 0.5 – 1 m

PL PR

FL FR

1.8 m 1.8 m

Continues to the

CONNECTIONS

Connecting speakers

En 18

■ Bi-amp connection

This unit can be connected to speakers that support bi-amp

connections. When connecting speakers, connect the FRONT jacks

and the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks as in the diagram

below. Configure the bi-amp settings to activate connections.

■ Multi-zone audio system using the internal

amplifier of this unit

Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP jacks as

in the diagram below.

■

Changing speaker impedance

This unit is configured for 8 Ω speakers at the factory setting.

When connecting to 6 Ω speakers, carry out the following

procedure to switch to 6 Ω. When this unit is configured for 6 Ω

speakers, 4 Ω speakers can also be used as the front speakers.

Switch this unit to the standby mode.

Press MAIN ZONE A while pressing and holding

STRAIGHT on the front panel.

Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on

the front panel display.

After approximately a few seconds, the top menu item is

displayed. J1

NOTES

• Before making bi-amplification connections, remove any

brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to

the instruction manuals of speakers for details. When not making

bi-amplification connections, make sure that the brackets or

cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.

• If connecting a bi-amp, then surround back speakers cannot be

used.

SINGLE

SURROUND

BACK/

BI-AMP

FRONT

CAUTION

The EXTRA SP jacks of this unit should not be connected to a

Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker

per channel.

Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple

speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance

load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for

correct usage.

Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all

channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found

on the back panel of this unit.

DOCK

OPTICAL

(

)

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

TI C

COAXIAL

(

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4 HDMI 5

CENTER

SURROUND SURROUND

BACK/BI-AMP

SINGLE

EXTRA SP

ZONE2/

PRESENCE

FRONT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

SUBWOOFER

SUR.BACK

SURROUND

TRIGGER OUT

+12V

0.1A MAX.

FRONT

CENTER

ARC

REMOTE

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

AUDIO

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTERSINGLE

DOCK

OPTICAL

(

)

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

TI C

COAXIAL

(

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

HDMI 2 HDMI 3

HDMI 4 HDMI 5

CENTER

SURROUND

BACK/

BI-AMP

SINGLE

EXTRA SP

ZONE2/

PRESENCE

FRONT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

OUT

SUBWOOFER

SUR.BACK

SURROUND

TRIGGER OUT

+12V

0.1A MAX.

FRONT

CENTER

ARC

REMOTE

OUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

AUDIO

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTERSINGLE

SPEAKERS

ANTENNA

GND

EXTRA SP

ZONE2/

PRESENCE

Zone2

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

DVD

RADIO

INPUT

PROGRAM

SCENE

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

YPAO MIC

FM AM

ZONE2 ZONE CONTROL

MAIN ZONE

MAIN ZONE A

STRAIGHT

Continues to the

1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed

(Advanced Setup menu)” (☞

p. 92) for details on the Advanced Setup menu.

CONNECTIONS

Connecting speakers

En 19

Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front panel.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a “6ΩMIN.”

Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then

switch it on again.

The power turns on, when the settings you made has been

configured.

■

Connecting speakers

This type of jack can connect to the following speakers or

connection.

Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the

ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires

of the cables together firmly so that they will not

cause short circuits.

Loosen the speaker terminals.

Insert the bare wire of the speaker cable into the gap

on the side of the terminal.

Tighten the terminal.

SPIMP.-8MIN

• Front L/R speakers

• Center speaker

• Surround L/R speakers

• Surround back L/R speakers

• Bi-amp connection (Front speaker L/R speakers)

FRONT

Connecting the banana plug

Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into the end of

the terminal.

FRONT

Banana plug

CONNECTIONS

Connecting speakers

En 20

■

Connecting extra speakers

The EXTRA SP jacks can connect to the following speakers.

Press down the tab and insert the bare end of the

speaker cable into the hole in the terminal.

Release the tab to secure the wire.

■

Connecting the subwoofer

Connect the subwoofer input jack to the

SUBWOOFER 1 or 2 jack on this unit with an audio

pin cable.

Set the subwoofer volume as follows.

Volume: Set to approximately half volume (or slightly less than

half).

Crossover frequency (if available): Set to maximum.

• Presence L/R speakers

• Zone2 speakers

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

NOTE

After connection, applying this setting to this unit is required to

activate all speaker connections. With using “Power Amp

Assign” function, you can easily apply the speaker

configuration.

Refer to “Power Amp Assign” (☞

p. 77) for details on using

“Power Amp Assign” function.

SURROUND

BACK/

BI-AMP

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer examples

CONNECTIONS

En 21

Cable plugs and jacks

This unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for

components that you are going to connect.

■

Audio/Video jacks

HDMI jacks

Digital video and digital sound are transmitted through a single jack.

Only use an HDMI cable.

■

Analog video jacks

■

Audio jacks

Connecting external components

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.

• We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation.

• When a TV that supports HDMI functions and Audio Return Channel function is connected, audio

output from the TV can be input to this unit (☞

p. 97).

• When a player and TV that support the 3D video format are connected to this unit, 3D content can be

played back.

• If you connect this unit to a component that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is required.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

The signal is separated into three components:

luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P

B), and chrominance red (PR).

Use component video pin cables with three plugs.

HDMI cable

Component video pin cable

VIDEO jacks

These jacks transmit conventional analog video

signals.

Use video pin cables.

OPTICAL jacks

These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals.

Use fiber-optic cables for optical digital audio

signals.

COAXIAL jacks

These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals.

Use pin cables for digital audio signals.

AUDIO jacks

These jacks transmit conventional analog audio

signals.

Use stereo pin cables, connecting the red plug to

the red R jack, and the white plug to the white L

jack.

Video pin cable

Digital audio fiber-optic cable

Digital audio pin cable

Stereo pin cable

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

En 22

Connecting a TV monitor

This unit is equipped with the following three types of output jack for connection to a TV.

HDMI OUT, COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO. Select the proper connection according to the input

signal format supported by your TV.

When connecting to an HDMI compatible TV

Video signal such as component video and video received by this unit is converted to HDMI and output to

the TV. Just select HDMI input on the TV to view video from any external source connected to this unit. J1

When connecting to a non-HDMI compatible TV

Connect to the TV using the same type of connection that you used to connect to the external

component, and change the inputs on your TV to match that of the external component you are using

for playback. If the external component and TV are equipped with different types of analog video

jacks, this unit will convert the video signal to component video signal, or vice-versa, according to the

type of video input jacks used by the TV. J2, J3

HDMI

OUT

ARC

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

HDMI

OUT

ARC

COMPONENT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OCK

IDE

DMI

(

DVD

)

HDM

OMPONENT

IDEO

TRIGGER OU

MAX.

REM

ANTENNA

HDMI OUT jack

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

(MONITOR OUT)

VIDEO jack

(MONITOR OUT)

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

VIDEO

Input Output

HDMI input

Through

Converted

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

VIDEO

Input Output

Video input

Through

Component

video input

Converted

1 : You can change the resolution and aspect ratio when converting to HDMI to suit your requirements (☞p. 83).

2 : Set “Analog to Analog Conversion” to “On” (☞p. 82).

3 : Analog to analog conversion is available only for 480i/576i-resolution video signal.

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

En 23

■

Connecting an HDMI video monitor

Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI OUT jack.

■

Connecting a component video monitor

Connect the component video cable to the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jacks.

■

Connecting a video monitor

Connect the video pin cable to the VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack.

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo.

• We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation.

• When a TV that supports the HDMI function and Audio Return Channel function is connected, audio

output from the TV can be input to this unit (☞

p. 97).

• When a player and TV that support the 3D video format are connected to this unit, 3D content can be

played back.

HDMI

OUT

ARC

HDMI

OUT

ARC

DOC

PTI

(

)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MUL

AXIAL

(

)

AXIA

PTICA

IDE

DMI

(

DVD

)

NEN

IDE

SURRO

TRI

RONT

NEN

IDE

NIT

ANTENNA

HDMI

HDMI input

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

DOC

PTI

(

)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MUL

AXIAL

(

)

AXIA

PTI

IDE

HDMI 1

(

DVD

)

NENT

IDE

HDMI

TRI

IDE

ANTENNA

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Component video input

DOC

PTI

(

)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUD

IO 1

AUDIO 2

MUL

AXIAL

(

)

COAXIA

PTICA

IDE

DMI

(

DVD

)

NEN

IDE

HDMI

SURRO

TRI

RONT

NEN

IDE

NIT

ANTENNA

VIDEO

Video input

1 : When connecting to a TV that supports HDMI input, the video signal for the COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO jacks is

converted and output from HDMI OUT jack. When connecting to a TV via the HDMI jack, you do not need to use these

jacks.

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

En 24

■ Listening to TV audio

To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect as followings according to the TV:

When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and HDMI

Control function

When your TV supports both HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link) and Audio Return

Channel functions, audio/video output from the unit to the TV and audio output from the TV to the

unit are possible using a single HDMI cable.

The input source is switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV, and that

makes TV sound control easier to use.

For the connections and settings, refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return

Channel function” (☞

p. 97).

When using a TV that supports the HDMI Control functions

When using a TV that supports HDMI Control functions (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link), if HDMI

Control functions are enabled on the unit, then input source can be switched automatically to match

operations carried out on the TV.

For the connections and settings, refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically

when listening to TV audio” (☞

p. 96).

When using other TVs

To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 jacks to the TV’s audio

output jacks.

Select the input source connected via TV’s audio output jack to enjoy the TV sound.

If the TV supports optical digital audio output, we recommend that you connect the TV audio output

to the receiver’s AV4 jack.

Connecting to AV4 allows you to switch the input source to AV4 with just a single key operation

using the SCENE function (☞

p. 41).

You can control your TV using the receiver’s remote control by entering the TV’s remote control

code (☞

p. 90).

TV audio output Connection

Optical digital audio output Connect to the OPTICAL jack of the AV1 or AV4 with a fiber-optic cable.

Coaxial digital audio output Connect to the COAXIAL jack of the AV2 or AV3 with a digital audio pin

cable.

Analog stereo output Connect to one of the AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2 with a stereo pin

cable.

OPTICAL

(

)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

(

)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

COAXIAL

(

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

OCK

MUL

IDEO

HDMI 1

(

D/DVD

)

NEN

IDE

HDMI

OUT

NENT

VIDE

NIT

OUT

ANTENNA

OPTICALCOAXIALAUDIO

Audio output

(Optical, coaxial, or analog)

Available input jacks

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

En 25

Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices

This unit has the following input jacks. Connect them to the appropriate output jacks on

the playback devices such as BD/DVD players.

■

Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with

HDMI

Connect the device with an HDMI cable to one of the HDMI1-5 jacks. The HDMI IN

jack on the front panel can also be used.

Select the HDMI input (HDMI1-5 or VIDEO AUX) that the playback device is

connected to for playback.

ENTER

ON SCREEN

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

NER

TUNING

jON SCREEN

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

Input jack Video input Audio input

HDMI1 HDMI HDMI

HDMI2 HDMI HDMI

HDMI3 HDMI HDMI

HDMI4 HDMI HDMI

HDMI5 HDMI HDMI

AV1 Component video Optical digital

AV2 Component video Coaxial digital

AV3 Video Coaxial digital

AV4 Video Optical digital

AV5 Video Analog (Stereo)

AV6 Video Analog (Stereo)

AUDIO1 — Analog (Stereo)

AUDIO2 — Analog (Stereo)

VIDEO AUX HDMI/Video HDMI/Analog (Stereo)

(

BD/DVD

(

BD/DVD

)

(

)

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MULTI CH INPUT

(

)

AXIAL

PTI

VIDEO

ENTER

HDMI

OUT

R.BA

+12V

0.1

MAX

CENTER

EMOT

OUT

NENT

VIDE

NIT

OUT

NTENN

HDMI

HDMI output

BD/DVD player

■ Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals

from a jack other than HDMI

This unit can use the AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 input jacks to receive audio signals from

other input jacks.

For example, if a playback device cannot produce audio signals from an HDMI jack,

use the following method to change the audio input.

Press jON SCREEN to display the ON SCREEN menu.

Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Input,” and then press

kENTER. J1

Press kCursor D / E repeatedly to select the desired HDMI input

source, and then press kCursor B.

Press kCursor C repeatedly to select “Audio In,” and then press

kENTER.

Press kCursor B / C to select the audio input source.

Once you have completed the setup, press jON SCREEN to close

the menu.

1 : Refer to the “Configuring input sources (Input menu)” (☞p. 65) for details on selecting the input source.

OPTICAL

(

OPTICAL

(

BD/DVD

)

OCK

(

)

AV 3

AV 2

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDI O 2

MULTI CH INPUT

AXIA

(

)

AXIA

PTI

IDE

HDMI

DMI

OUT

UR.BAC

SURROUN

+12V

0.1A MAX.

FRONT

OMPONEN

VIDE

NENT

IDEO

NIT

ANTENNA

HDMI

OPTICAL

HDMI

HDMI/Audio (Optical)

output

BD/DVD player

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

En 26

■

Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with component

video cables

Connect the device with a component video cable to one of the AV1-2 input jacks.

Using optical digital audio output sources

Select the AV1 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.

Using coaxial digital audio output sources

Select the AV2 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.

OPTICAL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OPTICAL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

DOCK

(

)

AV 3

AV 2

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MUL

AXIA

(

)

AXIAL

PTI

VIDE

HDMI 1

(

)

HDMI

OUT

URRO

TRI

FRON

ARC

NENT

VIDE

NIT

ANTENNA

COMPONENT

OPTICAL

Component video / Audio (Optical)

output

BD/DVD player

COAXIAL

PTI

(

)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MUL

(

)

AXIA

PTI

IDEO

HDMI 1

(

DVD

)

NEN

IDE

HDMI

OUT

NEN

VIDE

NIT

ANTENNA

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COAXIAL

Component video / Audio (Coaxial)

output

BD/DVD player

■ Component connections to analog audio output devices

The video input from the AV1-2 jacks can be used in combination with the audio input from other

AV inputs or AUDIO1-2.

When connecting these devices, select the AV input jacks or the AUDIO1-2 jacks as the audio input

for AV1 or AV2. Refer to “Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals from a

jack other than HDMI” (☞

p. 25) for detailed setup guidance.

For playback of the connected device, select the AV input source (AV1-2) to which the device is

connected with the component video cable.

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OCK

PTICA

(

)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 2

MULTI CH INPUT

AXIA

(

)

AXIA

PTI

VIDE

HDMI

(

)

HDMI

OUT

UBW

UR.BA

URR

UND

TRIGGER OU

MAX.

ARC

NEN

VIDE

NIT

OUT

ANTENN

AUDIO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Component video / Audio

output

Game console

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

En 27

■

Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with video cables

Connect the playback device with a video pin cable to one of the AV3-6 input jacks.

Using optical digital audio output sources

Select the AV4 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.

Using coaxial digital audio output sources

Select the AV3 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.

Using analog stereo audio output sources

Select the AV5 or AV6 input to which the playback device is connected for playback.

OPTICAL

DOC

PTI

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MUL

AXIAL

(

)

AXIA

IDE

HDMI 1

(

DVD

)

NEN

IDE

HDMI

OUT

SURRO

RONT

NEN

IDE

NIT

ANTENNA

VIDEO

OPTICAL

Video / Audio (Optical)

output

BD/DVD player

COAXIAL

VIDEO

(

)

COAXIAL

VIDEO

PTI

(

)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MUL

AXIAL

PTI

HDMI 1

(

DVD

)

NEN

IDE

HDMI

OUT

SURRO

FRON

NEN

IDE

VIDE

NIT

ANTENNA

VIDEO

COAXIAL

Video / Audio (Coaxial)

output

BD/DVD player

PTI

(

)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

AUDI O 1

AUDI O 2

MUL

AXIAL

(

)

AXIA

PTI

IDEO

HDMI 1

(

DVD

)

NEN

IDE

HDMI

OUT

SURRO

FRON

NEN

IDE

VIDE

NIT

ANTENNA

AUDIO

VIDEO

Video / Audio

output

BD/DVD player

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

En 28

■

Connecting CD players and other audio devices

Using analog stereo output sources

Select the audio input (AUDIO1-2) to which the playback device is connected for playback.

Using optical digital output sources

Select the AV input (AV1 or AV4) to which the playback device is connected for playback.

Using coaxial digital output sources

Select the AV input (AV2 or AV3) to which the playback device is connected for playback.

PTI

(

)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

MUL

AXIAL

(

)

AXIA

PTI

IDEO

HDMI 1

(

DVD

)

NEN

IDE

HDMI

OUT

NEN

IDE

VIDE

NIT

ANTENNA

AUDIO

Audio output

CD player

OPTICAL

AV 3

AV 2

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MUL

AXIAL

(

)

AXIA

IDEO

HDMI 1

(

DVD

)

NEN

IDE

HDMI

OUT

NEN

VIDE

NIT

ANTENNA

OPTICAL

CD player

Audio (Optical) output

We recommend connecting audio devices with a coaxial digital output to the AV3 coaxial digital

jack on this unit. This connection allows you to switch to the AV input 3 just by pressing the “CD”

SCENE key (☞

p. 41).

COAXIAL

(

)

COAXIAL

PTI

(

)

AV 1

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDI O 2

MUL

PTI

IDEO

HDMI 1

(

DVD

)

NEN

IDE

HDMI

OUT

NEN

IDE

VIDE

NIT

ANTENNA

COAXIAL

Audio (Coaxial) output

CD player

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

En 29

Connecting game consoles

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as a game console to

the receiver.

Select the V-AUX input to use these connected devices.

■

When connecting an HDMI compatible device

Connect the HDMI output of the device to the HDMI IN jack of this unit.

■

When connecting an non-HDMI compatible device

Connect the video and audio outputs of the device to the VIDEO and AUDIO jacks of this unit.

Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder

This unit has 8 sets of input jacks (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SUR. BACK and

SUBWOOFER) to input multi-channel analog sound signals. If your playback component, such as a

DVD player or SACD player, has multi-channel analog output capability, you can enjoy up to 7.1-

channel multi-channel sound. To output multi-channel sound, connect the audio output jacks of your

playback component to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit, and set the input source of this unit to

“MULTI CH.”

VIDEO

AUX

STRAIGHT

VOLUME

RADIO

VIDEO

AUDI OLR

HDMI IN

HDMI

HDMI output

Game console

VIDEO

AUX

STRAIGHT

VOLUME

RADIO

VIDEO

AUDI OLR

HDMI IN

AUDIO

VIDEO

Video output

Analog audio output

Game console

• Be sure to turn down the volume when connecting this unit and the other devices.

• When both the HDMI connection and the analog video/audio connection are performed between the

HDMI compatible device and this unit, only the HDMI signal will be input.

• When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field processor and tone control are

automatically disabled.

• Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for

missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system when using this feature.

• When the input source is switched to “MULTI CH,” images input from a component connected to the

HDMI1-5, AV1-6, or VIDEO AUX jacks can be displayed on a video monitor (☞

p. 68). If your DVD

player does not support multi-channel digital output, connect it to these input jacks.

MULTI CH INPUT

SUBWOOFER

SUR.BACK

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

RL RL RL

Surround out

Front out

Subwoofer out

Center out

Multi-format player/External decoder

(7.1-channel output)

Surround back out

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

En 30

Connecting an external amplifier

The same channel signals are output from the jacks of the PRE OUT terminals as from their

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main

amplifier) to enhance speaker output, connect the input terminals of the power amplifier to the PRE

OUT terminals of this unit.

Connecting a SCENE link playback-compatible device

When the components are the Yamaha products and have the capability of the transmission of the

remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote control input

and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows.

NOTE

When a component is connected to the PRE OUT terminals, do not connect speakers to the

SPEAKERS terminals corresponding to those PRE OUT terminals.

a FRONT (PRE OUT) jacks

Front channel output jacks.

b SURROUND (PRE OUT) jacks

Surround channel output jacks.

c SUR. BACK (PRE OUT) jacks

Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel,

connect it to the SUR. BACK (SINGLE) jack.

d SUBWOOFER (PRE OUT) 1/2 jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. When two subwoofers are connected, the same sound is

output from them.

e CENTER (PRE OUT) jack

Center channel output jack.

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTERSINGLE

SURROUND

SUR.BACK

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTERSINGLE

URR

UND

URR

UND

BI-AMP

EXTRA

NE2

PRESENC

abc d e

• When a Yamaha component that supports the SCENE link playback function is connected via the

REMOTE OUT jack, playback begins automatically when the SCENE function is used (☞

p. 41).

• If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not a Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the

SCENE menu to “Off” (☞

p. 70).

OUT

(

)

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MULTI CH INPUT

(

)

COAXIA

PTICAL

VIDE

DMI 1

(

DVD

)

HDMI 2

DMI 3

HDMI

UBW

UR.BAC

URROUN

RIGGER OU

+12

MAX.

FRON

ENTER

OMPONEN

VIDE

NIT

AUDI

ANTENNA

Remote control out

Remote control in

Infrared signal receiver or

Yamaha component

(CD or DVD player, etc.)

CONNECTIONS

Connecting external components

En 31

Using the Trigger function to link external component power

When this unit is connected to a Yamaha subwoofer that supports the system connection or the

component with TRIGGER IN jack, you can turn on and off the component by using this unit.

■

When connecting a Yamaha subwoofer

■

When connecting a component with the TRIGGER IN jack

Connecting audio/video recording devices

This receiver can transmit selected incoming analog audio/video signals to external components

through the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks. You can record these input audio and video signals to

VCRs or similar devices, or send them to other TVs or external components.

Using the AV OUT jacks

Connect this jacks to the external component’s video input jack and analog audio input jacks.

Using the AUDIO OUT jacks

Connect this jack to the external component’s analog audio input jacks.

Functions of the TRIGGER OUT jack can be specified (☞

p. 87).

+12V

0.1A MAX.

+12V

0.1A MAX.

(

)

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MULTI CH INPUT

(

)

COAXIA

PTICAL

IDE

DMI

(

DVD

)

HDMI 2

DMI 3

FRON

HDMI

UBWOOFER

UR.BACK

SURROUND

RONT

ENTER

REM

OMPONEN

IDEO

NIT

AUDI

ANTENNA

System connection input

Yamaha subwoofer

that supports the system

connection

+12V

0.1A MAX.

+12V

0.1A MAX.

(

)

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MULTI CH INPUT

(

)

COAXIA

PTICAL

IDE

DMI

(

DVD

)

HDMI 2

DMI 3

FRON

HDMI

UBWOOFER

UR.BACK

SURROUND

RONT

ENTER

REM

OMPONEN

IDEO

NIT

AUDI

ANTENNA

TRIGGER IN

Trigger input

Component with the

TRIGGER IN jack

(Power amplifier or

DVD player, etc.)

HDMI audio/video signals, component video signals, and digital audio signals cannot be transmitted

from these jacks.

OUT

AUDI O

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

OCK

OPTICA

(

)

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDI O 2

MULTI CH INPUT

AXIAL

(

)

COAXIA

PTICAL

IDE

DMI

(

DVD

)

HDMI 2

DMI 3

OMPONEN

IDEO

HDMI

UBW

FER

UR.BACK

SURROUND

TRIGGER OU

MAX.

RONT

ENTER

OMPONEN

IDEO

VIDE

NIT

ANTENNA

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUDIO

Audio recorder

Audio input

VCR

Video / Audio

input

CONNECTIONS

En 32

An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are supplied with this receiver. Connect these antennas

properly to their respective jacks.

Assembling the AM loop antenna

Connecting the FM/AM antennas

GND

VIDE

HDMI 1

(

BD/DVD

)

NENT

IDE

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDE

IDE

MONITOR OUT

Indoor FM antenna

AM loop antenna

Position the AM antenna away from the

receiver. The wires of the AM antenna have

no polarity.

You can connect either wire to the AM jack

or the GND jack.

Connecting the AM loop antenna

ReleaseInsertPress and hold

■ Improving FM reception

We recommend using an outdoor antenna. For more information, consult the nearest authorized

dealer.

■ Improving AM reception

Connect this unit to an outdoor antenna with a 5 – 10 m vinyl-coated wire. Make sure the AM loop

antenna is still connected.

Connecting the GND jack can reduce noise. Connect the jack to a store-bought ground bar or copper

plate with a vinyl-covered wire and bury this new attachment in moist ground.

The GND jack is not to be connected to the ground socket of an electrical outlet.

CONNECTIONS

En 33

This unit is equipped with a Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) that adjusts the status, size, and volume balance of the speakers in order to provide an optimal sound field. Using

YPAO allows you to automatically configure settings, such as adjusting speaker output and acoustic parameters to suit your listening room (the room in which this unit is placed). J1

Check the following before using YPAO.

This unit

• The headphones are removed.

• This unit is connected to the TV correctly.

• The power is turned on.

• The video input to which the video output from this unit has been

selected.

Subwoofer

• The power is turned on.

• Volume is set to approximately half, and the cross-over frequency (if

present) is set to maximum.

Place the supplied YPAO microphone at ear height in

your listening position.

Face the head of the YPAO microphone upwards.

Switch this unit on.

Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)

When using YPAO, a test tone will be output from the speakers

for approximately 3 minutes to measure acoustics. Be aware of

the following when using YPAO.

• The test tone is output at high volume. Refrain from using this

function at night when it may be a nuisance to others.

• Take care that the test tone does not frighten small children.

YPAO operations can be viewed on the front panel display or

TV screen.

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer examples

When positioning the microphone, we recommend that you use

equipment that allows you to adjust the height (such as a tripod)

as a microphone stand. When using a tripod, use the tripod

screws to fix the microphone in place.

YPAO microphone

Continues to the

1 : When you have changed the number of speakers or the locations in which they

are installed, first use YPAO to adjust the speaker balance.

CONNECTIONS

Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)

En 34

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO

MIC jack on the front panel.

“Mic On. View ON SCREEN” appears on the front

panel display, and the following display appears on the

front panel display or TV screen.

Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select

the “Measure” and press kENTER to start

measurement.

Auto measurement starts in 10 seconds.

Display during measurement

The following display appears when measurement

finishes without any problems.

Cursor B / C

kENTER

kRETURN

RETURN

ENTER

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

NER

TUNING

YPAO MIC

ZONE2 ZON

MAIN ZONE

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

ENTER to Start

YPAO

VOL.

This completes preparation. To achieve more accurate

results, take note of the following when measuring

acoustics.

• It takes approximately 3 minutes to accurately

measure acoustics. Keep the room as quiet as possible

while acoustics are measured.

• Wait in a corner of the room, or leave it entirely, while

acoustics are measured to avoid creating an

obstruction between the speakers and the YPAO

microphone.

• To start the measurement immediately, press

kENTER again.

• To cancel the automatic setup and return to the

previous screen, press

kRETURN and then

kENTER.

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

Progress



YPAO

VOL.

SL SR

Save/Exit

YPAO

VOL.

Continues to the

CONNECTIONS

Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)

En 35

Press kCursor B / C to select “Save/Exit”

and press kENTER.

Press kCursor D / E to select “SAVE” and

press kENTER.

Press kENTER.

YPAO is automatically terminated. Disconnect the

YPAO microphone.

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

ENTER

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

NER

TUNING

Result Displays the results of automatic

acoustics measurement. Refer to

“Reviewing and reloading automatic

setup parameters” for details (☞p. 36).

Save/Exit Applies the result to the speaker setup and

finishes the automatic measurement.

NOTE

If a problem occurs, an error message or report is

displayed either during or after acoustic measurement.

Refer to “When an error message is displayed during

measurement” (☞

p. 37), or “When a warning

message is displayed after measurement” (☞

p. 37) to

resolve the problem and measure acoustics with

YPAO again.

VOL.

SL SR

Select:Save

YPAO

VOL.

The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. When you

have finished measuring, store the microphone out of

direct sunlight, and away from locations that may

experience high temperatures, such as on top of AV

equipment.

VOL.

SL SR

Disconnect Mic

YPAO

VOL.

CONNECTIONS

Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)

En 36

■

Reviewing and reloading automatic

setup parameters

The results of automatic acoustics measurement can be

reviewed once measurement is complete. Automatic

setup parameters can also be reloaded if you are not

satisfied with manually configured speaker setup and

sound adjustments.

Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select

“Result” and press kENTER immediately

after the automatic measurement.

The results of acoustics measurement are displayed.

List of menu items

Menu items available in the Result menu are displayed.

b Diagram

Shows the speaker setup and sound adjustment as diagram.

c Message

Displays warning or error messages.

Select the desired menu item (or enable a

function) using kCursor B / C / D / E and

kENTER.

Press kRETURN to finish “Result” menu.

Cursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

kRETURN

RETURN

ENTER

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

NER

TUNING

NOTE

When automatic setup parameters are reloaded,

manually configured settings are cleared. To save

manually configured settings before reloading

automatic setup parameters, see “Prohibiting setting

changes” (☞

p. 87).

The “Result” menu can also be viewed from the

display shown after the YPAO microphone is

connected.

Wiring Displays the polarity of each connected

speaker.

• “Normal” is displayed when the

polarity of the connected speaker is

normal.

Size Displays the size of the connected

speakers.

• “Large” is displayed when the

connected speaker has the ability to

reproduce the low-frequency signals

effectively.

• “Small” is displayed when the

connected speaker does not have the

ability to reproduce the low-frequency

signals effectively.

Distance Displays the distance from the listening

position to speakers. The unit for distance

can be switched between “ft” (feet) and

“m” (meter) by pressing kCursor D / E.

Level Displays the result of the adjustment of

each connected speaker output level.

Setup Reload Applies “Result” menu settings to this

unit.

The type of parametric equalizer can also be selected

from “PEQ Select” (☞

p. 80).

CONNECTIONS

Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)

En 37

■

When an error message is

displayed during measurement

See “Error messages” (☞p. 38) for instructions on

resolving the problem and measure acoustics again.

Check the error code displayed and use YPAO to

measure acoustics again as described below.

When “E-1,” “E-2,” “E-3,” “E-4” or “E-6” is

displayed

Press kENTER.

Press kCursor E to select “EXIT.”

Press kENTER to terminate YPAO, and

switch the unit to standby mode.

Check that the speakers are properly

connected.

Turn on the unit and use YPAO again.

When “E-5,” “E-7,” “E-8” or “E-9” is displayed

Press kENTER.

Check that the environment is suitable for

accurate measurement.

Press kCursor E to select “RETRY.”

Press kENTER to use YPAO again.

When “E-10” is displayed

Press kENTER.

Press kCursor E to select “EXIT.”

Press kENTER to terminate YPAO.

Switch the unit to standby mode.

Turn on the unit and use YPAO again.

■

When a warning message is

displayed after measurement

See “Warning messages” (☞p. 39) for instructions on

resolving the problem. The speaker causing the problem

can be confirmed from the TV screen display.

To exit YPAO with some options

Use kCursor B / C to select “Save/Exit”

and press kENTER.

Use kCursor D / E to select one of the

following options and press kENTER.

SAVE:

Exits YPAO applying the results of measurement.

CANCEL:

Returns to the previous screen (warning message

screen).

EXIT:

Exits YPAO without saving the results.

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

kRETURN

RETURN

ENTER

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

NER

TUNING

NOTE

Although the results of acoustics measurement can be

applied when a warning message is displayed, optimal

sound will not be achieved. Resolving the problem

and using YPAO to measure acoustics again is

recommended.

CONNECTIONS

Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)

En 38

■

Message list

■ When a warning message is displayed before

measurement

■ Error messages

NOTE

If the following messages appear, resolve the problems that have

occurred and carry out the measurement process again.

Connect MIC! The YPAO microphone is

not connected.

Connect the YPAO

microphone to the YPAO

MIC jack on the front

panel.

Unplug HP! The headphones are

connected.

Remove the headphones.

Memory Guard! The settings of this unit

are protected.

Set “Memory Guard” in

the Setup menu to “Off”

(☞p. 87).

E-1:

No Front SP

The unit was not able to

find the front channel.

Check that the left and

right front speakers are

connected correctly.

E-2:

No Sur. SP

The unit was only able to

find one of side of the

surround channels.

Check that the left and

right surround speakers

are connected correctly.

E-3:

No F.PRNS SP

The unit was only able to

find one of side of the

presence channels.

Check that the left and

right presence speakers

are connected correctly.

E-4:

SBR→SBL

Only one surround back

speaker is connected and

only the right side

surround back channel

sound is detected.

When only one surround

back speaker is

connected, connect to the

left side (SINGLE)

terminal.

E-5:

Noisy

The noise is too loud,

preventing accurate

measurements from

being taken.

Measure again in quiet

surroundings. Turn off any

devices in the room that

may be emitting noise, or

place them further away

from the YPAO

microphone.

When this message is

displayed, selecting

“PROCEED” will allow

you to continue measuring.

However, we recommend

resolving the problem and

measuring again, as

continuing measurement

without doing so will not

give accurate results.

E-6:

Check Sur.

Even though surround

left and right speakers are

not connected, only the

surround back speakers

are connected.

When using surround back

speakers, connection of the

surround left/right

speakers is necessary.

E-7:

No MIC

The YPAO microphone

has been removed.

While measuring, take

care not to touch the

YPAO microphone.

E-8:

No Signal

The YPAO microphone

could not distinguish a

test tone.

Check that the YPAO

microphone has been

installed correctly.

Check that each speaker

has been connected and

installed correctly.

The YPAO microphone

or the YPAO MIC jack

may be broken. Inquire at

the retailer where you

purchased this unit, or the

nearest Yamaha service

center.

E-9:

User Cancel

You have carried out an

operation that has

cancelled the measuring

process.

Carry out the measuring

process again. Do not

operate this unit by, for

example, adjusting the

volume.

E-10:

Internal Error

An internal error has

occurred.

Carry out the measuring

process again. Contact a

Yamaha service center if

“E-10” is displayed

again.

CONNECTIONS

Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO)

En 39

■ Warning messages

W-1:

Out of Phase

The speakers displayed

are connected with the

opposite polarity.

Depending on the type of

speakers you are using

and the environment in

which you have them

installed, this message

may occur even if the

speakers are connected

correctly.

Depending on the type of

speakers, “W-1” may

display even if the

speakers are connected

correctly.

Check that the speaker

polarity + (positive), and

- (negative) are correct. If

these are connected

correctly, you can use the

speakers normally even

this message appears.

W-2:

Over 24m/80ft

The speakers displayed

are separated from the

listening position by

more than 24 m, and

cannot be adjusted

correctly.

Install the speakers with

24 m of the listening

point.

W-3:

Level Error

Volume level varies

greatly for individual

channels, and cannot be

adjusted correctly.

Check that all speakers

are installed in the same

surroundings.

Check that the speaker

polarity + (positive), and

- (negative) are correct.

We recommend the same

speakers or speakers with

as similar specifications

as possible.

Adjust the volume of the

subwoofer.

If “W-2” or “W-3” appears, you can apply measurement results,

but they will not give optimal results. We recommend that you

resolve the problem and carry out the measurement process

again.

En 40

PLAYBACK

Turn on external components (TV, DVD

player, etc.) connected to this unit.

Use the dInput selector to select the input

source.

The name of the selected input source is displayed for

a few seconds. J1

When DOCK or TUNER is selected, the Content

window is displayed (☞

p. 53).

Play the external component that you have

selected as the source input, or select a

radio station on the tuner.

Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the

external component for details on playback.

For details on the following operations, refer to the

corresponding pages:

• “FM/AM tuning” (☞p. 54)

• “Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™”

(☞

p. 58)

• “Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components”

(☞

p. 63)

Press sVOLUME +/- to adjust the volume.

To mute the output.

Press tMUTE to mute the audio output.

Press tMUTE again to unmute.

Adjusting high/low-frequency sound

(Tone control)

You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range

(Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds

output from the front left and right speakers to obtain

desired tone.

Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel

repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.”

The current setting is displayed on the front panel

display.

Press PROGRAM l / h to adjust the output

level in those frequency ranges.

The display returns to the previous display soon after

you release the key.

Basic playback procedure

dInput selector

sVOLUME +/-

tMUTE

VOLUME

HDMI

AUDIO

1234

125

V-AUX

MUTE

DOCK

MULTI

1234

TUNER

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENTER

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

[

]

RESET

TUNING

The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be

set separately. Set the headphone tone control with the

headphones connected.

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

DVD

RADIO

INPUT

PROGRAM

SCENE

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

YPAO MIC

ZONE2 ZONE CONTROL

MAIN ZONE

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM l / h

SL SR

SBL SBR

SL SR

Treble +0.5dB

TONE

VOL.

Adjustable range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Adjustment

increments

0.5 dB

• If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not

match those from other channels well.

• The tone control can also be adjusted in the OPTION

menu (☞

p. 50).

1 : You can change the input source name displayed on the front

panel display as necessary (☞

p. 66).

PLAYBACK

En 41

This unit has a SCENE function that allows you switch this unit on and change input sources and sound programs with one key.

Four scenes are available for different uses, such as

playing movies or music. The following input sources

and sound programs are provided as the initial factory

settings.

Registering input sources/sound

program

Use dInput selector to select the input

source you want to register.

Use the gSound selection keys to select

the sound program or Compressed Music

Enhancer mode you want to register.

Press the iSCENE key until “SET

Complete” appears on the front panel

display.

This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. Multi-channel playback from almost any audio source can be enjoyed using a variety

of sound decoders and various sound field effect programs stored on the chip. Sound field effect programs built into this unit are called “sound programs.”

Selecting sound programs and

sound decoders

This unit offers sound programs in many different

categories suitable for movies, music and other uses.

Choose a sound program that sounds best with the

source you are playing back, rather than relying on the

name or explanation of the program.

Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function)

dInput selector

gSound selection keys

iSCENE

SCENE

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT

HDMI

AUDIO

1234

125

V-AUX

MOVIE MUSIC

DVD

RADIO

DOCK

MULTI

1234

TUNER

RETURN

SLEEP

ENTER

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

RESET

[

]

TUNING

SCENE Input

Sound

program

Compressed

Music

Enhancer

mode

BD/DVD HDMI1 Drama Off

TV AV4 STRAIGHT On

CD AV3 STRAIGHT Off

RADIO TUNER STRAIGHT On

• When changing “SCENE,” also change the external

component that the remote control operates (☞

p. 89).

• Selecting a scene and editing the scene function are

also available in the SCENE menu (☞

p. 69).

SL SR

SET Complete

SCENE1

VOL.

SBL SBR

Release the key when “SET Complete” is displayed

Enjoying the desired sound field effect

• Sound programs are stored for each input source.

When you change the input source, the sound program

previously selected for that input source is applied

again.

• When you playback DTS Express sources or audio

signals with sampling frequency of higher than

96 kHz, the straight decoding mode (☞

p. 42) is

automatically selected.

• When you playback DTS-HD sources with CINEMA

DSP, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.

Continues to the

PLAYBACK

Enjoying the desired sound field effect

En 42

Selecting sound program (☞p. 45):

MOVIE category: Press gMOVIE repeatedly

MUSIC category: Press gMUSIC repeatedly

Selecting stereo reproduction:

Press gMUSIC repeatedly

Selecting surround decoder:

Press gSUR. DECODE repeatedly

Turning on Straight decoding mode:

Press gSTRAIGHT

Turning on Pure Direct mode (☞p. 44):

Press gPURE DIRECT

Turning on Compressed Music Enhancer

mode (☞

p. 44):

Press gENHANCER repeatedly

■

Enjoying unprocessed playback

(Straight decoding mode)

Use straight decoding mode when you want to playback

sound without sound field processing. You can playback

as follows in straight decoding mode.

2-channel sources such as CD

Stereo sound plays through the front left and right

speakers.

Multi-channel playback sources such as BD/

DVD

Plays back audio from a playback source without

applying sound field effects, using an appropriate

decoder to split the signal into multiple channels.

Press gSTRAIGHT to enable the straight

decoding mode.

■

Enjoying stereo playback

Select “2ch Stereo” from the sound programs when you

want to playback 2-channel stereo sound (from the front

speakers only), regardless of the playback source.

Selecting “2ch Stereo” will playback as follows for the

playback of CD and BD/DVD sources.

2-channel sources such as CD

Stereo sound plays back through the front speakers.

Multi-channel sources such as BD/DVD

Playback channels other than the front channels in the

playback source are mixed with the front channels and

played back through the front speakers.

Press gMUSIC repeatedly to select “2ch

Stereo.”

Sound selection keys

gMOVIE

gMUSIC

gENHANCER

gSUR. DECODE

gSTRAIGHT

gPURE DIRECT

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODE

STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT

MOVIE MUSIC

SCENE

RETURN

SLEEP

DVD

RADI

ENTER

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

PTION

REE

[

]

NER

TUNING

• You can use the speaker indicators on the front panel

display to check what speakers are currently

outputting sound (☞

p. 10).

• You can adjust sound field elements (sound field

parameters) for each of the programs (☞

p. 71).

SL SR

Sci-Fi

MOVIE

VOL.

SBL SBR

Sound program categories

Program

To disable straight decoding mode, press

gSTRAIGHT again.

SL SR

Straight

VOL.

SBL SBR

SL SR

Sci-Fi

MOVIE

VOL.

SBL SBR

Previously selected program

To disable stereo playback, press any of the

gSound selection keys to select a sound program

other than “2ch Stereo.”

2ch Stereo

MUSIC

VOL.

PLAYBACK

Enjoying the desired sound field effect

En 43

■

Enjoying sound programs without

surround sound speakers

This unit allows you to use virtual surround speakers to enjoy

sound field surround effects, even without any surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP mode). You can even enjoy surround sound

presence with just a minimal configuration of the front speakers

only.

This unit will switch to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode automatically

when surround speakers are unavailable. J1

■

Enjoying sound programs with

headphones

Even when headphones are connected, you can enjoy the

reproduction sound field presence with ease (SILENT CINEMA

mode). J2

■

Enjoying more spatial sound fields

(CINEMA DSP 3D mode)

CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates an intensive and accurate

stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.

Connection of presence speakers is recommended to take full

advantage of the effects of CINEMA DSP 3D mode. Do the

following steps and then select a CINEMA DSP sound program

(☞

p. 45). J3

• Connect the presence speakers to the EXTRA SP jacks (☞p. 17).

• Set “Front Presence” to “Use” (☞

p. 78).

• Set “Power Amp Assign” to “7ch Normal”(☞

p. 77).

• Enable CINEMA DSP 3D in the OPTION menu (☞

p. 50).

When a sound program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, the

CINEMA DSP 3D indicator on the front panel lights up.

■

Enjoying sound programs without

presence speakers

This unit allows you to use virtual presence speakers to create an

intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field, even when no

presence speakers are connected (Virtual CINEMA DSP 3D

mode). You can even enjoy surround sound presence with front

speakers, center speaker, and surround speakers.

This unit automatically switches to Virtual CINEMA DSP 3D

mode when presence speakers are not available.

Do the following steps and then select a CINEMA DSP sound

program (☞

p. 45).

• Connect the front speakers, center speaker, and surround speakers.

• Enable center speaker and surround speakers in “Configuration”

(☞p. 78).

• Enable CINEMA DSP 3D in the OPTION menu (☞

p. 50).

PL PR

SL SR

Hall in Vienna

MUSIC

VOL.

Lights up

1 : However, Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is not available under the following

conditions:

• When headphones are connected to this unit.

• When a “7ch Stereo” or “2ch Stereo” sound program is selected.

• When Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.

2 : However, SILENT CINEMA mode is not available under the following

conditions:

• When a “2ch Stereo” sound program is selected.

• When Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.

3 : However, CINEMA DSP 3D mode is not available under the following

conditions:

• When headphones are connected to this unit.

• When a “7ch Stereo” or “2ch Stereo” sound program is selected.

• When Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.

PLAYBACK

Enjoying the desired sound field effect

En 44

■

Enjoying Hi-Fi Sound Quality

(Pure Direct mode)

Use Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity

sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct mode is

enabled, this unit plays back the selected source with the

least circuitry. J1

Press gPURE DIRECT to turn Pure Direct mode

on. J2

■

Enjoying enhanced compression

artifacts (Compressed Music

Enhancer mode)

Compressed Music Enhancer mode improves the sound

enhancer near to the original depth and width of

compression artifacts. J3

This mode can be used along with any other DSP modes.

Press gENHANCER to turn Compressed Music

Enhancer mode on.

ENHANCER

gPURE DIRECT

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

SCENE

RETURN

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENTER

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

DOCK

MULTI

PTION

REE

[

]

NER

TUNING

To disable Pure Direct mode, press

gPURE DIRECT again.

To disable Compressed Music Enhancer mode, press

gENHANCER again.

1 : The following features are disabled in Pure Direct mode.

• sound program, tone control, YPAO PEQ, and Adaptive DRC

• displaying and operating the OPTION menu and Setup menu

2 : While Pure Direct mode is on, the front panel display screen turns

off in order to reduce noise. When turning Pure Direct mode off,

the screen returns on.

3 : However, Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not available in

the following audio:

• Signals of which sampling rate is over 48kHz

• High Definition stream

PLAYBACK

Enjoying the desired sound field effect

En 45

Sound programs

■

Category: MOVIE

Sound programs optimized for viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, and games.

in the table indicates the sound program for CINEMA DSP.

Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without disturbing the

original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has

been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is

surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.

Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It

reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches cinemascope and wider-screen movies

with an excellent dynamic range providing everything from very small sound effects to

large, impressive sounds.

Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science

fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically

created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and

background music.

Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure

movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a

powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also

restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the

sound.

Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from

serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an

optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically

around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even

after long hours of viewing.

Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in

an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion

and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound

depth.

Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety

programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and

sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands

in an optimal space to offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium.

Action Game This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing, fighting games and FPS

games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are

right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration.

Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer mode for a more

dynamic sound field.

Roleplaying Game This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth

to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects

and dialog from a wide variety of scenes.

Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer mode for a more

dynamic sound field.

Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz

music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field

that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments,

and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

PLAYBACK

Enjoying the desired sound field effect

En 46

■

Category: MUSIC

This sound field is suitable when listening to music sources such as CDs.

■

Category: SUR.DEC (Surround decode mode)

Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel audio

sources in up to 7-channels using a surround decoder.

Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using

stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine,

beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual

seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is

traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from

all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.

Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a

palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber

music.

Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic,

live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460

seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once.

The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant

sound.

2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2-channels. When multi-channel

signals are input, they are down mixed to 2-channels and output from the front left and right

speakers.

7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback multi-channel

sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2-channels, and then outputs the sound from all

speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at

parties, etc.

q Pro Logic Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of audio

sources.

q PLIIx Movie /

q PLII Movie

Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is

suitable for movies. J1

q PLIIx Music /

q PLII Music

Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is

suitable for music. J1

q PLIIx Game /

q PLII Game

Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is

suitable for games. J1

Neo:6 Cinema Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for movies.

Neo:6 Music Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for music.

1 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions:

• When “Surround Back” is set to “None” (☞

p. 78).

• When headphones are connected.

PLAYBACK

En 47

This unit features a sophisticated on-screen display (OSD) that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the OSD, you can view information of the

signals being input and the status of this unit. Visual guidance simplifies operations for menus.

Basic operations via the TV screen

display

This section describes basic operations for configuring

“Input,” “Scene” and “Sound Program” using the OSD.

Press jON SCREEN.

The ON SCREEN menu is displayed on the TV screen.

■

Selecting an input source

Use kCursor B / C to select “Input” and

press kENTER.

Input source icons are displayed at the bottom of the

TV screen.

Use kCursor D / E to select a Input source

press kENTER.

The input source is selected.

Configuring the settings of this unit while viewing the TV screen

jON SCREEN

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

kRETURN

RETURN

ENTER

ON SCREEN

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

EIVE

[

]

NER

TUNING

A TV screen is required to display the ON SCREEN

or OPTION menu. Refer to “Connecting a TV

monitor” for instructions on connecting a TV screen

(☞

p. 22).

• Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu

screen. Press

kRETURN repeatedly to close the ON

SCREEN menu.

• In addition to selecting an input source, detailed

settings for each input source can be configured. Refer

to “Configuring input sources (Input menu)” (☞

p. 65)

for details.

PLAYBACK

Configuring the settings of this unit while viewing the TV screen

En 48

■

Selecting a scene

Use kCursor B / C to select “Scene” and

press kENTER.

Scene icons are displayed at the bottom of the TV

screen.

Use kCursor D / E to select a scene and

press kENTER.

The scene is selected.

■

Selecting a sound program

Use kCursor B / C to select “Sound

Program” and press kENTER.

Sound program icons are displayed at the bottom of the

TV screen.

Use kCursor D / E to select a sound

program and press kENTER.

The sound program is selected.

RETURN

ENTER

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

EIVE

[

]

NER

TUNING

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

kRETURN

• Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu

screen. Press

kRETURN repeatedly to close the ON

SCREEN menu.

• Refer to “Changing input settings with a single key

(SCENE function)” (☞

p. 41) for details on the default

scene settings.

• Detailed SCENE function settings can be edited. Refer

to “Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu)”

(☞

p. 69) for details.

• Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu

screen. Press

kRETURN repeatedly to close the ON

SCREEN menu.

• Refer to “Enjoying the desired sound field effect”

(☞

p. 41) for various sound programs.

• You can configure the detailed settings for each sound

program. Refer to “Setting sound program parameters

(Sound Program menu)” (☞

p. 71) for details.

NOTES

Menus can be operated and the status of this unit

confirmed from the following three main displays.

• ON SCREEN menu (☞

p. 65)

• OPTION menu (☞

p. 49)

• Content window (☞

p. 53)

These menus and status features can be used to

configure more various functions in addition to

selecting “Input,” “Scene” and “Sound Program.”

Refer to each references for details on menus and

status.

PLAYBACK

En 49

This unit has a unique OPTION menu for each input source. OPTION menus can be used to enable features such as volume trim for compatible input sources or to display

audio/video data.

OPTION menu display and setup

OPTION menu operations are displayed on the front

panel display or TV screen. TV display is used here to

explain operation.

Use dInput selector to select an input

source to which options will be applied.

Press rOPTION.

The OPTION menu is displayed.

The displayed OPTION menu settings differ

depending on the input source.

For more information, refer to the “OPTION menu” on

the next page.

Use kCursor B / C to select the desired

setting and press kENTER.

Parameters of the selected item are displayed.

Use kCursor B / C / D / E to select the

desired item (or enable a function).

Press rOPTION to close the OPTION menu.

Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu)

dInput selector

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

kRETURN

rOPTION

RETURN

HDMI

AUDIO

1234

125

V-AUX

ENTER

DOCK

MULTI

OPTION

1234

TUNER

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

REE

[

]

RESET

TUNING

OPTION menu

• Press kRETURN to display the previous screen or

close the OPTION menu.

• The OPTION menu may close automatically when

some functions are enabled.

The keys on the remote control may not respond for a

few seconds after the OPTION menu is closed.

Should this occur, select the input source again.

PLAYBACK

Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu)

En 50

OPTION menu

The following items are provided for each input source. J1

■

Adjusting high/low-frequency sound

Tone Control

Input source: All input sources except MULTI CH

You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble)

and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front

left and right speakers to obtain desired tone.

HDMI1-5 Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D

Mode

Dialogue Lift Extended

Surround

Volume Trim

AV1-4 Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D

Mode

Dialogue Lift Extended

Surround

Volume Trim

AV5-6 Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D

Mode

Dialogue Lift Volume Trim

AUDIO1-2 Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D

Mode

Dialogue Lift Volume Trim

V-AUX Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D

Mode

Dialogue Lift Extended

Surround

Volume Trim

TUNER Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D

Mode

Dialogue Lift Volume Trim

DOCK

(iPod)

Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D

Mode

Dialogue Lift Volume Trim Shuffle J2

Repeat J2

DOCK

(Bluetooth)

Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D

Mode

Dialogue Lift Volume Trim Pairing

Connect/

Disconnect

MULTI CH Vo l u m e Tr i m

Adjustable range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Adjustment

increments

0.5 dB

• The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be set

separately. Set the headphone tone control with the headphones

connected.

• TONE CONTROL on the front panel can also be used (☞

p. 40).

1 : When “Tone Control,” “Adaptive DRC,” “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode,”

“Dialogue Lift,” or “Extended Surround” is adjusted for an input source, the

same value is applied to other input sources and “ALL” is displayed on the

front panel display. When settings specific to a certain input source are

selected, the input source name is displayed on the front panel display. If the

name of the input source has been changed (☞

p. 66), the original name of the

input source is displayed.

2 : Not available for Yamaha iPod wireless receiver.

PLAYBACK

Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu)

En 51

■

Auto-adjusting the sound level to make

even low volumes more audible

Adaptive DRC

Input source: All input sources except MULTI CH

Adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level

(from minimum to maximum). When you play audio at night or at

low volumes, it is a good idea to set parameter to “On.” J1

When “On” is selected, the dynamic range is adjusted as follows.

If the volume level is low, the dynamic range is narrow.

If the volume level is high, the dynamic range is wide.

■

Enjoying more spatial sound fields

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Input source: All input sources except MULTI CH

When CINEMA DSP 3D is enabled, set whether to use sound

programs in CINEMA DSP 3D mode (☞

p. 43).

■

Adjusts the vertical position of dialogues

Dialogue Lift

Input source: All input sources except MULTI CH

Adjusts the vertical position of center sound such as dialogues

when presence speakers are used. Increasing this parameter raises

the position.

If the dialog seems to come out from a lower position than the

video monitor screen, increase this parameter.

“0” (default) corresponds to the lowest position and “5” to the

highest position.

■

Selecting the 5.1-channel signal playback

method

Extended Surround

Input source: HDMI1-5, AV1-4, V-AUX J2

Selects whether to reproduce 5.1-channel input signals in 6.1- or

7.1-channel when surround back speakers are used.

On Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.

Off (Default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.

Off

Input Level Input Level

Volume: low Volume: high

Output Level

• “Dialogue Lift” can be adjusted only when the presence speakers

are available.

• You cannot move the dialog position lower than the default

setting.

The ideal dialog

position

Move up to the ideal

dialog position

Auto (Default) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if a

flag for reproducing surround back channel is present,

and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.

q PLIIx Movie Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder whether or not

surround back channel signals are contained. You can

select this parameter when two surround back

speakers are connected.

q PLIIx Music Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel

using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder whether

or not surround back channel signals are contained.

You can select this parameter when one or two

surround back speakers are connected.

EX/ES Automatically selects the most suitable decoder for

input signals whether or not the flag for reproducing

surround back channel is present, and always

reproduces signals in 6.1-channel.

Off Always reproduces original channels whether or not

the flag for reproducing surround back channel is

present.

1 : “Adaptive DRC” is also effective when you use headphones.

2 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when “Audio Return Channel” is on,

and the input source is used for “TV Audio Input.”

PLAYBACK

Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu)

En 52

■

Adjusting volume between input sources

Volume Trim

Input source: All

Reduces any change in volume when switching between input

sources by correcting volume differences in each input source. You

can adjust this parameter for each input source.

■

Shuffle playback with iPod/iPhone

Shuffle

Input source: DOCK (iPod) J1

Plays back songs or albums in random order. When the shuffle

function is enabled, “ ” appears on the TV screen.

■

Repeat playback with iPod/iPhone

Repeat

Input source: DOCK (iPod) J1

Plays songs or albums repeatedly. When the repeat function is

enabled, “ (One)” or “ (All)” appears on the TV screen.

■

Connect / Disconnect Bluetooth

component

Connect

Disconnect

Input source: DOCK (Bluetooth)

Switches communication with a Bluetooth component on and off

(☞

p. 63).

■

Pairing Bluetooth component

Pairing

Input source: DOCK (Bluetooth)

Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component (☞p. 63).

Adjustable range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Default setting 0.0 dB

Adjustment

increments

0.5 dB steps

Off The shuffle function is turned off.

Songs Plays songs back in random order.

Albums Plays albums back in random order.

Off The repeat function is turned off.

One Plays a song back repeatedly.

All When all songs have completed playback, returns to

the start and repeats playback.

1 : Not available for Yamaha iPod wireless receiver.

PLAYBACK

En 53

When DOCK or TUNER is selected, the Content window is displayed on the TV screen. Playback style for iPod and functions for FM/AM tuner can be set in the Content

window.

Displaying the Content window on

the TV screen

Press dDOCK or dTUNER to display the

Content window.

The Content window consists of two main displays, the

Now playing view and the Content browse view.

Below is the example of the Now playing view for TUNER.

a Image display

Icon for each input source or album art is displayed.

b Information display

Information on the current input source is displayed.

c Screen button area

Buttons to operate each input source are displayed here.

These buttons vary depending on the selected input. For

details on operations for each input, see the following.

– FM/AM tuner (☞

p. 56)

– iPod (☞

p. 59)

Switching the display between the

Now playing view and the Content

browse view

You can switch the display between the Now playing

view and the Content browse view by the following

methods.

• Press lDISPLAY to cycle between the Now playing

view and the Content browse view.

• In the Now playing view, press

kENTER and use

kCursor B / C to select the icon. Then press

kENTER to switch to the Content browse view.

• In the Content browse view, press

kCursor E and use

kCursor B / C to select the icon. Then press

kENTER to switch to the Now playing view.

Confirming and operating input sources from the Content window

dDOCK

dTUNER

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

kRETURN

lDISPLAY

RETURN

ENTER

DISPLAY

DOCK

TUNER

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

MULTI

[

]

TUNING

A TV screen is required to display the Content

window. Refer to “Connecting a TV monitor” for

instructions on connecting a TV monitor (☞

p. 22).

abc

• In the Now playing view, press kENTER and use

kCursor B / C to select the button. Then press

kENTER to execute the selection.

• In the Content browse view, press

kCursor E and

use

kCursor B / C to select the button. Then press

kENTER to execute the selection.

• Press

kRETURN repeatedly to exit from the

operation.

Now playing view

Content browse view

lDISPLAY

PLAYBACK

En 54

Selecting a frequency for reception

(Normal tuning)

Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input.

Press eFM or eAM to select a band to

receive.

Use eTUN./CH H / I to set a frequency to

receive.

eTUN./CH H

Increases the frequency. Press and hold this key for

longer than a second to search automatically for a station

on a higher frequency than the current one. J1

TUN./CH I

Decreases the frequency. Press and hold this key for

longer than a second to search automatically for a station

on a lower frequency than the current one. J1

FM/AM tuning

dTUNER

eFM

eAM

eMEMORY

eTUN./CH H / I

mNumeric keys

MEMORY

7856

1234

TUNER

TUNING

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENTER

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

When using the FM/AM tuner, adjust the direction of

the FM/AM antenna connected to this unit to get the

best reception.

SL SR

FM87.5 MHz

VOL.

SBL SBR

■ Entering a frequency number

In normal tuning mode, use the mNumeric keys to

enter a frequency. Leave the decimal point out when

entering a number. J2

For example, enter as follows to select a station on

98.5 MHz.

STEREO

TUNED

SL SR

SBL SBR

FM98.5 MHz

STEREO

TUNED

VOL.

Lights up when a broadcast

is received from a station

Lights up when a stereo

broadcast is received

9 8

■ Registering stations manually (Manual

Preset)

Select stations manually and register them as presets

individually.

Tune in to the station you want to

frequency for reception (Normal tuning).”

Use one of the following methods to

receiving.

■ Registering to a preset number to which

no station is registered

Press eMEMORY for 3 seconds or longer.

The station will be registered automatically to the

lowest open preset number (or the next number after

the one registered most recently).

STEREO

TUNED

SL SR

01:FM98.5 MHz

MEMORY

VOL.

SBL SBR

Registered frequencies

1 : When searching for a station, release the key once the search has

started.

2 : “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you

enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that

the frequency entered is correct.

PLAYBACK

FM/AM tuning

En 55

eMEMORY

ePRESET F / G

mNumeric keys

MEMORY

PRESET

7856

1234

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENTER

ENT

TOP

OP-U

DMI

UDI

AUX

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

DOCK

MULTI

PTION

REE

[

]

NER

TUNING

■ Designating a preset number for

registration

Press eMEMORY once, to display “Manual Preset”

on the front panel display. After a small wait, the

preset number that the station has been registered to

will appear.

Press ePRESET F / G to select the preset number

to register the station to, and then press eMEMORY

to register.

To select a registered station, press

ePRESET F / G to select the preset number

of the station. J1

STEREO

TUNED

SL SR

01:Empty

985

VOL.

SBL SBR

Preset number

The newly registered frequency

Empty, or the frequency

registered most previously

Blinks

1 : To select a station by selecting a preset number, use the

mNumeric keys to enter the preset number of the station you

want to listen. When an invalid number is entered, “Wrong Num.”

appears on the front panel display. Check that you have entered

the correct number.

PLAYBACK

FM/AM tuning

En 56

Confirming and operating the

FM/AM tuner from the Content

window

The station currently received can be confirmed from the

menu displayed on the TV screen. Various FM/AM tuner

operations can be performed from the Content window

rather than controls on the front panel display. The

Content window is displayed when dTUNER is

pressed.

You can operate the FM/AM tuner from the Now playing

view or the Content browse view.

■

Operating from the Now playing

view

a Tuned indicator

Lights up when a station is received.

b Stereo indicator

Lights up when a stereo broadcast is received. When “FM

Mode” is set to “Mono,” the indicator does not light.

c Preset number

The selected preset number is displayed.

d Band

The selected band (FM or AM) is displayed.

e Frequency

The frequency currently received is displayed.

f Frequency guide

The frequency currently received is displayed as a cursor

on the bar.

g Screen button area

Buttons for available operations are displayed. See

“Screen buttons on the Now playing view” for details.

Screen buttons on the Now playing view

To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select

the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER.

Manual Tuning

You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by

specifying its frequency.

Preset Select

You can call preset stations.

Utility

Scroll

Switches the scroll target.

Browse

Switches the display to the Content browse view.

TUNER

kCursor B / C

kENTER

ENTER

TUNER

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

TUNING

a b

FM Switches a band to FM.

AM Switches a band to AM.

Tuning - Decreases the frequency.

Tuning + Increases the frequency.

Auto - Automatically searches for a station on a

lower frequency than the current station.

Auto + Automatically searches for a station on a

higher frequency than the current station.

Direct Selects the frequency manually.

Memory Registers the station currently received as

a preset station. Up to 40 FM/AM stations

can be registered.

PRESET - Selects the previous preset number.

PRESET + Selects the next preset number.

Preset -8 Returns the previous page.

Preset +8 Goes to the next page.

Direct Selects a station directly by entering the

preset number.

Memory Registers the station currently received as

a preset station. Up to 40 FM/AM stations

can be registered.

FM Mode Selects “Stereo” or “Mono” when

receiving the FM station.

Continues to the

PLAYBACK

FM/AM tuning

En 57

■

Operating from the Content browse

view

a Preset station list

The list of preset stations is displayed.

b Screen button area

Buttons for available operations are displayed. See

“Screen buttons on the Content browse view” for details.

Screen buttons on the Content browse view

To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then

select the desired one with kCursor B / C and

kENTER.

Utility

1 Page Up

1 Page Down

Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.

Now Playing

Switches the display to the Now playing view.

Cursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

ENTER

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

NER

TUNING

Auto Preset Detects stations with a strong signal and

automatically registers up to 40 stations,

beginning with the next number after the

current number.

Clear Preset Clears registration of the preset station

currently selected.

Clear All Preset Clears registration of all preset stations.

PLAYBACK

En 58

Once you have connected a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-12, sold separately) to this unit, you can enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone using the remote

control supplied with this unit. When playing back from an iPod/iPhone, you can also use the compressed music enhancer sound programs to give compressed audio

formats such as MP3 a sharper, more dynamic sound (☞

p. 44). A Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10, sold separately) can also be connected to this unit to play back

iPod/iPhone with wireless connection.

Connecting the Yamaha iPod

universal dock

Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the

DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to the

operating instructions of the iPod universal dock for

information on how to connect your iPod/iPhone.

Switch this unit on and place your iPod/iPhone in the

dock. The unit is now ready for playback.

When this unit is in standby mode, iPod/iPhone can be

charged automatically (☞

p. 67).

Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™

After setting your iPod/iPhone in your dock, just press

dDOCK to switch to DOCK input to play your iPod/

iPhone.

The iPod/iPhone can be operated in the following two

ways.

Menu browse control:

Plays the iPod/iPhone while viewing the menu displayed

on the TV. Refer to “Playing iPod/iPhone from the menu

screen (Menu browse control)” (☞

p. 59).

Simple remote control:

Plays audio and video through this unit while viewing

the menu displayed on the iPod/iPhone screen. Refer to

“Operating basic playback functions via the remote

control (Simple remote control)” (☞

p. 61).

Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™

dDOCK

fINFO

INFO

DOCK

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENTER

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

DMI

UDI

AUX

MULTI

[

]

RESET

NER

TUNING

• When playing back iPod/iPhone with wired

connection

Refer to “Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock.”

• When playing back iPod/iPhone with

wireless connection

Refer to “Playing back iPod™/iPhone™ with wireless

connection” (☞

p. 61).

• iPod touch, iPod (4th Gen/5th Gen/Classic), iPod

nano, iPod mini, iPhone, iPhone 3G, and iPhone 3GS

are supported (As of March 2010).

• When connecting iPhone, iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS,

use a YDS-12.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on

the model or the software version of your iPod/iPhone.

• Some functions may not be available for some Yamaha

iPod universal dock models. This explanation focuses

on the YDS-12.

CAUTION

To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode

before connecting an iPod universal dock.

SL SR

SBL SBR

iPodconnected

DOCK

VOL.

DOCKDOCK

PTI

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AXIA

(

)

AXIAL

VIDE

NEN

IDE

Yamaha iPod Universal Dock

Locate the dock at the distance as far as from

the unit.

• Song information (artist, album, song) is displayed on

the front panel. Press

fINFO repeatedly to display

subsequent/previous information.

• The Yamaha logo is displayed on the iPod screen

when iPod stationed in the iPod universal dock (does

not apply to the iPod touch or iPhone).

• Manual control of the iPod/iPhone is not possible

while the iPod stationed in the iPod universal dock.

PLAYBACK

Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™

En 59

Playing iPod/iPhone from the menu

screen (Menu browse control)

The iPod/iPhone can be operated from the menu

displayed on the TV screen.

You can operate the iPod/iPhone from the Now playing

view or the Content browse view.

■

Operating from the Content browse

view

a Input name / List name

b Menu items

c Input icon

d Screen button area

Buttons for available operations are displayed. See

“Screen buttons on the Content browse view” for details.

e Current menu number / Number of all menu items

Screen buttons on the Content browse view

To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then

select the desired one with kCursor B / C and

kENTER.

10 Pages Up

10 Pages Down

Goes to 10 pages forwards or backwards.

1 Page Up

1 Page Down

Scrolls the list to the next or previous page.

Now Playing

Switches the display to the Now playing view.

Returns to the video playback, turning off the menu

display.

Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.

Press kCursor B / C to select the content

(music or video) that you want to play, and

press kENTER. J1

Press kCursor B / C to select iPod/iPhone

menu items, and press kENTER to play.

The Now playing view appears during playback.

■

Operating from the Now playing

view

a Repeat icon

b Shuffle icon

c Play icon

d Album image

e Artist name

f Album title

g Screen button area

Buttons for available operations are displayed. See

“Screen buttons on the Now playing view” for details.

h Song title

i Remaining time

j Progress bar

k Elapsed time

Screen buttons on the Now playing view

To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select

the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER.

ENTER

DOCK

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

DMI

UDI

AUX

MULTI

PTION

REE

[

]

RESET

NER

TUNING

dDOCK

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

b ca

1 : Videos will not be displayed when your iPod or Yamaha iPod

universal dock do not support the browser function for browsing

video files.

PLAYBACK

Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™

En 60

Play Control

Operates the basic playback functions of iPod/iPhone.

Scroll

Switches the scroll target (artist name, album name, or

song name).

Browse

Switches the display to the Content browse view.

Returns to the video playback, turning off the menu

display.

ENTER

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

NER

TUNING

p (Play) Starts playback.

s (Stop) Stops playback.

e (Pause) Stops playback temporarily.

b (Skip -) Skips to the beginning of the currently

playing song. Press kENTER at the

beginning of the song to skip to a

previous song.

a (Skip +) Skips to the beginning of the next song.

w (Scan -) Searches backwards.

f (Scan +) Searches forwards.

PLAYBACK

Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™

En 61

Operating basic playback functions

via the remote control (Simple

remote control)

Use the following remote control keys to operate

(playback, stop, skip, etc.) your iPod/iPhone.

Press lREC to enable the Simple remote control.

Press lREC again to return to the Menu browse

control.

Playing back iPod™/iPhone™ with

wireless connection

A Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10, sold

separately) can be connected to this unit to play back

iPod/iPhone with wireless connection. The iPod/iPhone

can be used as the remote control. J1

■

Connecting the Yamaha iPod

wireless transmitter and playing

back iPod/iPhone

Use the dedicated cable to connect the wireless receiver

to the DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to

the operating instructions of the YID-W10 for more

information.

Place the iPod/iPhone in the wireless transmitter. Setup

is complete.

When this unit is in standby mode, iPod/iPhone can be

charged automatically, if “Standby Charge” is set to

“Auto” (☞

p. 67) or “Power & Input” of “iPod Interlock”

is set to “On” (☞

p. 68).

DOCK

kCursor B / C

kENTER

kRETURN

lREC

l b

RETURN

ENTER

REC

DOCK

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

DMI

UDI

AUX

MULTI

[

]

RESET

NER

TUNING

dDOCK Switches to the DOCK (iPod) input.

kCursor B / C Move the cursor up and down to different

fields.

kRETURN Returns to the previous menu.

kENTER Enables the selected menu.

l w Searches backwards while held down.

l f Searches forwards while held down.

l b Skips to the beginning of the currently

playing song. Pressing repeatedly skips

one song backwards with each press.

l a Skips to the beginning of the next song.

l s Stops playback.

l e Switches between playback and pause.

l p Switches between playback and pause.

CAUTION

To prevent accidents, unplug the power cable of this

unit before connecting the iPod wireless receiver.

DOCKDOCK

PTI

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AXIA

(

)

OAXIA

VIDEO

COMPONEN

IDE

SL SR

SBL SBR

iPodconnected

DOCK

VOL.

Yamaha iPod

wireless receiver

Position the wireless receiver as far as possible

from the unit.

1 : Video signals cannot be transmitted wirelessly.

PLAYBACK

Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™

En 62

Use iPod/iPhone to start playback.

• This unit, which is placed in the main zone, functions as

follows when iPod/iPhone controls are used to start

playback.

– The input source switches to DOCK (iPod) when this

unit is turned on.

– When this unit is in standby mode when iPod/iPhone

playback starts, this unit turns on and the input source

switches to DOCK (iPod). J1

• This unit automatically enters standby mode when the

following operations are performed.

– iPod/iPhone is removed from the YID-W10

– iPod/iPhone is not operated for a while after playback

is stopped

• Adjusting volume control on the iPod/iPhone also adjusts

the volume (max 0.0dB) of this unit.

dDOCK

DOCK

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENTER

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

DMI

UDI

AUX

MULTI

[

]

RESET

NER

TUNING

• Pressing dDOCK also switches the input source to

DOCK (iPod).

• When a menu is operated, this function is not

activated.

• When “iPod Interlock” →

“Power & Input” in the

Input menu is set to “Off,” the power and the input

source do not switch automatically (☞

p. 68).

When “iPod Interlock” → “Volume” in the Input

menu is set to “Off,” the volume of this unit is not

adjusted when iPod/iPhone volume controls are

adjusted

(☞p. 68).

CAUTION

When iPod/iPhone controls are used to adjust volume,

playback volume may be unexpectedly loud. This

could result in damage to this unit or the speakers. If

the volume suddenly increases during playback,

immediately remove the iPod/iPhone from the

Yamaha iPod universal dock. “Max Volume” can be

used to specify the maximum volume level to prevent

excessively loud playback (☞

p. 81).

1 : This function is also activated when sound of application is

reproduced or ringtone is received.

PLAYBACK

En 63

You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as the YBA-10, sold separately) to this unit and enjoy wireless playback from Bluetooth-compatible

portable music players. J1

Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver

Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the

DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit.

The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection will be

complete when this unit is turned on.

Pairing Bluetooth™ components

Be sure to carry out pairing when connecting a Bluetooth

component for the first time, or when settings have been deleted.

Refer to the operating instructions of your Bluetooth

component as necessary when carrying out pairing.

Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.

Turn on the Bluetooth component you want

to pair with and set it to pairing mode.

Press rOPTION to display the OPTION

menu and use kCursor B / C to select

“Pairing.”

Press kENTER to start pairing.

Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components

NOTE

When playing back from a Bluetooth component for the first time, you must first pair the devices (register the Bluetooth components). When establishing a wireless connection

you must carry out pairing on both this unit and on the Bluetooth component.

dDOCK

eMEMORY

kCursor B / C

kENTER

kRETURN

rOPTION

RETURN

MEMORY

ENTER

DOCK

OPTION

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

DMI

UDI

AUX

MUTE

MULTI

REE

[

]

RESET

NER

TUNING

CAUTION

To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode

before connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.

DOCKDOCK

PTI

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AXIA

(

)

AXIA

VIDE

NEN

IDE

Yamaha Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver

The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be

paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When

the ninth device is paired, the pairing settings for the

device which has not been used for the longest period

of time will be deleted.

• To cancel pairing, press kRETURN.

• You can also press and hold

eMEMORY on the front

panel to begin pairing.

SL SR

SBL SBR

Pairing

OPTION

VOL.

SL SR

SBL SBR

Searching...

DOCK

VOL.

Continues to the

1 : This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)

of the Bluetooth profile.

PLAYBACK

Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components

En 64

Make sure the Bluetooth component

recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver.

When the device is recognized, it will appear in the

Bluetooth component list, for example as “YBA-10

YAMAHA.”

Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

from the Bluetooth component list, and

enter a pass key “0000” into the Bluetooth

component. J1

Using Bluetooth™ components

When pairing is complete, perform the following

procedure to achieve a wireless connection between this

unit and the Bluetooth component. When the wireless

connection is complete, Bluetooth components can be

played back.

Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input.

Press rOPTION to display the OPTION

menu.

Use kCursor B / C to select “Connect” and

press kENTER. J2

Operate the Bluetooth component for

playback.

DOCK

kCursor B / C

kENTER

rOPTION

ENTER

DOCK

OPTION

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVER

CODE SE

MUTE

DMI

UDI

AUX

MULTI

REE

[

]

RESET

NER

TUNING

SL SR

SBL SBR

Completed

DOCK

VOL.

When pairing occurs correctly

Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless

connection is established automatically or by

operating the Bluetooth components. In that case, it is

not necessary to carry out the following procedure.

“Not found” is displayed when there is an error

connecting. Check that the following conditions have

been satisfied, and try to establish a wireless

connection again.

• Both this unit and the Bluetooth component are paired.

• The Bluetooth component is switched on.

• The Bluetooth component is within 10 m of the

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.

To disconnect a wireless connection, repeat the same

steps, and in step 3, select “Disconnect.”

SL SR

SBL SBR

BTconnected

DOCK

VOL.

When wireless connection is complete

1 : Depending on Bluetooth components, wireless connection is

carried out right after the pairing. In this case, “BT connected” is

displayed instead of “Completed.”

2 : “Disconnect” is displayed when a Bluetooth component has been

connected.

En 65

SETUP

Settings, such as the name of an input source or the icon displayed for an input source can be changed from the Input menu.

Configuring input sources

The name of an input source and its icon, as well as other

input source settings, can be changed from the Input

menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press jON SCREEN.

Use kCursor B / C to select “Input” and

press kENTER.

Use kCursor D / E to select an input source

to be configured and press kCursor B.

Use kCursor B / C to select an item and

press kENTER.

Use kCursor B / C to adjust the setting.

Press jON SCREEN to close the menu.

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

jON SCREEN

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

kRETURN

RETURN

ENTER

ON SCREEN

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

NER

TUNING

If the selected item contains additional items, use

kCursor B / C to select the desired item and press

kENTER.

Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu

screen. Repeat steps 4 to 5 to adjust multiple settings.

SETUP

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

En 66

Input menu

■

Changing an input source name or

icon

Rename/Icon Select

Input source: HDMI1-5, AV1-6, AUDIO1-2, V-AUX, DOCK

(iPod), DOCK (Bluetooth), MULTI CH

Changes the input source name (up to nine characters)

and icon displayed on the front panel display or TV

screen.

Use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select

“Rename/Icon Select” and press kENTER.

Use kCursor D / E to choose an icon and

press kCursor C.

Press kENTER, and then press

kCursor B / C / D / E to edit the new input

name.

Press kENTER and press kCursor C to

select “OK” and press kENTER.

Confirm the new input name.

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

ENTER

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

EIVE

[

]

NER

TUNING

HDMI1-5 Rename/

Icon Select

Audio In Decoder

Mode

Enhancer

AV 1 - 2 Rename/

Icon Select

Audio In Decoder

Mode

Enhancer

AV 3 - 4 Rename/

Icon Select

Decoder

Mode

Enhancer

AV 5 - 6 Rename/

Icon Select

Enhancer

AUDIO1-2 Rename/

Icon Select

Enhancer

V-AUX Rename/

Icon Select

Decoder

Mode

Enhancer

TUNER Enhancer

DOCK (iPod) Rename/

Icon Select

Enhancer Standby

Charge

iPod

Interlock J1

DOCK (Bluetooth) Rename/

Icon Select

Enhancer

MULTI CH Rename/

Icon Select

Video Out

1 : Not available when playing back iPod/iPhone with wired

connection.

SETUP

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

En 67

■

Combining HDMI/AV1-2 input source

video and audio

Audio In

Input source: HDMI1-5, AV1-2

Combines video from HDMI or AV input sources with analog/

digital audio inputs in situations such as:

– an playback device is connected with an HDMI cable but cannot

transmit audio through HDMI

– an playback device with component video output and analog

audio output (such as certain game consoles) are connected to the

system

To change assignments, select an input source (HDMI1-5 or AV1-2)

as the video input first, and then select audio input jacks in this

menu.

Set as follows according on the desired combination of audio input

jacks.

■

Setting the format of digital audio signals

Decoder Mode

Input source: HDMI1-5, AV1-4, V-AUX J1

Sets the format of digital audio to playback to DTS. For example, if

the format is not automatically detected correctly even during

playback of DTS format audio, this item can be used to set the

playback format to DTS.

■

Selecting the sound program suitable for

listening to compressed audio, such as

MP3

Enhancer

Input source: All input sources other than MULTI CH

Turns on/off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode.

■

Charging an iPod™/iPhone™ in standby

mode

Standby Charge

Input source: DOCK (iPod)

Charges an iPod/iPhone stationed in the iPod universal dock or

iPod wireless receiver while the receiver is in standby mode.

Audio inputs Settings method

Optical digital audio

input

Select AV1 or AV4. Connect the external component

audio cable to the optical digital jack for the selected

input.

Coaxial digital audio

input

Select AV2 or AV3. Connect the external component

audio cable to the coaxial digital jack for the selected

input.

Analog audio input Select one of AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2.

Connect the external component audio cable to the

audio jack for the selected input.

Auto (Default) The audio format is automatically selected to match

the format of the input audio.

DTS Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not

reproduced.

Off (Default) Turns off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode.

On Turns on the Compressed Music Enhancer mode.

Auto (Default) This unit charges iPod/iPhone when this unit is in

standby mode. While charging an iPod/iPhone, the

HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator lights. When

HDMI Through function is off, the indicator goes out

after the charging is complete.

Off This unit does not charge iPod/iPhone.

1 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when “Audio Return Channel” is on,

and the source is used for “TV Audio Input.”

En 68

SETUP

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

■

Setting the interlock functions with iPod/

iPhone (when a Yamaha iPod wireless

receiver is connected)

iPod Interlock

Input source: DOCK (iPod)

This unit can be automatically operated in conjunction with

operations on iPod when the iPod wireless receiver is connected to

this unit.

■

Outputting a video signal input from

another input source while playing a

multi-channel audio signal

Video Out

When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, a video signal

input from another terminal can be output to the video monitor. For

example, even if an audio and video component such as a DVD

player that does not support a multi-channel digital audio output,

the video signal can be output to the video monitor while

reproducing a multi-channel analog audio signal.

Power & Input Starting playback of iPod/iPhone turns on this unit

and switches the input source to DOCK (iPod)

automatically when this item is set to “On.” This unit

automatically enters standby mode when iPod/iPhone

is not operated for a while after playback is stopped.

This interlock function is disable with “Off.”

Volume Adjusting the volume on the iPod/iPhone also adjusts

the volume of this unit when this item is set to “On.”

This interlock function is disable with “Off.”

SETUP

En 69

The SCENE function (☞p. 41) can be edited from the SCENE menu displayed on the TV screen.

Editing a scene

Various settings, such as the name of a scene or the icon

displayed for a scene, can be changed from the SCENE

menu.

Press jON SCREEN.

Use kCursor B / C to select “Scene” and

press kENTER.

Use kCursor D / E to select a scene to be

edited and press kCursor B.

Use kCursor B / C to select an item and

press kENTER.

Use kCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the

setting.

Press jON SCREEN to close the menu.

Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu)

jON SCREEN

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

kRETURN

RETURN

ENTER

ON SCREEN

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

NER

TUNING

When the Utility is available in the selected item, use

kCursor B / C to select the desired item and press

kENTER.

Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu

screen. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust multiple

settings.

SETUP

Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu)

En 70

SCENE menu

■

Registering SCENE function

settings

Save

Registers adjustments to SCENE menu setting for each

SCENE.

■

Adjusting settings to be registered

on the SCENE function

Load

Loads input sources or sound programs that have been

registered with the SCENE function, or specifies whether

or not an external component registered as the input

source is automatically turned on when a scene is selected.

SCENE IR

Specify whether or not a Yamaha BD/DVD player or CD

player connected to this unit turns on automatically.

Detail

Display details of settings registered with the SCENE

function.

■

Changing a scene name and icon

Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front

panel display or TV screen.

Use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select

“Rename/Icon Select” and press kENTER.

Use kCursor D / E to choose an icon and

press kCursor C.

Press kENTER, and then press

kCursor B / C / D / E to edit the new scene

name.

Press kENTER and press kCursor C to

select “OK” and press kENTER.

Confirm the new scene name.

■

Resetting a scene

Reset

Restores all settings to their default values.

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

ENTER

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

REE

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

NER

TUNING

SCENE1

SCENE2

SCENE3

SCENE4

Save

Load

Rename/Icon Select

Reset

Save

Load

Rename/Icon Select

Reset

Save

Load

Rename/Icon Select

Reset

Save

Load

Rename/Icon Select

Reset

Ok Registers settings applied with “Setting.”

CANCEL Cancels settings applied with “Setting.”

DETAIL Specifies “SCENE IR” function and

displays settings registered with the

SCENE function in detail.

Foe more information, see “SCENE IR”

and “Detail” at right.

Off Disables the SCENE IR function.

Yamaha BD/DVD

Player1

Select this when a Yamaha BD/DVD

player is connected to this unit.

Yamaha BD/DVD

Player2

Select this if the player dose not turn on

when “Yamaha BD/DVD Player1” is

selected.

Yamaha CD Player Select this when a Yamaha CD player is

connected to this unit.

Input Displays “Input” setting registered with

the SCENE function.

Mode Displays the sound program registered

with the SCENE function.

Enhancer Displays the setting of “Enhancer”

registered with the SCENE function.

SETUP

En 71

Sound effects can be adjusted from the Sound Program menu.

Editing sound programs

Adjust sound field elements (sound program parameters)

to achieve sound effects suited to the acoustics of audio/

video sources or rooms if you are not satisfied with the

results achieved with default sound program settings.

Follow the procedure described below to adjust sound

program parameters.

Press jON SCREEN.

Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select

“Sound Program” and press kENTER.

Use kCursor D / E to select a sound

program and press kCursor B.

Use kCursor B / C to select a parameter

and press kENTER.

Use kCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the

parameter and press kRETURN. J1

Press jON SCREEN to close the Sound

Program menu.

Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)

jON SCREEN

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

kRETURN

RETURN

ENTER

ON SCREEN

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

EIVE

[

]

NER

TUNING

Sound programs

Sound program parameters

Choices

When there are multiple parameters in the selected

sound program, repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust other

parameters.

■ To initialize sound program parameters

To set the parameters of the sound program back to

their default settings, use kCursor B / C repeatedly

to select “Reset” in step 4 and press kENTER.

When the following message is displayed, select

“OK” and press kENTER to initialize.

To cancel initializing, select “CANCEL” and press

kENTER when the message above is displayed.

1 : An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the sound field parameter

name displayed on the TV when you change the parameter from

its default setting.

En 72

SETUP

Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)

CINEMA DSP parameters

DSP Level

Change the effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added).

You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking the

sound effect.

Initial Delay

Surround Initial Delay

Surround Back Initial Delay

Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field

initial delay. Changes the apparent size of the sound field by

adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection

heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound

field seems to the listener.

Room Size

Surround Room Size

Surround Back Room Size

Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size.

Adjusts the apparent size of the sound field. The larger the value,

the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is

repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer

the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent

reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds,

you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing

this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the

room.

Adjustable range -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB

Default setting 0 dB

Adjust “DSP Level” as follows:

• The effect sound is too soft.

• There are no differences between effects of the sound programs.

→ Increase the effect level.

• The sound is dull.

• The sound field effect is added too much.

→ Reduce the effect level.

Adjustable range 1 to 99 ms (Initial Delay)

1 to 49 ms (Surround Initial Delay and Surround Back

Initial Delay)

When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also

recommend that you adjust the corresponding room size

parameters likewise.

Source sound

Delay

Audio source

Level

Early

reflections

Time

Large value = 99 ms

Reflection face

Time

Delay

Level

Time

Delay

Small value = 1 ms

Level

Adjustable range 0.1 to 2.0

When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend

that you adjust the corresponding initial delay parameters

likewise.

Level

Time

Level

Time

Level

Time

udio source

Early

reflections

Large value = 2.0Small value = 0.1

Source sound

En 73

SETUP

Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)

Liveness

Surround Liveness

Surround Back Liveness

Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the

reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at

which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of an audio

source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent

wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A

room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead,”

while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live.”

This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and

thus the “liveness” of the room.

Reverb Time

Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the

dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz.

This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an

extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time to get more

sustaining reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get

articulate sound.

Reverb Delay

Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the

beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the

reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the

reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you

feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Adjustable range 0 to 10

Level

Time

Level

Time

Level

Time

Large value = 10

Small value = 0

Source sound

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Dead

Live

Adjustable range 1.0 to 5.0 s

Small value = 1.0 s

Reverberation Reverberation

Source sound

Early reflections

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

Audio source

Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Large value = 5.0 s

Rev. TimeRev. TimeRev. Time

Time Time Time

Adjustable range 0 to 250 ms

Rev. Delay

Source sound

(dB)

60 dB

Reverberation

Time

Rev. Time

Level

SETUP

Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)

En 74

Reverb Level

Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation

sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation

becomes.

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be used with a sound program in the

MOVIE category. J1

Parameters usable in certain sound

programs

2ch Stereo only

Direct

Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit

depending on the condition of tone control etc., when an analog

audio source is played back. You can enjoy a higher quality sound.

7ch Stereo only

Center Level

Adjusts the center channel volume. J2

Surround L Level

Adjusts the volume of the surround L channel. J2

Surround R Level

Adjusts the volume of the surround R channel. J2

Surround Back L Level

Adjusts the volume of the surround back L channel. J2

Surround Back R Level

Adjusts the volume of the surround back R channel. J2

Front Presence L Level

Adjusts the volume of the front presence L channel. J2

Adjustable range 0 to 100%

PLIIx Movie

PLII Movie

Selects the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (or

Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) decoder.

Neo:6 Cinema Selects the Neo:6 (Cinema) decoder.

Level

Source sound

Time

Rev. Level

Auto (Default) Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone

control circuit when both tone controls of “Bass” and

“Treble” are set to 0dB.

Off Does not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control

circuit.

Adjustable range 0 to 100%

Default setting 100%

Adjustable range 0 to 100%

Default setting 100%

Adjustable range 0 to 100%

Default setting 100%

Adjustable range 0 to 100%

Default setting 35% (7.1-channel configuration)

50% (6.1-channel configuration)

Adjustable range 0 to 100%

Default setting 35% (7.1-channel configuration)

50% (6.1-channel configuration)

Adjustable range 0 to 100%

Default setting 33%

1 : Surround decoders cannot be changed when used with the following MOVIE

sound programs.

• Mono Movie

• Sports

• Action Game

• Roleplaying Game

2 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive.

SETUP

Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)

En 75

Front Presence R Level

Adjusts the volume of the front presence R channel. J1

Parameters usable in surround decoder

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder.

Dolby PLIIx Music and Dolby PLII Music only

Panorama

Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends front left/

right channels sounds to the surround speakers as well as the front

speakers for a wraparound effect.

Center Width

Spreads the center channel sound to the front left and right

speakers to suit your needs or preferences. Set this parameter to 0

for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7

for outputting it from the front left/right speaker only.

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and

the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level

created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred

sound balance.

The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more

negative, and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value

more positive.

When Neo:6 Music is selected

Center Image

Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center

channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as

necessary.

Adjustable range 0 to 100%

Default setting 33%

Pro Logic Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic

decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of audio sources.

PLIIx Movie /

PLII Movie

Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or

Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for

movies. J2

PLIIx Music /

PLII Music

Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or

Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for

music. J2

PLIIx Game /

PLII Game

Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or

Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for

games. J2

Neo:6 Cinema Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This

is suitable for movies.

Neo:6 Music Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This

is suitable for music.

Off (Default) Disables the effect.

On Enables the effect.

Adjustable range 0 to 7

Default setting 3

Adjustable range -3 to +3

Default setting 0

Adjustable range 0.0 to 1.0

Default setting 0.3

1 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive.

2 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions:

• When “Surround Back” is set to “None” (☞

p. 78).

• When headphones are connected.

SETUP

En 76

Various settings, such as speaker volume or HDMI functions, can be changed from the Setup menu.

Operating the Setup menu

Press jON SCREEN.

Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select

“Setup” and press kENTER.

Use kCursor D / E to select a menu and

press kENTER.

Setup menu setting

Use kCursor B / C to select an item and

press kENTER.

Use kCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the

setting.

Press jON SCREEN to close the menu.

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

jON SCREEN

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

kRETURN

RETURN

ENTER

ON SCREEN

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

EIVE

[

]

NER

TUNING

Speaker Adjusts parameters for speakers, such as

speaker status, and volume adjustment for

each speaker.

Sound Sets functions related to audio output,

such as adjustment of maximum volume

and of dynamic range.

Video Sets video output functions, such as video

conversion settings (resolution and aspect

ratio).

HDMI Sets HDMI functions, such as the HDMI

Control function and output destination

for HDMI sound.

Multi Zone Sets multi-zone functions, such as

volume adjustment for speakers in the

secondary zone.

Function Sets functions such as the Auto Power

Down function, that make the unit easier

to use.

Language Selects the language of the menus and

messages displayed on TV screen.

When the selected item contains detailed ones, use

kCursor B / C to select the detailed item and press

kENTER.

Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu

screen. Repeat steps 4 to 5 to adjust multiple settings.

En 77

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

Setup menu Manages settings for speakers

Speaker Setup items

■

Automatic speaker setup

Auto Setup

Optimizes the speaker configuration automatically using YPAO

(☞

p. 33).

■

Manual speaker setup

Manual Setup

The following parameters can be specified manually.

Power Amp Assign

In addition to the 7.1-channel speaker connection, various speaker

configurations are possible using the presence speakers connection,

bi-amp connection or Zone2 function (☞

p. 17, p. 18).

Auto Setup

Manual Setup

Lipsync

Dynamic Range

Max Volume

Initial Volume

Adaptive DSP Level

Analog to Analog Conversion

Processing

Zone2 Set

Auto Power Down

Display Set

Trigger Output

Memory Guard

Speaker

Sound

Video

Multi Zone

Function

Language

HDMI Control

ARC (Audio Return Channel)

TV Audio Input

Audio Output

Standby Through

HDMI

Auto Setup Optimizes the speaker configuration automatically.

Manual Setup Manually adjusts parameters for speakers.

Power Amp Assign Adds the extra speakers to the 7.1-channel speaker

connection.

Configuration Manually manages speaker configuration, such as

speaker size (sound production capacity), and bass

audio processing.

Distance Manually adjusts the output of each speaker based on

distance to the listening position.

Level Manually adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Parametric EQ Selects an equalizer to adjust speaker output

characteristics.

Test Tone Generates test tones.

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

En 78

Configuration

Adjusts the output characteristics of the speakers based on

manually set parameters.

Front

Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front

speakers. J1

Center

Selects the size of the center speakers.

Surround

Selects the size of the surround speakers.

Surround Back

Selects the size of the surround back speakers.

Front Presence

Specify connection of front presence speakers.

In the “Configuration,” you can select the speaker size

characteristic (Large or Small). Select the size (sound

reproduction capacity) that matches your speakers.

When speaker size is set to “Small,” low-frequency components

of the speakers that you configured are produced from the

subwoofer (or from the front speakers if there is no subwoofer).

Woofer diameter

• 16 cm or larger → Large

• 16 cm or smaller → Small

Large Select this for large speakers. The front speakers will

produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

Small (Default) Select this for small speakers. The subwoofer will

produce front channel low-frequency

components. J2

Large Select this when a large center speaker is connected.

Small (Default) Select this when a small center speaker is connected.

None Select this when there is no center speaker. The front

speakers will produce center channel audio.

Large Select this when the surround speakers are large.

Small (Default) Select this when the surround speakers are small.

None Select this when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel

audio signals.

• When set to “None,” no sound is produced from the surround

back speaker even if that speaker is connected.

• When set to “None,” the sound programs will change to Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode.

Largex1 Select when one large surround back speaker is

connected.

Largex2 Select when two large surround back speakers are

connected.

Smallx1 Select when one small surround back speaker is

connected.

Smallx2 (Default) Select when two small surround back speakers are

connected.

None Select this when no surround back speakers are

connected.

• When there are no surround speakers are connected, the setting

will automatically change to “None.”

• You can set surround back audio signals, including from the

playback source, to be mixed down and produced from a single

speaker (6.1-channel layout) or produced from left and right

surround speakers (5.1-channel layout).

Use (Default) Select this when front presence speakers are

connected.

None Select this when front presence speakers are not

connected.

1 : When “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” you can only choose “Large.” If the front

speaker setting is “Small” and you change “Subwoofer” to “None,” it will

automatically change to “Large.”

2 : You can set the low-frequency components of audio signals transmitted from

the front speakers to the subwoofer by using “Bass Cross Over.”

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

En 79

Subwoofer

Confirms the subwoofer.

Phase

Sets the phase of the subwoofer if the bass audio is lacking or

unclear.

Extra Bass

Allows the front channel low-frequency components to be

produced exclusively by the subwoofer, or by both the subwoofer

and the front speakers.

Bass Cross Over

Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component which is

produced from speakers of which the size is set to “Small.”

A frequency sound which is lower than the specified frequency will

be produced from the subwoofer or the front speakers. J2

Distance

Adjusts the timing at which the speakers produce audio so that

sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same

time.

Selecting adjustment units

Use kCursor B / C to select the unit for distance (meters or

feet), and press kENTER.

Setting distances for each speaker

Use kCursor B / C to select the speaker you want to configure,

and press kENTER. Then use kCursor D / E to set the distance

from the speaker to your listening position.

Level

Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Use kCursor B / C to select the desired speaker, and press

kENTER. Then use kCursor D / E to adjust the volume for the

selected speaker.

Use (Default) Select this when subwoofer is connected. During

playback, the subwoofer will produce audio from the

LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass audio

from other channels. J1

None Select this when subwoofer is not connected. The

front speakers will produce audio from the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel and bass frequency audio

from other channels.

Normal (Default) Does not change the subwoofer phase.

Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase.

Off (Default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the

front speakers or the subwoofer produce the front

channel low-frequency components.

On The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the

front channel low-frequency components.

When “Subwoofer” is set to “None” or “Front” is set to “Small,”

“Extra Bass” is disabled.

40Hz 110Hz

60Hz 120Hz

80Hz (Default) 160Hz

90Hz 200Hz

100Hz

Adjustable range 1.0 ft to 80.0 ft (0.30 m to 24.0 m)

Default setting 10.0 ft (3.00 m) (Front L/Front R/Center/Surround L/

Surround R/Surround Back L/Surround Back R/Front

Presence L/Front Presence R/Subwoofer)

Adjustment

increments

0.2 ft (0.05 m)

Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Default setting 0.0 dB (Front L/Front R/Center/Surround L/Surround

R/Surround Back L/Surround Back R/Front Presence

L/Front Presence R/Subwoofer)

Adjustment

increments

0.5 dB

1 : Enabling “Extra Bass” allows both the subwoofer and the front speakers to

produce bass audio.

2 : If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set

the crossover frequency to maximum and the volume to half (or slightly less).

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

En 80

Parametric EQ

Adjusts sound quality of tone using a parametric

equalizer.

PEQ Select

Select an equalizer type.

PEQ Data Copy

Select 1 of the 3 parametric equalizer types acquired with

automatic setup and manually copy that information to the

manual adjustments.

Front L / Front R / Center / Surround L / Surround R /

Surround Back L / Surround Back R / Front Presence L /

Front Presence R

The parametric equalizer can be used to manually adjust

sound quality for individual speakers.

Set “PEQ Select” to “Manual” and use “PEQ Data

Copy” to copy information acquired with automatic

setup. This information can be used as a basis for

performing manual adjustments.

Use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select

“Band / Gain,” “Freq. / Gain,” or “Q / Gain”

and press kENTER.

Use kCursor D / E repeatedly to adjust the

parameter and use kCursor B / C

repeatedly to adjust the gain.

Press kENTER to exit the edit window.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to configure other

parameters.

Press jON SCREEN to close the menu.

Test Tone

Turns the test tone generator on or off.

ON SCREEN

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

ENTER

ON SCREEN

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

NER

TUNING

Manual Manually adjust equalizer sound.

Flat Adjust individual speakers to achieve the

same characteristics. Select this option if

speakers offer the same quality.

Front Adjust individual speakers to achieve the

same characteristics as the front left and

right speakers. Select this option if front

left and right speakers offer significantly

greater quality than other speakers.

Natural Adjust all speakers to achieve a natural

sound. Select this if high-frequency

sounds seem too strong when “PEQ

Select” is set to “Flat.”

Through (Default) Disable the equalizer.

Flat > Manual Copy the “Flat” parametric equalizer

information acquired with automatic

setup.

Front > Manual Copy the “Front” parametric equalizer

information acquired with automatic

setup.

Natural > Manual Copy the “Natural” parametric equalizer

information acquired with automatic

setup.

To reset all parameter settings for the selected

speaker, select “Reset to Flat” and press kENTER.

Off (Default) Does not generate test tones.

On Generates test tones. While “On” is

selected, test tones are produced

constantly.

You can use the test tone in a variety of circumstances.

For example, you can adjust the volume balance

settings for each speaker, or whenever you adjust the

settings on the internal parametric equalizer, you can

listen to the actual effect while operating this unit.

Turn the test tone off when you have finished making

adjustments.

En 81

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

Setting the audio output function of this

unit

Sound Setup items

■

Synchronizing audio/video output

Lipsync

Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync

function).

Mode

Selects a compensation method for the delay between audio and

video output.

Delay

■

Auto-adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS

dynamic range

Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bitstream

(Dolby Digital and DTS) signal playback.

■

Setting the maximum volume

Max Volume

Specify the maximum volume level so that sound is not too loud.

The default setting of +16.5 dB produces the highest volume.

Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.

Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for

Dolby Digital and DTS playback.

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume for this receiver.

Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned

on.

Adaptive DSP Level Adjusts the level of DSP effect in conjunction with the

volume level.

Auto (Default) When connecting to a TV via HDMI, automatically

adjusts output timing if the TV supports an automatic

lipsync function.

Manual Manually adjusts the correction time. Select this when

the monitor does not support the automatic lipsync

function.

Adjustable range 0 ms to +250 ms

Default setting 0 ms

Adjustment

increments

1 ms

MAX (Default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

STD Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for

regular home use.

MIN/AUTO (MIN) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low

volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for

bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals.

(AUTO) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby

TrueHD signals based on input signal information.

Adjustable range -30.0 dB to +16.5 dB (maximum volume)

Default setting +16.5 dB

Adjustment

increments

5.0 dB

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

En 82

■

Setting the startup volume

Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. When

this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set at the level when the

receiver last entered standby mode. J1

■

Adjusting DSP effect and volume level

Adaptive DSP Level

Automatically adjust the level of DSP effect in conjunction with

the volume level.

Setting this unit’s video output function

Video Setup items

■

Analog-to-analog video conversion

Analog to Analog Conversion

Enables or disables video conversion between analog video jacks.

Adjustable range Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB

Default setting Off

Adjustment

increments

0.5 dB

Off Disables automatic adjustment of the level of DSP

effect.

On (Default) Adjusts the degree of DSP effect in conjunction with

volume level. The higher the volume level, the less the

DSP effect applied. The lower the volume level, the

greater the DSP effect applied.

Analog to Analog

Conversion

Enable or disable video conversion between analog

video jacks.

Processing Enable or disable adjustment of resolution and aspect

ratio for video signal converted to HDMI video.

Off Disables video conversion between analog video

jacks.

On (Default) Enables video conversion between analog video jacks.

• Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is always possible unless

video signals are being input at the HDMI input jacks or 1080p-

resolution analog video signals are being input (☞

p. 108).

• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line

video signals interchangeably.

• 480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals can not

be output at the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack (☞

p. 108).

• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR

OUT jacks.

• When composite video signals from a VCR are converted into

component video signals, the picture quality may suffer

depending on your VCR.

• Unconventional signals input at the composite video jacks cannot

be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set

“Analog to Analog Conversion” to “Off.”

1 : When you set “Max Volume” at a lower level than “Initial Volume,” “Max

Volume” has priority.

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

En 83

■

Adjusting resolution and aspect ratio with

conversion of video signal to HDMI

Processing

Adjust resolution and aspect ratio with conversion of video input to

HDMI video (upscaling).

Resolution

Aspect

Setting HDMI functions

HDMI Setup items

Off (Default) Resolution and aspect ratio are not adjusted with

processing.

On Resolution and aspect ratio are adjusted with

processing.

Auto (Default) Automatic upscaling in accordance with TV

resolution.

480p Upscaling to 480p (576p).

720p Upscaling to 720p.

1080i Upscaling to 1080i.

1080p Upscaling to 1080p.

Through No upscaling.

• The 720p-, 1080i- and 1080p-resolution video signals cannot be

upscaled (☞

p. 108).

• When a TV is connected to this unit via the HDMI jack, this unit

automatically detects a resolution that the TV supports. Only the

detected resolution can be selected.

• If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the TV supports, set

“MON.CHK” in the Advanced Setup menu to “SKIP” (☞

p. 93)

and try again.

Through (Default) The aspect ratio of HDMI video signal sources is not

adjusted.

16:9 Normal Transmits 4:3 aspect ratio video signals to a 16:9 TV

with black bands on either side of the screen.

• The Aspect setting is automatically disabled when “Resolution”

is set to “Through.”

• The Aspect setting is automatically disabled for video input with

aspect ratios other than 4:3.

• Changing the aspect ratio of 720p, 1080i, or 1080p has no effect.

HDMI Control Turns the HDMI Control on or off.

ARC (Audio Return

Channel)

Turns the Audio Return Channel function on or

off.

TV Audio Input Chooses automatically selected audio input in

conjunction with TV operation when the

HDMI Control is turned on.

Audio Output Specifies whether or not audio signal is output

through this unit and a TV connected via the

HDMI OUT jack.

Standby Through J1 Turns the Standby Through function on or off.

1 : This item appears depending on “HDMI Control.”

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

En 84

■

Receiver operation via TV (HDMI Control)

HDMI Control

Set the HDMI Control function to “On” to operate devices

connected via HDMI. If the TV or other external components

support HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link), you can use

the remote controls of those devices to operate some of this unit’s

functions, and to synchronize this unit with the operation of those

devices.

Refer to “Using the HDMI Control function” (☞

p. 95) for setting

instructions.

■

Listening to TV audio via single HDMI

cable (Audio Return Channel)

ARC (Audio Return Channel)

You can enable or disable the Audio Return Channel function.

When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and

the function is enabled, the TV’s audio output is transmit to this

unit via an HDMI cable.

The TV audio input to this unit is regarded as the input source

selected in “TV Audio Input.” J2

By means of this function, you do not need to connect the TV’s

audio output (digital audio output or analog audio output) to the

unit.

When the TV audio is input to the unit using Audio Return

Channel, “TV” is displayed on the front panel display.

■

Selecting an input source to assign audio

input for the TV

TV Audio Input

Select the input source that receives audio signals from TV while

the HDMI Control function is on.

When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and

the function is enabled, the audio input for the TV is assigned to

the input source selected here. J2

Off (Default) Sets HDMI Control to “Off.”

On Sets HDMI Control to “On.” J1

If this unit is connected to HDMI devices that do not support the

HDMI Control function, these functions will not operate.

Off (Default) Sets the Audio Return Channel to “Off.”

On Sets the Audio Return Channel to “On.”

Refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio

Return Channel function” (☞

p. 97) for setting instructions.

SL SR

SBL SBR

AV4

VOL.

Audio input AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2

Default setting AV 4

Refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically

when listening to TV audio” (☞

p. 96) for instructions.

1 : When the HDMI Control is “On,” the Standby Through function is

automatically enabled. When this unit enters standby mode, the audio and

video signals from the last-selected HDMI input source will continue to be

transmitted to the TV. The HDMI input source can only be changed using the

remote control.

2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input

source cannot be used.

En 85

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

■

Specify whether or not audio signal is

output through this unit and a TV

Audio Output

Choose whether audio is played back through this unit or through a

TV.

Amp

Specify whether or not audio signal is output through this unit.

OUT

Specify whether or not audio signal is output through a TV

connected via the HDMI OUT jack.

■

Transmitting HDMI audio/video to the TV

during standby mode (Standby Through)

Standby Through

This function allows audio/video signals from HDMI inputs to

continue to be transmitted to a TV when this unit is in standby

mode.

When the Standby Through function is “On,” audio/video signals

continue to be output to the TV from the last

HDMI input source

before this unit enters standby mode.

The HDMI input source can be

selected using dHDMI1-5 or dV-AUX in standby mode.

Setting this unit’s multi-zone function

Multi Zone Setup item

■

Adjusting Zone2 volume

Zone2 Set

Max Volume

Specify the maximum volume level in Zone2 so that sound is not

too loud.

Initial Volume

Specify the initial volume level in Zone2 when this unit is turned on.

Off Audio is not output through this unit.

On (Default) Audio is output through this unit. When this setting is

selected, audio from the external component is output

in a format compatible with this unit.

Off (Default) Audio is not output through a TV connected via the

HDMI OUT jack.

On Outputs audio through a TV connected via the HDMI

OUT jack. When this setting is selected, audio from

the external component is output in a format

compatible with the TV.

Off (Default) Sets Standby Through to “Off.”

On Transmits audio/video signals from the selected

HDMI input source to the TV.

• When “HDMI Control” is “On,” Standby Through function is

automatically enabled and “Standby Through” is not displayed.

• When the Standby Through function is on, the HDMI Through/

iPod Charge indicator on the front panel lights during the standby

mode. This unit consumes approximately 3 W of power.

Zone2 Set Adjusts Zone2 volume level.

Adjustable range -30.0 dB to +16.5 dB (maximum volume)

Default setting +16.5 dB

Adjustment

increments

5.0 dB

Adjustable range Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB

Default setting Off

Adjustment

increments

0.5 dB

En 86

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

Making the receiver easier to use

Function Setup items

■

Goes enter standby mode automatically

when you leave it without operating

Auto Power Down

If you do not operate this unit or use the remote control for an

extended period of time, it will automatically go into standby mode

(Auto Power Down function). This function’s default setting is

“Off.” When you want to enable this function, set the amount of

time to pass before this unit will enter standby.

■

Specifying menu display

Display Set

Specify front panel display brightness and TV screen wall paper.

Front Panel Display

Specify front panel display brightness and message scroll pattern.

Wall Paper

Specify the wall paper displayed on the TV screen when no video

signal is input. Select one that you prefer.

Auto Power Down This unit enters standby mode if no operations are

performed.

Display Set Specifies menu items displayed on TV screen and the

front panel.

Trigger Output Specifies TRIGGER OUT jack function.

Memory Guard Protects some settings against accidental

modification.

4hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated

this unit for four hours.

8hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated

this unit for eight hours.

12hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated

this unit for twelve hours.

Off (Default) Auto Power Down function is disabled.

This unit starts a countdown of 30 seconds before entering the

standby mode. Pressing any key of the remote control during the

countdown cancels entering the standby mode and reset the

timer.

Dimmer Adjustable range: -4 - 0

Reduce brightness of the front panel display. As the

value is lowered, the panel display darkens.

Scroll Selects the manner in which display scrolls when the

total number of characters exceeds the display area on

the front panel display.

Select “Continue” for continuous scrolling of all

characters.

Select “Once” to scroll through all characters once

and then halt scrolling for display of only the first 14

characters.

Picture Displays an image on the TV screen when there is no

video signal.

Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when

there is no video signal.

SETUP

Setting various functions (Setup menu)

En 87

■

Setting TRIGGER OUT functions

Trigger Output

Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function synchronized with power

status of each zone or input switching.

Trigger Mode

Specify the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

Target Zone

Specify the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions

synchronized.

Target Source

Specify the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with

each input switching.

Manual

Manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission.

This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the

external component connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

■

Prohibiting setting changes

Memory Guard

Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made

to the settings on Setup menu.

Language

Select the language used for display of menus and messages. J1

Choices: English (English), (Japanese), (French),

(German), (Spanish),

(Russian)

Power (Default) The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized

with the power status of the zone specified with

“Target Zone.”

Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized

with the input switching in the zone specified with

“Target Zone.”

Electronic signal is transmitted according to the

setting made in “Target Source.”

Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for

electronic signal transmission with “Manual.”

Main (Default) When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic

signal transmission is synchronized with power status

of the main zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic

signal transmission is synchronized with input

switching in the main zone.

Zone2 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic

signal transmission is synchronized with power status

of Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic

signal transmission is synchronized with input

switching in Zone2.

All When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic

signal transmission is synchronized with power status

of the main zone or Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic

signal transmission is synchronized with input

switching in the main zone or Zone2.

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you

switch to the input source specified in this option.

High (Default) Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the

input source specified in this option.

This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to

“Source.”

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High (Default) Transmits the electronic signal.

This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to

“Manual.”

Off (Default) Settings are not protected.

On Prohibits changes to the settings on Setup menu until

it is returned to “Off.”

While set to “On,” the unit displays “Memory

Guard!” when an attempt is made to change the

settings.

1 : Content window information is displayed in the language in which that

information was released.

SETUP

En 88

A variety of information for this unit can be displayed.

Selecting information

Press jON SCREEN.

Use kCursor B / C to select “Information”

and press kENTER.

Use kCursor D / E to select an Information

menu and press kENTER.

■

Audio information

Displays information on the current audio signal.

■

Video information

Displays information on the current video signal.

■

HDMI monitor

Displays information on the TV screen connected to this

unit’s HDMI OUT jack.

■

System information

Displays information on the current settings of “Remote

ID,” “TV Format” and “Speaker Impedance.”

■

Zone information

Displays information on Zone2 settings.

Confirming information of this unit (Information menu)

jON SCREEN

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

ENTER

ON SCREEN

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

EIVE

[

]

NER

TUNING

Format Signal format. When this unit is unable to

detect a digital signal, it automatically

switches to analog input.

Sampling The number of samples taken per second

from a continuous signal to make a

discrete signal.

Channel The number of source channels in the

input signal (front/surround/LFE). For

example, a multi-channel soundtrack with

3 front channels, 2 surround channels and

LFE is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

Bitrate The number of bits passing a given point

per second.

Dialogue The dialogue normalization level preset

to the current input bitstream signal.

• “___” is displayed when this unit cannot display the

corresponding information.

• Some high-definition audio bitstream contents may not

include the discrete surround back left and right

channel signals, but are encoded at a bitrate of 192

kHz.

• Even when direct bitstream output settings are applied,

some players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby

Digital Plus bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams,

while converting DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio bitstreams to DTS bitstreams.

HDMI signal Source video signal type and video signal

output to this unit’s HDMI OUT jack.

HDMI Resolution Input signal (analog or HDMI) and output

signal (HDMI) resolution.

Analog Resolution Resolution of the source video signal and

the analog video signal output to this

unit’s COMPONENT MONITOR OUT

jacks.

HDMI Error Error message for HDMI sources or

connected HDMI devices (☞p. 100).

Interface Displays information on the current

connection interface.

Video Resolution Displays the frequency for each video

resolution of the TV currently connected.

SETUP

En 89

You can operate an external component such as TV and DVD player with the remote control of this unit by setting the code for external component (remote control code).

The remote control code can be set for each input source. Individual setting allows you to switch external components seamlessly depending on the selected input source.

Selecting input source connected to DVD

player

Selecting input source connected to CD

player

Keys connecting external

components

cSOURCE A

Switches an external component on and off.

Cursor, kENTER, kRETURN

Operates the menus of external components.

DISPLAY

Switches an external component display.

External component operation keys

Functions as a recording or playback key of an external

component, or a menu display key.

mNumeric keys

Functions as numeric keys of an external component.

nTV control keys J1

Controlling other components with the remote control

cSOURCE A

dInput selector

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

kRETURN

lExternal component

operation keys

lDISPLAY

mNumeric keys

nTV control keys

nINPUT

nMUTE

nTV VOL +/-

nTV CH +/-

qSOURCE/RECEIVER

RETURN

HDMI

AUDIO

1234

125

V-AUX

ENTER

7856

1234

REC

TV VOL TV CH

TOP

DISPLAY

SOURCE

INPUT

MUTE

DOCK

MULTI

1234

RECEIVER

[ A ]

TUNER

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

AIN

NE 2

CODE SE

PTION

REE

RESET

TUNING

Playback/Stop

DVD player

CD player

If you are unable to operate this unit after operating

an external component, light up

qSOURCE/RECEIVER in orange by pressing it,

and then try operating the remote control again.

Playback/Stop

DVD player

CD player

The remote control keys for controlling external

components are available only when the external

components have corresponding control keys.

nINPUT Switches video inputs of TV.

nMUTE Mutes TV volume temporarily.

nTV VOL +/- Controls the volume of TV.

nTV CH +/- Switches TV channels.

nA Turns on and off TV.

1 : You can register remote control codes for external components to

dInput selector and remote control codes for TVs in nA

(

nTV control keys).

To register a TV remote control code to

dInput selector:

You can use the

kCursor, mNumeric keys, and nTV

control keys to control a TV you have registered.

To register a remote control code for a device other than a TV to

dInput selector:

You can use the

kCursor and mNumeric keys etc to control

external components, and the

nTV control keys to control

TVs registered in

nA.

SETUP

Controlling other components with the remote control

En 90

Default remote control code

settings

The following remote control codes are assigned to input

sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of

available remote control codes, refer to “Remote Control

Code Search” in the CD-ROM.

Registering remote control codes

for external component operations

The following section describes how to register remote

control code using an example of the registration of the

remote control codes of a Yamaha BD player connected

to HDMI2 jack.

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-

ROM to search the available remote control

codes from the category or manufacturer of

external components.

“2064” can be used for a Yamaha BD player.

Press oCODE SET using a pointed object

such as the tip of a ballpoint pen.

Press dHDMI2 to switch the input source to

HDMI2. J2

Perform the following steps to register the selected

input source here to the remote control code.

dHDMI2

nTV control keys

oCODE SET

TV VOL TV CH

CODE SET

INPUT

MUTE

ENE

RETURN

OLUME

ENHAN

R. DE

TRAI

LEEP

RE DIRE

MUS

RADI

MUTE

ENTER

TOP

MEN

P-

PLAY

SOU

MAIN

ZONE 2

PTI

ON SCREE

EMORY

HDMI

-A

RECEIVE

[

]

TUNER

TUNIN

Input Category Manufacturer

Remote

control code

HDMI1 Blu-ray player/

recorder

Yamaha 2064

HDMI2 —— —

HDMI3 —— —

HDMI4 —— —

HDMI5 —— —

AV1 —— —

AV2 —— —

AV3 CD player Yamaha 5095

AV4 —— —

AV5 —— —

AV6 —— —

AUDIO1 —— —

AUDIO2 —— —

V-AUX —— —

A J1 —— —

DOCK —— —

TUNER —— —

• Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1

minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat

from step 2.

• Remote control code of an external component cannot

be set from the name or model number of a unit. Use

“Remote Control Code Search

” in the CD-ROM to

search the available remote control codes from the

category or manufacturer of external components.

• If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first

code in the list, if it does not work then try the other

codes.

SOURCE

CODE SET

RECEIVER

HDMI

ZONE

blinks twice

Continues to the

1 : Use A for external component operations only. Set these keys to

remote control codes if you want to perform external component

operations without linking to input source selection of this unit.

For example, it may be convenient to assign remote control codes

for devices such as TVs.

2 : When you want to register a remote control code to the

nTV control keys, press nA (nTV control keys) in step

SETUP

Controlling other components with the remote control

En 91

Enter a remote control code “2064” using

mNumeric keys. J1

Once the remote control code is registered successfully

qSOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice.

To switch between BD player linked to

scene selections, press iSCENE and at the

same time press dHDMI2 and hold it for

approximately 3 seconds.

Then you can operate the external components by

switching the input source to HDMI2, or selecting

HDMI2 in the registered scene.

Same steps for operating other external components,

press

iSCENE and at the same time press the input

source key selected in step 3 and hold it for

approximately 3 seconds.

Resetting all remote control codes

Resetting all remote control codes for external

components to the initial factory settings.

Press oCODE SET using a pointed object

such as the tip of a ballpoint pen.

Press qSOURCE/RECEIVER on the remote

control.

Enter “9981” using mNumeric keys.

HDMI2

iSCENE

mNumeric keys

oCODE SET

qSOURCE/RECEIVER

SCENE

DVD

RADIO

7856

1234

SOURCE

CODE SET

RECEIVER

RETURN

OLUME

ENHAN

R. DE

TRAI

LEEP

RE DIRE

MUS

MUTE

ENTER

TOP

MEN

P-

PLAY

MAIN

ZONE 2

INPUT

MUTE

PTI

ON SCREE

EMORY

HDMI

-A

[

]

TUNER

TUNIN

• If the registration fails, repeat from step 2.

• In case of an external component with multiple remote

control codes, the other remote control codes may be

supported. Repeat from step 2 with the other remote

control codes.

2 0

SOURCE

RECEIVER

HDMI

ZONE

Registration successful: blinks twice

Registration failed: blinks 6 times

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1

minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat

from step 1.

SOURCE

CODE SET

RECEIVER

HDMI

ZONE

blinks twice

Once the remote control code is reset successfully

qSOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice.

If setup fails, repeat from step 1.

9 9

SOURCE

RECEIVER

HDMI

ZONE

Reset successful: blinks twice

Reset failed: blinks 6 times

1 : When you want to register a remote control code to the

nTV control keys, enter the TV remote control code in step 4.

SETUP

En 92

The Advanced Setup menu can be used for unit initialization and other useful extended functions. The Advanced Setup menu can be operated as follows.

Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup

Switch this unit to the standby mode.

Press MAIN ZONE A while pressing and holding

STRAIGHT on the front panel.

Release STRAIGHT when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed

on the front panel display.

After a few seconds, the top menu items are displayed.

Use PROGRAM l / h to select the item to be set

from the following items.

In the Advanced Setup menu, you can set the following settings.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select the value you

want to change.

Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then

switch it on again.

The settings become effective and the unit is powered on.

Setting the impedance of speakers

Changes the unit settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected. J1

Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)

PHONES

SILENT

CINEMA

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

DVD

RADIO

INPUT

PROGRAM

SCENE

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

YPAO MIC

ZONE2 ZONE CONTROL

MAIN ZONE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM l / h

MAIN ZONE A

SP IMP. Sets the impedance of speakers.

REMOTE ID Changes the remote control ID of a receiver.

TV FORMAT Specifies the TV’s color encoding format.

MON.CHK Removes the up-scaling limitation on HDMI video

output.

INIT Initializes various settings for this unit.

6ΩMIN Select the impedance when 6 Ω speakers are

connected.

8ΩMIN (Default) Select the impedance when speakers above 8 Ω are

connected.

SPIMP.-8MIN

1 : For detailed procedures of speaker impedance settings, refer to “Changing

speaker impedance” (☞

p. 18).

SETUP

Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)

En 93

Avoiding crossing remote control

signals when using multiple

Yamaha receivers

The remote control of the unit can only receive signals

from a receiver which has an identical ID (remote

control ID). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers,

you can set each remote control with a unique remote

control ID for its corresponding receiver.

On the contrary, if you are setting the same remote

control ID for all receivers, you can use one remote

control to operate 2 receivers.

Changing TV format

Change the color encoding format of OSD to PAL or

NTSC (default), to match the format used by the TV

connected via the HDMI OUT or VIDEO (MONITOR

OUT) jack.

Removing HDMI video output up-

scaling limits

Removes the up-scaling limitation on video resolution

when this unit and a TV are connected via HDMI jacks.

If a resolution supported by the monitor cannot be

detected when configuring the up-scaling settings, this

setting will remove the output limitation.

Numeric keys

oCODE SET

qSOURCE/RECEIVER

7856

1234

SOURCE

CODE SET

RECEIVER

ENE

RETURN

OLUME

ENHAN

R. DE

TRAI

LEEP

RE DIRE

MUS

RADI

MUTE

ENTER

TOP

MEN

P-

PLAY

MAIN

ZONE 2

INPUT

MUTE

PTI

ON SCREE

EMORY

HDMI

-A

[

]

TUNER

TUNIN

ID1 (Default) Receives the remote control signals set in

ID1.

ID2 Receives the remote control signals set in

ID2.

ID1 is set for both remote control and receiver by

default. To avoid crossing remote control, change the

remote control ID for both remote control and

receiver.

REMOTEID-ID1

■ To change the remote control ID

Press oCODE SET using a pointed

object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen.

Press qSOURCE/RECEIVER.

Enter the desired remote control ID code.

To switch to ID1:

Enter “5019” using

mNumeric keys.

To switch to ID2:

Enter “5020” using

mNumeric keys.

Once the remote control code is registered successfully

qSOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice.

Perform each of the following steps within

1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if

more than 1 minute passes since the last operation.

To reset, repeat from step 1.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

HDMI

ZONE

Registration successful: blinks twice

Registration failed: blinks 6 times

• If setup fails, repeat from step 1.

• Returns to ID1 after the remote control code is

initialized (☞

p. 91).

YES (Default) Video output signals of a resolution not

supported by the TV will not be

transmitted.

SKIP This unit ignores the TV’s support

capability and transmits input video

signals to the TV.

TVFORMAT-NTSC

MON.CHK-YES

En 94

SETUP

Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)

Initializing various settings for this unit

Initializes various settings stored in this unit and sets it back to

default.

Select the items to be initialized from the following.

DSP PARAM Initializes all parameters for the sound programs.

VIDEO Resets video conversion settings (resolution/aspect

ratio) in the Setup menu.

ALL Resets this unit to default factory settings.

CANCEL (Default) Does not initialize.

When an option other than CANCEL is selected, the applicable

default settings will be restored when the unit switches to

standby mode.

INIT- CANCEL

SETUP

En 95

This unit supports the HDMI Control function, which allows you to

operate external components via HDMI. If devices that support

HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link-compatible TVs,

DVD/Blu-ray Disc recorders, etc.) are connected J1, remote

controls for those devices can be used to perform the following

operations:

– Power synchronization (on/standby)

– Volume control, including Mute

– Changing the audio signal output device (either the TV or this

unit)

Connect the TV that supports the HDMI Control

function to this unit’s HDMI output jack.

Connect the DVD recorder that supports the HDMI

Control function to this unit’s HDMI input jack.

Turn on the TV and this unit.

Refer to the TV’s instruction manual on how to operate external

components.

Set the TV and this unit’s HDMI Control function to

“On.”

Turn the TV off.

Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the

TV. If they are not synchronized, turn them off manually.

Turn the TV on.

Confirm that this unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If

it is still off, turn it on manually.

Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that

is connected to this unit (e.g., HDMI1).

If DVD recorder that supports the HDMI Control

function are connected to this unit, turn them on.

Confirm that this unit is properly synchronized with

the TV through the following operations by using the

TV remote control.

• Power On/Off

• Volume Control

• Switching between audio output devices

Using the HDMI Control function

NOTE

The following is an example of how to connect this unit, a TV,

and a DVD recorder. Follow the instructions in your TV and

DVD recorder manuals, as well as the ones written below.

– Set the TV’s HDMI Control function to “On”

– Follow the AV amplifier connection instructions, and connect

this unit to the TV

HDMI

Control signal

(such as volume control)

Remote control of TV

This unit

HDMI connection

Receiver unit Confirm that “HDMI Control” in the Setup menu

(HDMI Setup) is set to “On” (☞p. 84). J2

TV/DVD Recorder Check the instruction manuals for those devices.

Receiver unit Confirm that the input source for the DVD recorder

has been selected. If a different input source has been

selected, change it manually.

TV/DVD Recorder Confirm that the video signal from the recorder is

being properly received by the TV.

Operations 1-8 will not be required more than twice.

If this unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations,

check that the HDMI Control function is set to “On” for both

devices.

If they will not properly synchronize, unplugging and re-

plugging the devices and turning them on and off may solve the

problem.

1 : We recommend that you use TVs and DVD/BD recorders from the same

manufacturer whenever possible.

2 : The default setting for the HDMI Control function is “Off.”

SETUP

Using the HDMI Control function

En 96

■

Switching the input source on this

unit automatically when listening

to TV audio

When the HDMI Control (☞p. 95) is operating properly,

the input source of this unit is automatically changed to

match operations carried out on the TV. The default

input jack is AV4. If the AV4 optical digital jack is

connected to the TV’s audio output jack, then you can

enjoy TV sound through this unit right away.

To use other jacks to input audio signals from TV, carry

out the following procedure.

Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI

cable.

Connect TV’s audio output to this unit.

The input jacks listed below are available to input TV’s

audio signals. Use the same jack type as used for the

TV.

Press jON SCREEN. J1

Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select

“Setup” and press kENTER.

Press kCursor D / E repeatedly to select

“HDMI” and press kENTER.

Make sure that “HDMI Control” is “On.”

When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off,” press

kENTER and kCursor B / C to set to “On.”

Press kCursor C to select “TV Audio

Input” and press kENTER.

Use kCursor B / C to select the input jack

connected in step 2.

Press jON SCREEN when you have

finished changing the settings.

If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this

unit will automatically switch to the input source

chosen in step 7.

jON SCREEN

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

ENTER

ON SCREEN

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

NER

TUNING

(

)

AV 4

OPTICAL

(

)

AV 4

OPTICAL

OPTICA

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

AV 5

AV 6

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

MUL

AXIA

(

)

AXIAL

IDE

DMI

(

D/DV

)

NEN

VIDE

HDMI

OUT

NEN

IDE

VIDE

NIT

NTENN

OPTICAL

Audio output

(Optical)

TV output jack Input jack

Optical digital audio output AV1 or AV4 (Default)

Coaxial digital audio output AV2 or AV3

Analog stereo output AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

(

)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

DOCK

MULTI CH INPUT

VIDE

HDMI

(

D/DVD

)

HDMI 2

HDMI

CENTER

SURRO

RONT

NENT

IDE

HDMI

R.BA

RIGGER OUT

.1A MAX

CENTE

REM

OUT

NENT

IDE

VIDE

NIT

AUDIO

ONE

ANTENN

Available input jacks

1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 76)

for details on the Setup menu.

SETUP

Using the HDMI Control function

En 97

■

Single HDMI cable input to TV

audio with Audio Return Channel

function

When using a TV that supports HDMI functions and

Audio Return Channel function, audio/video output

from this unit to the TV or audio output from the TV to

this unit can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable

(Audio Return Channel function). Audio signals

transmitted from the TV to this unit can be assigned to

any input source.

Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI

cable.

Press jON SCREEN. J1

Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select

“Setup” and press kENTER.

Press kCursor D / E repeatedly to select

“HDMI” and press kENTER.

Make sure that “HDMI Control” is “On.”

When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off,” press

kENTER and kCursor B / C to set to “On.”

Press kCursor C to select “TV Audio

Input” and press kENTER.

Press kCursor B / C to select the input

source to which the HDMI audio signals will

be assigned, and press kRETURN.

Press kCursor C to select “ARC (Audio

Return Channel)” and press kENTER. J2

Press kCursor C to select “On.”

The Audio Return Channel function will turn on.

Press jON SCREEN to close the Setup

menu.

If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals,

this unit will automatically switch to the input

source chosen in step 6.

jON SCREEN

kCursor B / C / D / E

kENTER

kRETURN

RETURN

ENTER

ON SCREEN

SCENE

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHTSLEEP

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

AIN

NE 2

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

PTION

RESET

DMI

UDI

AUX

DOCK

MULTI

[

]

NER

TUNING

HDMI

OUT

ARC

HDMI

OUT

ARC

IDE

HDMI 1

(

DVD

)

HDMI

REM

OUT

COMPONENT

IDE

VIDE

ANTENNA

HDMI

TV audio

output

Video / Audio

output

1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 76)

for details on the Setup menu.

2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected

for the input source cannot be used.

SETUP

En 98

This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone2). You can

control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control.

Connecting Zone2

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.

• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits infrared signals from the remote control

to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone.

• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.

■

Using the external amplifier

An amplifier located in the secondary zone can be connected to this unit as shown below.

■

Using the internal amplifier of this unit

Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP jacks directly (☞p. 18).

■

Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks for multi-zone components

This unit is equipped with REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks. You can use these jacks to control

this unit and other components from Zone2 (☞

p. 30).

Using multi-zone configuration

Only analog signal can be sent to Zone2. If you want to output sound from Zone2, connect an

external component to AV5-6, AUDIO1-2, or VIDEO AUX by analog connection. For example, if

you want to output sound from an HDMI DVD player in Zone2, you must connect the component to

this unit by both HDMI and analog connections.

Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we

recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the

Zone2 connections that best meet your requirements.

To the REMOTE IN jack

Infrared signal

emitter

DVD player (etc.)

Amplifier

Remote control

Second zone

(Zone2)

This unit

From the ZONE2 OUT jacks

Infrared signal

receiver

From the REMOTE OUT jack

Main zone

To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. These models

may not require an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown

below.

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

HDMI

HDMI 4

DMI

CENTER

SURROUN

URROUND

BACK

AMP

SINGL

EXTRA

ZONE2/

RON

OOFE

UDI

OUT

SURROUND

UR.BACK

PRE OU

UBWOOFE

RON

ENTER

PEAKER

AUDIO

Amplifier

Second Zone

(Zone2)

Audio input

REMOTE

Infrared signal

receiver

This unit Yamaha

component

REMOTE

OUT IN

REMOTE

OUT

SETUP

Using multi-zone configuration

En 99

Controlling Zone2

The remote control can be used to select and control

Zone2 devices. The available operations are as follows:

• Selecting the input source of Zone2.

• Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as the

input source of Zone2.

• Adjust the volume of Zone2 devices (when connected via

the built-in amplifier).

■

Activating the Zone2 operation

mode

Set bMAIN/ZONE2 to ZONE2 before attempting to

use the remote control to control Zone2 devices.

■

Operating Zone2

To switch between on and standby for Zone2

Press pRECEIVER A.

To select an input source for Zone2

Press dInput selector.

To enable the sleep timer for Zone2

Automatically switch the Zone2 device to standby mode

after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer).

Press hSLEEP repeatedly to specify a time for the

sleep timer function.

MAIN/ZONE2

dInput selector

hSLEEP

pRECEIVER A

SLEEP

AUDIO

V-AUX

MAIN

ZONE 2

DOCK

TUNER

SCENE

RETURN

ENHANCE

UR. DE

STRAIGHT

URE DIRECT

OVI

USI

DVD

RADI

ENTER

ENT

TOP

OP-U

PLAY

EIVE

CODE SE

MUTE

MULTI

DMI

PTION

REE

[

]

RESET

TUNING

Sleep 120min. Sleep 90min.

Sleep 60min.Sleep 30min.Sleep Off

En 100

APPENDIX

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service

center.

General

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The power will not

turn on.

The protection circuitry operated

3 times consecutively.

As a safety precaution, when the protection

circuitry operates 3 times consecutively, the

capability to turn on the power is disabled.

Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or

service center to request repair.

—

The unit enters

standby mode soon

after the power is

turned on.

The power cable is not completely

inserted.

Connect the power cable properly to an AC

wall outlet.

—

(When this unit is turned back on

and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is

displayed.) The protection

circuitry has been activated

because this unit was turned on

while a speaker cable was shorted.

Make sure that all speaker cables between

this unit and speakers are connected

properly.

This unit cannot be

turned off or does

not work properly.

The internal microcomputer is

hung-up due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or

excessive static electricity) or by a

drop in power supply voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC

wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then

plug it in again.

—

The batteries in the remote control

may have lost their charge.

Replace all batteries. 7

The unit enters

standby mode.

The protection circuitry has been

activated because of a short circuit,

etc.

Check that the speaker with an impedance

of at least 6 Ω.

—

Check that the speaker impedance settings

are correct.

Check that the speaker wires are not

touching each other, then turn the unit back

on.

—

The sleep timer has turned off the

unit.

Turn on the unit, and play the source again. —

After display of a

countdown on the

front panel, the unit

goes into standby

mode.

If you do not use take any action,

the Auto Power Down function

operates.

Turn on the unit, and play the source again. —

In the Setup menu “Auto Power Down”

(“Function” → “Auto Power Down”),

increase the time until switching to standby

mode, or turn off the Auto Power Down

function.

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

Speaker connections are not

secure.

Secure the connections. 19

The HDMI components connected

to the unit do not support the

HDCP copy protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the

HDCP copy protection standards.

—

The audio input into the device is

set to playback through the TV.

In the Setup menu, set the “Amp” of “Audio

Output” (“HDMI” → “Audio Output” →

“Amp”) to “On.”

No appropriate input source has

been selected.

Select an appropriate input source with

Input selector.

The volume is turned down or

muted.

Turn up the volume. —

Signals that this unit cannot

reproduce are being input from a

source component, such as a CD-

ROM.

Use an input source that has signals that can

be reproduced on this unit.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

En 101

APPENDIX

Troubleshooting

No picture. The video signal output from this

unit is not supported by a monitor

connected to this unit via the

HDMI OUT jack.

Displays the Advanced Setup menu and

select “VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video

parameters.

Displays the Advanced Setup menu and set

“MON.CHK” to “YES.”

An appropriate video input is not

selected on the TV.

Select an appropriate video input on the TV. —

No sound is output

from a specific

speaker.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

Check the Speaker indicators on

the front panel display. If the

corresponding indicator lights up,

connect another speaker and check

if sound is output.

If sound is not output, the unit may be

malfunctioning.

The playback component or

speakers are not connected

properly.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

19, 25

Output from that speaker is

disabled.

Check the Speaker indicators on the front

panel display. If the corresponding indicator

is turned off, try the following.

1) Change to a different input source.

2) With the selected sound program, sound

is not output from that speaker. Select

another sound program.

3) “None” may have been selected for that

speaker on this unit. Display “Speaker” in

the Setup menu, and set respective

parameters to enable output from that

speaker (“Speaker” → “Manual Setup” →

“Configuration”).

10, 77

The volume of that speaker is set

to the minimum in “Speaker” in

the Setup menu.

Display “Speaker” in the Setup menu and

adjust the volume (“Speaker” → “Manual

Setup” → “Level”).

(If hardly any sound comes from

one channel)

Speaker output balance is not set

correctly.

Balance the volume of each speaker from

“Level” in the Setup menu (“Speaker” →

“Manual Setup” → “Level”).

Sound may not be output from

certain channels, depending on the

input source or sound program.

Try another sound program. 41

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When a monaural source sound

program is applied, for some

surround decoders, sound from all

channels is output from the center

speaker.

Try another sound program. 41

No sound is heard

from the presence

speakers.

This unit is in straight decoding

mode and a monaural source is

being played back.

Press STRAIGHT to exit straight decoding

mode.

Sound may not be output from

certain channels depending on

input sources or sound programs.

Try another sound program. 41

No sound is heard

from the surround

speakers.

This unit is in straight decoding

mode and a monaural source is

being played back.

Press STRAIGHT to exit straight decoding

mode.

Sound may not be output from

certain channels depending on

input sources or sound programs.

Try another sound program. 41

No sound is heard

from the surround

back speakers.

“Extended Surround” in the

OPTION menu is set to “OFF,” or

an input signal does not contain a

surround back flag with “Extended

Surround” set to “Auto.”

Set “Extended Surround” other than “OFF”

or “Auto.”

No sound is heard

from the subwoofer.

A subwoofer is not connected, or it

is inactive.

Check that a subwoofer is connected

correctly, and from the Setup menu

“Subwoofer” (“Speaker” → “Manual

Setup” → “Configuration” →

“Subwoofer”), set the subwoofer to “Use.”

20, 79

The subwoofer is turned off. Turn the subwoofer power on.

If the subwoofer includes an Auto Power

Off function, then lower the Auto Power Off

sensitivity settings.

—

The source does not contain LFE

(☞p. 107) or low frequency

signals.

—

The right

combination of audio

/ video jacks to

connect cannot be

found.

Combine input connected to the

external component video output

with another input audio jack.

Display the Input menu for the connected

video output, select “Audio In” and select

the jack to use for audio input.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

En 102

APPENDIX

Troubleshooting

HDMI™

The audio input

sources cannot be

played in the desired

digital audio signal

format.

The connected component is not

set to output the desired digital

audio signals.

Set the playback component properly

referring to its instruction manual.

—

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio

frequency

equipment.

This unit is too close to other

digital or radio frequency

equipment.

Move this unit further away from such

equipment.

—

Noise/hum noise is

heard.

Incorrect cable connection.

Connect the audio cables properly.

If the problem persists, the cables may be

defective.

—

A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output

If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly

input to this unit, only noise is output.

Connect the playback component to this

unit by digital connection and playback the

DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved,

the problem may results from the playback

component. Consult the manufacturer of the

playback component.

2) When noise is output during playback or

skip operation

Before playing back the DTS-CD, display

the Input menu after selecting the input

source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS.”

—

The volume cannot

be increased, or the

sound is distorted.

The component connected to the

output jacks of this unit is not

turned on.

When the component connected to the

output jacks of this unit is not turned on, the

sound may be distorted, or the volume may

decreased due to the nature of AV receivers.

Turn on all components connected to this

unit.

—

“Max Volume” is set to a low

value.

Set it to a higher value. 81

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The front panel

display HDMI

indicator is flashing.

An error with the HDMI

connection has occurred.

Try re-inserting the HDMI cable. —

Confirm that HDMI video that is not

supported by the unit is not being input

(Information menu → “Video

information”).

No picture or sound. The number of components is over

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI components. —

The connected HDMI component

does not support high-bandwidth

digital copyright protection

(HDCP).

Connect an HDMI component that supports

HDCP.

—

(When using HDMI

Control function)

TV sound is not

output from this unit

when operating the

remote control of the

TV.

The TV audio output is not

connected to this unit, or the

setting to match operations carried

out on TV is not set.

Connect the TV audio output to this unit,

and then select the connected input source

in “TV Audio Input” (Setup menu → HDMI

→ TV Audio Input).

(When using Audio Return

Channel function)

The Audio Return Channel

function is not working.

Make sure that your TV supports Audio

Return Channel.

Set the Audio Return Channel function to

on (Setup menu → HDMI → ARC (Audio

Return Channel)).

En 103

APPENDIX

Troubleshooting

Tuner (FM/AM)

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception

is noisy.

You are too far from the station

transmitter, or the input from the

antenna is weak.

Check the antenna connections. 32

Switch to monaural mode. 56

Replace the outdoor antenna with a more

sensitive multi-element antenna.

—

There is distortion,

and clear reception

cannot be obtained

even with a good FM

antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or

place it in a different location.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

You are in an area far from a

station, or input from the antenna

is weak.

Replace the outdoor antenna with a more

sensitive multi element antenna.

—

Use TUNING H / I to manually select the

station.

“No Presets” is

displayed.

No preset stations are registered. Register stations you want to listen to as

preset stations before operation.

“Wrong Station” is

displayed.

An invalid FM/AM frequency has

been input.

Input a frequency that can be received. —

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak, or the antenna

connections are loose.

Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 32

Use the manual tuning method. 54

Automatic station

preset does not

work.

Automatic station preset is not

available for AM stations.

Use manual station preset. 54

Continuous

crackling and

hissing noises are

heard.

The supplied AM loop antenna is

not connected.

Connect the AM loop antenna correctly

even if you use an outdoor antenna.

The noises may be caused by

lightning, fluorescent lamps,

motors, thermostats, or other

electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise,

but it can be reduced by installing and

properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.

Buzzing and whining

noises are heard.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. —

En 104

APPENDIX

Troubleshooting

iPod™/iPhone™ Bluetooth™

Display Cause Remedy

See

page

Loading... The unit is in the process of

recognizing the connection with

your iPod/iPhone.

—

The unit is in the middle of

acquiring song lists from your

iPod/iPhone.

—

Connect error There is a problem with the signal

path from your iPod/iPhone to the

unit.

Turn off the unit and reconnect the Yamaha

iPod universal dock to the DOCK jack of

the unit.

Remove your iPod/iPhone from the Yamaha

iPod universal dock and then place it back in

the dock.

Unknown iPod The iPod/iPhone being used is not

supported by the unit.

Connect an iPod/iPhone supported by the

unit.

—

iPod connected Your iPod/iPhone is properly

placed in the Yamaha iPod

universal dock.

—

Your iPod/iPhone is properly

placed in the Yamaha iPod

wireless transmitter and connected

with this unit via wireless

transmission.

Disconnected Your iPod/iPhone is removed from

the Yamaha iPod universal dock.

—

Your iPod/iPhone is disconnected

with this unit via wireless

transmission.

—

Unable to play The unit cannot playback the

songs currently stored on your

iPod/iPhone.

Check that songs are currently stored on

your iPod/iPhone.

—

Display Cause Remedy

See

page

Searching... The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless

audio receiver and the Bluetooth

component are in the process of

pairing.

—

The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless

audio receiver and the Bluetooth

component are in the process of

establishing a connection.

—

Completed The pairing is completed. —

Canceled The pairing is canceled. —

BT connected The connection between the

Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver and the Bluetooth

component is established.

—

Disconnected The Bluetooth component is

disconnected from the Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.

—

Not found The Bluetooth component is not

found.

During pairing:

– pairing must be performed on the

Bluetooth component and this unit

simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth

component is in pairing mode.

During connecting:

– check if the Bluetooth component is

turned on.

– check if the Bluetooth component is

within 10 m of the Yamaha Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver.

—

Pairing may not have been

achieved.

Try pairing again. 63

En 105

APPENDIX

Troubleshooting

Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m, and no more than

30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.

—

Direct sunlight or lighting (from

an inverter type of fluorescent

lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking

the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this

unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 7

The remote control ID of the

remote control and this unit do not

match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit and

the remote control.

External components

cannot be controlled

using the remote

control.

The remote control code is not

correctly set.

Set the remote control code correctly using

“Remote control code search” on the CD-

ROM.

—

Try setting another code for the same

manufacturer using “Remote control code

search” on the CD-ROM.

—

If this unit does not work when you press

Cursor B / C / D / E, do the following.

When the key does not work during DVD

disc menu operation: press the Input

selector again.

When there is no response with remote

control operation of the OPTION menu/

Setup menu: press SOURCE/RECEIVER

(it should glow orange) and try operating the

remote control again.

—

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some

models that do not respond to the

remote control.

—

APPENDIX

En 106

Audio information

Audio and video synchronization (Lipsync)

Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that

involves both a problem, and the capability of maintaining audio and video

signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.

Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user

adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video

syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization

automatically and accurately without user interaction.

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One

amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the

other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this

arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This

restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each

amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely

independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and

center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range

audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects,

referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-

channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the

surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic

range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5

full-range channels, and the precise sound orientation generated using

digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement

and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a

5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers

of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete

5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel,

and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel

for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available:

“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and

“Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel

playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes

available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie

sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce

realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo),

a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special

sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a

narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all

video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts.

The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal

processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel

to enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for

high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an

optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound

that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition

home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby

TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio

simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of

Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel

sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS

decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical

48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers

sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-

channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and

motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of

movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining

popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a

home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural

spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system

produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left,

right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as

a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES

decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back

channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.

DTS Express

This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray

discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the

case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling

you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while

playing the main program.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc.

Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology

delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering

a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz

audio simultaneously.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital

Surround.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed

for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an

optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound

that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition

home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master

Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio

simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the

optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD

Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel

audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.

Glossary

APPENDIX

Glossary

En 107

DSD

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital

storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as

single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while

noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common

occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high

sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the

PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or

higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can

transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack.

LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency

range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only

enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by

the other 5-channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems.

Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback

by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels

with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are

two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode”

for movie sources.

PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is

digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is

used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses

a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of

time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded

as pulses and then modulated for recording.

Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is

sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of

accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the

number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is

determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of

quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider

the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number

of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced.

Sound program information

CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for

use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many

speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as

room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so

widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard.

Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses

Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby

Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie

theater in the listening room of your own home.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your

listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in compression

artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss

of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-

frequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound

system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for

headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be

enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you

to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers, by

using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual

CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a

center speaker.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the

height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D feature achieves the

reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates

the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.

Video information

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into

the Y signal for luminance and the P

B and PR signals for chrominance.

Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of

these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color

difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color

signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output

component signals.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the

three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and

synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component

transmits these three elements combined.

Deep Color

Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the

24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit

depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to

billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal

transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast

ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and

white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the number of available colors

within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry

supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an

interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and

audio/video monitors (such as digital televisions), HDMI supports

standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital

audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and

supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate

future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the

security requirements of content providers and system operators. For

further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://

www.hdmi.org/.”

APPENDIX

Glossary

En 108

“x.v.Color”

A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more

extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that

were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color

gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can

thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still

pictures and computer graphics.

Video conversion

Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is performed according to resolution of video signals as shown below. Analog-to-analog video conversion is also possible when “Analog to Analog Conversion” is

set to “On” (☞

p. 82).

✓: available conversion

HDMI output COMPONENT VIDEO output VIDEO output

Resolution 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/576i

HDMI input

480i/576i ✓✓✓✓✓

480p/576p ✓✓✓✓

720p ✓

1080i ✓

1080p ✓

COMPONENT

VIDEO input

480i/576i ✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓

480p/576p ✓✓✓✓ ✓

720p ✓ ✓

1080i ✓ ✓

VIDEO input 480i/576i ✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓

APPENDIX

En 109

■ HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can playback the audio

sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the digital audio input (optical or coaxial) connections.

• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.

Video signals

This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:

5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents

issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD

iPod™, iPhone™

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “iPhone” is a trademark

of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth™

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a

license agreement.

“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered

trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

Information on HDMI™

Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD,

etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.

Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio, DTS Express

Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.

NOTES

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output,

depending on the type of the DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.

• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.

To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the

component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the

component).

• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents

downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio

commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content.

– 480i/60 Hz

– 576i/50 Hz

– 480p/60 Hz

– 576p/50 Hz

– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

About trademarks

APPENDIX

En 110

■ Input jacks

• Analog audio

[Canada model]

Audio x 5 (AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, V-AUX)

MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8ch Input)

[Australia model]

Audio x 6 (PHONO, AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, V-AUX)

MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8ch Input)

• Digital audio

Optical x 2 (AV1, AV4)

Coaxial x 2 (AV2, AV3)

•Video

Composite x 5 (AV3, AV4, AV5, AV6, V-AUX)

Component x 2 (AV1, AV2)

• HDMI input

HDMI (Front Panel) x 1 (V-AUX)

HDMI (Rear Panel) x 5 (HDMI 1-5)

•Other

DOCK x 1 (AUDIO, VIDEO [Composite])

■ Output jacks

• Analog Audio

Speaker out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R

, EXTRA SP L/R

)

*1 Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

*2 Note: assignment is possible. [ZONE2, PRESENCE]

Pre Out x 7 [FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R]

Subwoofer out x 2 (MONO, SUBWOOFER)

AV O U T x 1

AUDIO OUT x 1

ZONE2 OUT x 1

•Video

MONITOR OUT

- Component x 1

- Composite x 1

AV O U T

- Composite x 1

• HDMI Output

HDMI OUT x 1

■ Remote jacks

•REMOTE IN x 1

• REMOTE OUT x 1

• TRIGGER OUT x 1

■ HDMI

• HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lips Sync,

ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

- VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

• Analog up Conversion

- 480i/60 Hz (NTSC)

- 576i/50 Hz (PAL)

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• Up-Scaling

- 480i → 480p/720p/1080i/1080p

- 480p → 720p/1080i/1080p

- 576i → 576p/720p/1080i/1080p

- 576p → 720p/1080i/1080p

•Audio Format

- Dolby Digital

- DTS

- DSD 6ch

- Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby TrueHD

- DTS-HD

- PCM 2ch-8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

■ TUNER

• Analog Tuner

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

■ Compatible Decoding Formats

• Decoding Format

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS Express

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

• Post Decoding Format

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic II Game

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

■ AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround

(1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω)

FRONT L/R ............................................................... 105 W+105 W

CENTER.................................................................................105 W

SURROUND L/R ...................................................... 105 W+105 W

SURROUND BACK L/R .......................................... 105 W+105 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω ...................................125/160/190/230 W

• Dynamic Headroom [Canada model]

8 Ω ........................................................................................ 1.43 dB

Specifications

APPENDIX

En 111

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

[Canada model]

AV5, etc. ....................................................................200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH IN ...........................................................200 mV/47 kΩ

[Australia model]

PHONO ......................................................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ

AV5, etc. ....................................................................200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH IN ...........................................................200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Voltage

[Canada model]

AV5, etc. (1 kHz 0.5% THD) ..................................... 2.3 V or more

[Australia model]

PHONO (1 kHz 0.1% THD) .................................... 60 mV or more

AV5, etc. (1 kHz 0.5% THD) ..................................... 2.3 V or more

• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance

AUDIO OUT ............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ

PRE OUT......................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo & Front: Small)................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE2 OUT ............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ..................................100 mV/560 Ω

• Frequency Response

AV5 to FRONT..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/-3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

[Canada model]

AV5, etc. to FRONT (PURE DIRECT)

(20-20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................................ 0.06% or less

[Australia model]

PHONO (20-20 kHz, 1V)............................................ 0.02% or less

AV5, etc. to FRONT (PURE DIRECT)

(20-20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................................ 0.06% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

[Canada model]

AV5, etc. (PURE DIRECT). Input Shorted

(250 mV to Front Speakers)...................................100 dB or more

[Australia model]

PHONO Input Shorted (5 mV to Front Speakers)......81 dB or more

AV5, etc. (PURE DIRECT). Input Shorted

(250 mV to Front Speakers)...................................100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front Speakers ............................................................150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

[Canada model]

AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shorted) .............................. 60 dB/45 dB or more

[Australia model]

PHONO Input shorted..................................... 60 dB/55 dB or more

AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shorted) .............................. 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Volume Control.......................................MUTE / -80 dB to +16.5 dB

• Tone Control (Front Speakers)

Bass Boost/Cut .............................................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB at 50 Hz

Bass Turnover Frequency.......................................................350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut ......................................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB at 20 kHz

Treble Turnover Frequency ...................................................3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back) .............12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ............................................................24 dB/oct.

■ VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type

[Canada model] ....................................................................... NTSC

[Australia model] ....................................................................... PAL

• Video Conversion...............................................................NTSC/PAL

• Signal Level

Composite ..................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Component ...................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (P

B/PR)

• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) .......1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................... 50 dB or more

• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]

Component (Video Conversion Off) ............ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB

■ FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[Canada model] ................................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Australia model] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

Mono ...................................................................... 3.0 µV (20.8 dB)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo..................................................................74 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo........................................................................0.3/0.3%

• Antenna Input (unbalanced)......................................................... 75 Ω

■ AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[Canada model]....................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz

[Australia model] ....................................................531 to 1611 kHz

■ GENERAL

• Power Supply

[Canada model]...................................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ................................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

• Power Consumption

[Canada model]..........................................................400 W/500 VA

[Australia model] ....................................................................400 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control off / Standby Through off ....................0.2 W or less

HDMI Control on/ Standby Through on

(Input: HDMI1, when no HDMI signal is input) ... 2.7 W (typical)

• Dimensions (W x H x D)

435 x 151 x 364 mm

• Weight

10.5 kg

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

APPENDIX

En 112

Numerics

5 channel speaker layout.............................................................. 15

5.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 15

7.1-channel speaker connection ................................................... 17

7.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 14

Adaptive DRC, OPTION menu ................................................... 51

Advanced Setup menu ................................................................. 92

AM antenna connection ............................................................... 32

AM tuning .................................................................................... 54

Analog to Analog Conversion, Video Setup................................ 82

ARC (Audio Return Channel), HDMI Setup............................... 84

Aspect, Processing, Video Setup ................................................. 83

Audio In, Input menu................................................................... 67

Audio information, Information menu......................................... 88

AUDIO jack ................................................................................. 21

Audio Output, HDMI Setup......................................................... 85

Audio Return Channel function ................................................... 97

Auto Power Down, Function Setup ............................................. 86

Auto Preset................................................................................... 57

Auto Setup, Speaker Setup .......................................................... 77

BD player connection .................................................................. 25

Bi-amp connection, speaker......................................................... 18

Bluetooth™ component playback................................................ 63

Cable plug .................................................................................... 21

Center Image, Sound Program menu ........................................... 75

Center Level, Sound Program menu............................................ 74

Center speaker.............................................................................. 13

Center Width, Sound Program menu ........................................... 75

Changing speaker impedance ...................................................... 18

CINEMA DSP 3D mode.............................................................. 43

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, OPTION menu................................... 51

CINEMA DSP indicator .............................................................. 10

Clear All Preset ........................................................................... 57

Clear Preset ................................................................................. 57

COAXIAL jack ........................................................................... 21

COMPONENT VIDEO jack....................................................... 21

Compressed Music Enhancer mode ............................................ 44

Configuration, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ............................. 78

Connect, OPTION menu ............................................................. 52

Connecting speakers.................................................................... 17

Connections................................................................................. 13

Content browse view................................................................... 53

Content window .......................................................................... 53

Cursor indicators ......................................................................... 10

Decode Type, Sound Program menu .................................... 74, 75

Decoder Mode, Input menu......................................................... 67

Dialogue Lift, OPTION menu..................................................... 51

Dimension, Sound Program menu .............................................. 75

Direct, Sound Program menu...................................................... 74

Disconnect, OPTION menu ........................................................ 52

Display Set, Function Setup ........................................................ 86

Distance, Speaker Setup.............................................................. 79

DSP Level, Sound Program menu .............................................. 72

DVD player connection............................................................... 25

Dynamic Range, Sound Setup..................................................... 81

Enhancer, Input menu ................................................................. 67

Extended Surround, OPTION menu ........................................... 51

External component connection.................................................. 21

External decoder connection....................................................... 29

FM antenna connection ............................................................... 32

FM Mode..................................................................................... 56

FM tuning.................................................................................... 54

Front panel .................................................................................... 8

Front panel display ...................................................................... 10

Front Presence L Level, Sound Program menu........................... 74

Front Presence R Level, Sound Program menu .......................... 75

Front speaker ............................................................................... 13

Function Setup............................................................................. 86

Game connection......................................................................... 29

HDMI Control function............................................................... 95

HDMI Control, HDMI Setup ...................................................... 84

HDMI indicator ........................................................................... 10

HDMI jack................................................................................... 21

HDMI monitor, Information menu.............................................. 88

HDMI Setup ................................................................................ 83

High-frequency sound adjustment............................................... 40

Information menu ........................................................................ 88

INIT, Advanced Setup menu....................................................... 94

Initial Delay, Sound Program menu ............................................ 72

Initial Volume, Sound Setup ....................................................... 82

Input menu................................................................................... 65

iPhone™ playback ...................................................................... 58

iPod Interlock, Input menu.......................................................... 68

iPod wireless system ................................................................... 61

iPod™ playback .......................................................................... 58

Jack.............................................................................................. 21

Language ..................................................................................... 87

Level, Speaker Setup................................................................... 79

Lipsync, Sound Setup.................................................................. 81

Liveness, Sound Program menu.................................................. 73

Load, SCENE menu .................................................................... 70

Index

APPENDIX

Index

En 113

Low-frequency sound adjustment................................................ 40

Manual Preset............................................................................... 54

Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ...................................................... 77

Manual Tuning............................................................................. 56

Max Volume, Sound Setup .......................................................... 81

Memory Guard, Function Setup .................................................. 87

Menu browse control ................................................................... 59

MON.CHK, Advanced Setup menu............................................. 93

Multi information display ............................................................ 10

Multi Zone ................................................................................... 85

Multi-format player connection ................................................... 29

Multi-zone function ..................................................................... 98

MUTE indicator ........................................................................... 10

Normal tuning .............................................................................. 54

Now playing view ........................................................................ 53

ON SCREEN menu...................................................................... 47

On-Screen display ........................................................................ 12

OPTICAL jack ............................................................................. 21

OPTION menu ............................................................................. 49

Pairing, OPTION menu ............................................................... 52

Panorama, Sound Program menu................................................. 75

Parametric EQ, Speaker Setup ..................................................... 80

PHONES jack ................................................................................ 8

Portable audio player connection................................................. 29

Power Amp Assign, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup..................... 77

PREOUT connection ................................................................... 30

Presence speaker .......................................................................... 13

Presence speaker layout ............................................................... 14

Preset Select ................................................................................. 56

Pure Direct mode ......................................................................... 44

Rear panel...................................................................................... 9

Remote control ............................................................................ 11

Remote control battery installation ............................................... 7

Remote control connection ......................................................... 30

Remote control, Controlling other components.......................... 89

REMOTE ID, Advanced Setup menu......................................... 93

Rename/Icon Select, Input menu ................................................ 66

Rename/Icon Select, SCENE menu ............................................ 70

Repeat, OPTION menu ............................................................... 52

Reset, SCENE menu ................................................................... 70

Resolution, Processing, Video Setup .......................................... 83

Reverb Delay, Sound Program menu.......................................... 73

Reverb Level, Sound Program menu .......................................... 74

Reverb Time, Sound Program menu........................................... 73

Room Size, Sound Program menu .............................................. 72

Save, SCENE menu .................................................................... 70

SCENE function.......................................................................... 41

SCENE menu .............................................................................. 69

Setup menu.................................................................................. 76

Shuffle, OPTION menu .............................................................. 52

SILENT CINEMA mode ............................................................ 43

Simple remote control ................................................................. 61

Sound program ............................................................................ 41

Sound Program menu.................................................................. 71

Sound Setup ................................................................................ 81

SP IMP., Advanced Setup menu ................................................. 92

Speaker connection ..................................................................... 13

Speaker indicators ....................................................................... 10

Speaker layout............................................................................. 14

Speaker setting ............................................................................ 33

Speaker Setup.............................................................................. 77

Standby Charge, Input menu....................................................... 67

Standby Through, HDMI Setup .................................................. 85

Straight Decoding Mode ............................................................. 42

Subwoofer ................................................................................... 13

Supplied accessories...................................................................... 7

Surround Back Initial Delay, Sound Program menu................... 72

Surround Back L Level, Sound Program menu .......................... 74

Surround Back Liveness, Sound Program menu......................... 73

Surround Back R Level, Sound Program menu .......................... 74

Surround Back Room Size, Sound Program menu ..................... 72

Surround back speaker ................................................................ 13

Surround Initial Delay, Sound Program menu ............................ 72

Surround L Level, Sound Program menu.................................... 74

Surround Liveness, Sound Program menu............................ 72, 73

Surround R Level, Sound Program menu ................................... 74

Surround speaker.........................................................................

Test Tone, Speaker Setup............................................................ 80

Tone control ................................................................................ 40

Tone Control, OPTION menu ..................................................... 50

Trigger connection ...................................................................... 31

Trigger Output, Function Setup................................................... 87

Tuner indicator ............................................................................ 10

TV Audio Input, HDMI Setup .................................................... 84

TV FORMAT, Advanced Setup menu........................................ 93

TV monitor connection ............................................................... 22

VIDEO AUX input cover.............................................................. 7

Video information, Information menu ........................................ 88

VIDEO jack................................................................................. 21

Video Out, Input menu................................................................ 68

Video Setup ................................................................................. 82

Virtual CINEMA DSP 3D mode................................................. 43

Virtual CINEMA DSP mode....................................................... 43

VOLUME...................................................................................... 8

VOLUME indicator..................................................................... 10

Volume Trim, OPTION menu..................................................... 52

YPAO .......................................................................................... 33

Zone2 Set, Multi Zone................................................................. 85

YC514A0/OMEN1

Transcripción de documentos

Owner’s Manual AV Receiver English for Canada CONTENTS INTRODUCTION Connecting the FM/AM antennas .................................. 32 Features and capabilities ................................................... 4 Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO).............................................................................. 33 Using the TV OSD to operate the unit ............................. 5 View or modify content for the current input source <Content window> ........................................................... 5 Configuring settings for this unit <ON SCREEN menu>...................................................... 5 Adjust settings for each input source <OPTION menu> ............................................................. 6 About this manual............................................................. 7 Supplied accessories......................................................... 7 Part names and functions.................................................. 8 Front panel........................................................................ 8 Rear panel......................................................................... 9 Front panel display ......................................................... 10 Remote control ............................................................... 11 On-screen display ........................................................... 12 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers ........................................................ 13 Speaker channels and functions...................................... 13 Speaker layout ................................................................ 14 Connecting speakers and subwoofer .............................. 17 Connecting external components.................................... 21 Cable plugs and jacks ..................................................... 21 Connecting a TV monitor............................................... 22 Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices ............ 25 Connecting game consoles ............................................. 29 Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder .................................................... 29 Connecting an external amplifier ................................... 30 Connecting a SCENE link playback-compatible device ........................................... 30 Using the Trigger function to link external component power.............................................. 31 Connecting audio/video recording devices..................... 31 PLAYBACK Basic playback procedure ............................................... 40 Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control) ..... 40 Playing back iPod™/iPhone™ with wireless connection................................................ 61 Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components ...... 63 Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver................................................... 63 Pairing Bluetooth™ components ................................... 63 Using Bluetooth™ components ..................................... 64 Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function) ............................................................ 41 Registering input sources/sound program ...................... 41 Enjoying the desired sound field effect .......................... 41 Selecting sound programs and sound decoders.............. 41 Sound programs.............................................................. 45 Configuring the settings of this unit while viewing the TV screen ........................................... 47 Basic operations via the TV screen display ................... 47 Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu)................. 49 OPTION menu display and setup................................... 49 OPTION menu ............................................................... 50 Confirming and operating input sources from the Content window ............................................... 53 Displaying the Content window on the TV screen......... 53 Switching the display between the Now playing view and the Content browse view ......................................... 53 FM/AM tuning ................................................................. 54 Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning)..... 54 Confirming and operating the FM/AM tuner from the Content window............................................... 56 Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ........... 58 Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock ................. 58 Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™ .................................... 58 Playing iPod/iPhone from the menu screen (Menu browse control) ................................................... 59 Operating basic playback functions via the remote control (Simple remote control) ............. 61 En 2 SETUP Configuring input sources (Input menu) ....................... 65 Configuring input sources .............................................. 65 Input menu...................................................................... 66 Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu) ............... 69 Editing a scene................................................................ 69 SCENE menu.................................................................. 70 Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu) ................................................... 71 Editing sound programs.................................................. 71 CINEMA DSP parameters ............................................. 72 Parameters usable in certain sound programs ................ 74 Parameters usable in surround decoder .......................... 75 Setting various functions (Setup menu) ......................... 76 Operating the Setup menu .............................................. 76 Setup menu ..................................................................... 77 Manages settings for speakers ........................................ 77 Setting the audio output function of this unit ................. 81 Setting this unit’s video output function......................... 82 Setting HDMI functions ................................................. 83 Setting this unit’s multi-zone function ........................... 85 Making the receiver easier to use ................................... 86 Language ........................................................................ 87 Confirming information of this unit (Information menu) ......................................................... 88 Selecting information ..................................................... 88 Controlling other components with the remote control.................................................... 89 Keys connecting external components ........................... 89 Default remote control code settings.............................. 90 Registering remote control codes for external component operations ................................. 90 Resetting all remote control codes ................................. 91 Avoiding crossing remote control signals when using multiple Yamaha receivers .......................... 93 Changing TV format ...................................................... 93 Removing HDMI video output up-scaling limits........... 93 Initializing various settings for this unit......................... 94 Using the HDMI Control function ................................. 95 Using multi-zone configuration ...................................... 98 Connecting Zone2 .......................................................... 98 Controlling Zone2 .......................................................... 99 APPENDIX Troubleshooting ............................................................. 100 General ......................................................................... 100 HDMI™ ....................................................................... 102 Tuner (FM/AM) ........................................................... 103 iPod™/iPhone™ .......................................................... 104 Bluetooth™ .................................................................. 104 Remote control ............................................................. 105 Glossary .......................................................................... 106 Audio information ........................................................ 106 Sound program information ......................................... 107 Video information ........................................................ 107 Video conversion .......................................................... 108 Information on HDMI™ ............................................... 109 About trademarks.......................................................... 109 Specifications.................................................................. 110 Index ............................................................................... 112 Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)................................. 92 Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu ............... 92 Setting the impedance of speakers ................................. 92 En 3 INTRODUCTION Features and capabilities ■ Built-in high-quality, high-power 7-channel amplifier ■ 6 HDMI input jacks (5 + 1 VIDEO AUX) supporting Audio Return Channel and 3D video signal ■ 1-button input/sound program switching (SCENE function)................................41 ■ Speaker connections for 2- to 7.1-channel configurations – – – – – – Speaker impedance configuration............................................................................................................18 Speaker channels and functions ...............................................................................................................13 Speaker layout..........................................................................................................................................14 Speaker cable connection.........................................................................................................................17 Subwoofer cable connection ....................................................................................................................20 High quality playback using bi-amplification connections .....................................................................18 ■ Automatic settings for speaker acoustic parameters (YPAO - Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) ......................................33 ■ External component connection (max. 16 inputs) and playback – – – – – – – External component connection...............................................................................................................21 Protective cover for front panel jacks ........................................................................................................7 Configuring the settings specific for each input source <OPTION menu>.............................................49 Playback from external components........................................................................................................40 Playback from an iPod/iPhone with wired connection ............................................................................58 Playback from an iPod/iPhone with wireless connection ........................................................................61 Playback from a Bluetooth component (Bluetooth and components sold separately) ............................63 ■ Volume adjustment functions – Easy listening at low volumes <Adaptive DRC> ....................................................................................51 – Adjusting volume between input sources <Volume Trim> .....................................................................52 ■ Remote control operation – External component operation with this unit’s remote control................................................................89 ■ Playing back the audio source in another room – – – – Using the internal amplifier for playback ................................................................................................18 Using the external amplifier for playback ...............................................................................................98 Configuring the settings for another room...............................................................................................98 Controlling the external component in another room ..............................................................................99 ■ Other features – Standby mode after a specific amount of time <Sleep timer>.................................................................11 – Charging the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode <iPod Standby Charge> ..........................67 Most of this unit’s functions can be operated by following instructions displayed on the TV screen. Refer to “Using the TV OSD to operate the unit” on the following pages for information on functions that can be controlled using the on-screen display. ■ FM/AM tuner – – – – Receiving an FM/AM broadcast ..............................................................................................................54 Presetting stations ....................................................................................................................................54 Simple preset tuning ................................................................................................................................54 Changing FM mode (Stereo/Mono).........................................................................................................56 ■ Multi-channel, multi-format playback – – – – Sound field effect selection......................................................................................................................41 Playback without sound field effects .......................................................................................................42 Stereo playback........................................................................................................................................42 Compressed-music playback ...................................................................................................................44 ■ Front panel information display/on-screen display (OSD) on the TV screen – Switching information on the front panel display ...................................................................................10 – Operating this unit using the on-screen display.......................................................................................12 En 4 INTRODUCTION Using the TV OSD to operate the unit This unit features a sophisticated on-screen display (OSD) for the TV screen. The OSD is designed to enable visual guidance that simplifies operations. The OSD mainly displays the ON SCREEN and OPTION menus, as well as the Content window that displays the content of current input sources. ■ Select an input source, SCENE and sound program – Select an input source ..............................................................................................................................47 – Select a SCENE .......................................................................................................................................48 – Select a sound program............................................................................................................................48 ■ Select and configure a SCENE – Select a SCENE .......................................................................................................................................48 – Register or clear settings for a selected SCENE <Save>, <Reset> .........................................................70 – Turn on a Yamaha BD/DVD player or CD player connected to this unit automatically when a SCENE is selected <SCENE IR>................................................................................................70 View or modify content for the current input source <Content window> ■ Select and adjust a sound program (sound program) ■ Operate the AM/FM tuner ■ Display settings information for this unit – Display a list of preset stations for selection ...........................................................................................57 – Display information on the station currently received.............................................................................56 – Perform operations such as searching for and registering stations using the Utility <Utility> ...............56 ■ Display the list of iPod music sources – Display the list of iPod music sources for selection ................................................................................59 – Perform operations such as play, stop and pause using the TV screen <Menu browse control> ............59 – Perform basic playback functions such as play, stop and pause via the remote control <Simple remote control> .....................................................................................61 Configuring settings for this unit <ON SCREEN menu> – Display the ON SCREEN menu on the TV screen..................................................................................47 ■ Select and configure an input source – – – – – – – Select an input source ..............................................................................................................................47 Play the audio/video signal from the selected input source.....................................................................40 Change the input source name <Rename/Icon Select> ...........................................................................66 Select the audio input jack separately from the video input jack <Audio In>.........................................67 Specify a format for digital audio signals <Decoder Mode>...................................................................67 Enhance the sound of compressed audio <Enhancer>.............................................................................67 Output a video signal input from another input source while playing a multi-channel audio signal <Video Out> .......................................................................68 – Charge the iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode <Standby Charge>......................................67 – Select a sound program............................................................................................................................48 – Adjust sound program parameters ...........................................................................................................71 – Display audio signal information <Audio Signal>..................................................................................88 – Display video signal information <Video Signal> ..................................................................................88 – Display HDMI signal information <HDMI - Monitor Info.>..................................................................88 ■ Adjust acoustic parameters to match your speakers and listening environment – Specify speaker acoustic parameters automatically (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer - YPAO).......................................................................33 – Set up this unit’s speaker configuration simply <Power Amp Assign> ..................................................77 – Specify settings for each speaker <Configuration> .................................................................................78 – Control volume control for each speaker <Level> ..................................................................................79 – Apply speaker distance settings <Distance> ...........................................................................................79 – Control equalizer sound quality <Parametric EQ>..................................................................................80 – Adjust test tone speaker <Test Tone> ......................................................................................................80 ■ Adjust audio signals output from this unit – – – – – Correct lag between audio and video signals <Lipsync> ........................................................................81 Select a dynamic range adjustment method <Dynamic Range> .............................................................81 Specify the maximum volume <Max Volume> .......................................................................................81 Specify the initial volume <Initial Volume>............................................................................................82 Adjust DSP effect and volume level <Adaptive DSP Level>..................................................................82 ■ Adjust video signals output from this unit – Convert analog video signal to another type of signal <Analog to Analog Conversion> .......................82 – Specify the resolution and aspect ratio of analog video signal converted to HDMI or specify upscaling resolution for 480i/576i- or 480p/576p-HDMI output signal <Processing> ...........................................83 En 5 INTRODUCTION Using the TV OSD to operate the unit ■ HDMI settings – – – – Assign the audio input source for the TV <TV Audio Input>.................................................................84 Listen to TV audio with HDMI cable connection <ARC (Audio Return Channel)>..............................84 Transmit HDMI audio/video to the TV during standby mode <Standby Through> ...............................85 Change the output destination of HDMI input audio signals <Audio Output>.......................................85 ■ Enable listening in multiple rooms (multi-zone function) – Adjust Zone2 volume <Zone2 Set>.........................................................................................................85 ■ Specify other functions for this unit – – – – Enter standby mode automatically when no operations are performed <Auto Power Down>................86 Adjust the brightness of the front panel display <Dimmer> ...................................................................86 Change the wall paper displayed on the TV screen <Wall Paper>..........................................................86 Specify the function of the TRIGGER OUT jack for controlling external components <Trigger Output> .....................................................................................................................................87 – Prohibit changes to settings <Memory Guard> .......................................................................................87 ■ Select a language – Change the language displayed on the TV screen <Language> ..............................................................87 Adjust settings for each input source <OPTION menu> – – – – – – Display the OPTION menu on the TV screen .........................................................................................49 Select the 5.1-channel signal playback method <Extended Surround>...................................................51 Adjust bass and treble levels <Tone Control> .........................................................................................50 Enable low-volume background music <Adaptive DRC>.......................................................................51 Adjust the volume of input sources <Volume Trim>...............................................................................52 Adjust the vertical position of dialogues <Dialogue Lift> ......................................................................51 En 6 INTRODUCTION Using the TV OSD to operate the unit About this manual • Some features are not available in certain regions. • This manual is created prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “dHDMI1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the remote control. Refer to the “Remote control” (☞p. 11) for the information about each position of the parts. • J1 indicates that the reference is in the footnote. Refer to the corresponding numbers on the bottom of the page. • ☞ indicates the page describing the related information. • Click on the “ ” at the bottom of the page to display the corresponding page in “Part names and functions.” Front panel Rear panel Front panel display Remote control Supplied accessories ■ Attaching the VIDEO AUX input cover (supplied) ■ Installing batteries in the remote control To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover to the VIDEO AUX jacks when you do not use the jacks. To remove the cover, push the left section of it. When inserting batteries in the remote control, remove the battery compartment cover from the reverse side of the remote control, and insert two AAA batteries into the battery compartment so that they match with the polarity markings (+ and -). a Battery compartment cover b Attach the cover Battery compartment Replace the batteries with new ones if the remote control can only be operated within a narrow range. NOTE PUSH Check that you received all of the following parts. • • • • • • Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) x 2 YPAO microphone AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna VIDEO AUX input cover c Remove the cover If there are remote control codes for external components registered to the remote control, removing the batteries for more than 2 minutes, or leaving exhausted batteries in the remote control, may clear the remote control codes. If this should occur, replace the batteries with new ones, and set the remote control codes. En 7 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions e ZONE CONTROL Front panel a MAIN ZONE A (MAIN ZONE Power) b c d Switches this unit between on and standby mode. HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator Lights up in any of the following cases while the unit is in standby mode. • When the Standby Through function is enabled and audio/video from an external component connected with HDMI is output to a TV during standby mode (☞p. 85). • When an iPod/iPhone, which is placed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock, is charging while the unit is in standby mode (☞p. 61). This indicator also lights up when the Yamaha iPod wireless receiver is connected to this unit (☞p. 61). YPAO MIC jack Connect the supplied YPAO microphone and adjust the speaker balance automatically (☞p. 33). ZONE2 When this unit is connected to an external amplifier located in another room, this key switches that amplifier between on and standby (☞p. 99). When speakers in another room are connected to this unit, this key switches the built-in amplifier for those speakers on and off (☞p. 99). a b c MAIN ZONE f g h i j k l m n INPUT l / h Switches to Zone2 operation mode. This unit, or its remote control, can be used to select input sources or adjust volume for an external amplifier in another room or the built-in amplifier for speakers in another room (☞p. 99). INFO Changes the information displayed on the front panel display (☞p. 10). MEMORY Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (☞p. 54). J1 PRESET j / i Selects an FM/AM preset station (☞p. 56). J1 FM/AM Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM or AM (☞p. 54). J1 Front panel display Displays information on this unit (☞p. 10). TUNING jj / ii Changes FM/AM tuner frequencies (☞p. 54). J1 PURE DIRECT Switches this unit to Pure Direct mode (☞p. 44). PHONES jack For plugging headphones in. Sound effects applied during playback can also be heard through the headphones. d e f g h i jk o p q r s t Selects an input source from which to playback. Press either the left or right key repeatedly to cycle through the input sources in order. SCENE Switches the input source and the sound program with a single button (☞p. 41). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to switch on. TONE CONTROL Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers/headphones (☞p. 40). PROGRAM l / h Selects a sound program (☞p. 41). Press the left or right key repeatedly to cycle through sound programs. STRAIGHT Changes a sound program to straight decoding mode (☞p. 42). VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting game consoles to this unit temporarily (☞p. 29). Attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when not using this jack (☞p. 7). VOLUME Adjusts the volume level. l PURE DIRECT YPAO MIC ZONE2 ZONE CONTROL INFO MEMORY FM PRESET AM TUNING VOLUME SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO SILENT CINEMA m VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT HDMI IN n o p q r VIDEO s L AUDIO R t J 1 : Usable when you have selected TUNER input. En 8 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions Rear panel e REMOTE IN/OUT jacks a DOCK jack f b c d For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-12), iPod wireless receiver (YID-W10), or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (☞p. 58, p. 61, p. 63). HDMI OUT jack For connecting an HDMI - compatible TV to output audio/video signals (☞p. 23). ANTENNA jacks For connecting AM and FM antennas (☞p. 32). MONITOR OUT jacks VIDEO jack COMPONENT VIDEO jacks g h i For connecting a TV capable of receiving video input, and outputting video signals to it (☞p. 23). For connecting TV that are compatible with component video signals, using three cables to output video signal (☞p. 23). a b c j e d k AUDIO1-2 jacks For connecting an external component that supports the remote control function (☞p. 30). HDMI1-5 jacks For connecting external components equipped with HDMIcompatible outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞p. 25). SPEAKERS terminals For connecting the front, center, surround and surround back speakers (☞p. 17). Connect the presence speakers (☞p. 17) or the speakers for Zone2 (☞p. 18) to the EXTRA SP jacks. Power cable For connecting this unit to an AC wall outlet. AV1-6 jacks For connecting to external components equipped with audio/video outputs to receive audio/video signals (☞p. 26). AV OUT jacks For outputting audio/video signals received when analog inputs (AV36 or AUDIO1-2) are selected (☞p. 31). f g SPEAKERS DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 4 CENTER HDMI 5 SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE REMOTE GND AM PR HDMI 3 FRONT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR IN SINGLE OUT 75 PB EXTRA SP PB Y n o p Distinguishing the input and output jacks The area around the audio/video output jacks is marked in white to prevent connection errors. Use these jacks to output audio/video signals to a TV or other external component. ZONE2/ PRESENCE VIDEO VIDEO m h ARC HDMI OUT l For connecting external components equipped with analog audio outputs to input sound into this unit (☞p. 28). TRIGGER OUT jack For connecting an external component that supports the trigger function to operate it linked with operation of this unit (☞p. 31). MULTI CH INPUT jacks For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output (☞p. 29). AUDIO OUT jacks For outputting audio signals received when analog jacks, such as the AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are selected (☞p. 31). ZONE2 OUT jacks Outputs sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a different room. (☞p. 98). PRE OUT terminals For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external power amplifier (☞p. 20, p. 30). +12V 0.1A MAX. Y MONITOR OUT SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SURROUND TRIGGER OUT ARC CENTER SINGLE CENTER (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 COMPONENT VIDEO SINGLE REMOTE GND AM PR IN OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 75 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROUND SUR.BACK MULTI CH INPUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT ZONE2 OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK PRE OUT PB 1 SUBWOOFER 2 VIDEO +12V 0.1A MAX. Y MONITOR OUT FRONT CENTER CENTER OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 4 i j k l m no AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SURROUND TRIGGER OUT SURROUND SUR.BACK MULTI CH INPUT SUBWOOFER SINGLE AUDIO OUT ZONE2 OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK PRE OUT CENTER 1 SUBWOOFER 2 p Output jacks En 9 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions i VOLUME indicator Front panel display a HDMI indicator b c d e f g h ■ Switching information on the front panel display Displays the current volume level. j Cursor indicators Lights up during normal HDMI communication when any of the HDMI1-5 inputs are selected. CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when a sound field effect that uses CINEMA DSP technology is selected. ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on (☞p. 44). CINEMA DSP 3D indicator Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated (☞p. 43). Tuner indicator Light up according to the status of a received station (☞p. 54). SLEEP indicator Lights up when the sleep timer is on (☞p. 11). ZONE2 indicator Lights up when the audio output to Zone2 is enabled (☞p. 99). MUTE indicator Flashes when audio is muted. a k l Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available for operations. Multi information display Displays a range of information on menu items and settings. Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. Subwoofer The front panel can display sound programs and surround decoder names as well as the active input source. Press fINFO repeatedly to cycle through input source J2 → sound program → surround decoder in order. Input source name MOVIE Center speaker SW PL PR C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR Presence speaker L Front speaker L Surround speaker L Surround back speaker L VOL. Standard Presence speaker R Front speaker R SW C L R SL SR SBL SBR Sound program (DSP program) Surround speaker R Surround back speaker R Surround back speaker J1 b c d e ENHANCER STEREO 3 TUNED f gh SLEEP ZONE 2 i VOL. MUTE SW PL PR C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR j k j l J 1 : “SB” is displayed when using a 6.1-channel configuration only. J 2 : During FM/AM reception, the frequency is displayed instead of the input source. En 10 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions a Remote control signal transmitter Remote control Transmits infrared signals. b MAIN/ZONE2 Switches the zone to be operated by the remote control between the Main zone and Zone2 (☞p. 99). a MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET b c HDMI 1 2 3 o p q SOURCE RECEIVER d V-AUX e 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK FM MULTI CH INPUT DOCK AM PRESET f INFO MEMORY g MOVIE MUSIC TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP TUNER Operates the FM/AM tuner. These keys are used when using the tuner input. SCENE j BD DVD TV CD r VOLUME ENTER k RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN RETURN HDMI1-5 jacks Front panel VIDEO AUX jacks AUDIO1-2 jacks AV1-6 jacks Changes the external component to operate with the lExternal component operation keys without changing inputs. J1 MULTI CH INPUT jacks A Yamaha iPod universal dock, iPod wireless receiver, or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK jack. FM/AM tuner e Radio control keys STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT h i Select an input source on this unit from which to playback. [ A ] s DISPLAY POP-UP MENU MUTE REC l t Sets the FM/AM tuner band to FM. Sets the FM/AM tuner band to AM. Presets radio stations. Selects a preset station. Changes tuning frequencies. Cycles the information displayed on the front panel display (the name of the currently selected input source, the sound program, the surround decoder, the FM/AM tuner frequency, etc.). g Sound selection keys m 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Switch between the sound field effect (sound program) you are using and the surround decoder (☞p. 41). Sleep 30min. Sleep 60min. i SCENE Switch the input source and the sound program with a single button (☞p. 41). When this unit is in standby mode, press this key to switch on. j ON SCREEN Turns on and off the ON SCREEN menu. k Cursor B / C / D / E, ENTER, RETURN Cursor B / C / D / E Select menu items and change settings when menus, etc, are displayed. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen when menus are displayed, or close the menu. l External component operation keys Operate recording, playback, and menu displays etc. for external components (☞p. 89). J1 m Numeric keys n TV control keys Operate a monitor such as a TV. o CODE SET Sets remote control codes for external component operations (☞p. 90). p RECEIVER A (RECEIVER Power) Switches this unit between on and standby mode. q SOURCE/RECEIVER Switches remote control key function to operate this unit or an external component (☞p. 89). Operate an external component when this key glows green, or this unit when this key glows orange. Turns on and off the OPTION menu (☞p. 49). s VOLUME +/- INPUT TV VOL Sleep Off Sleep 90min. r OPTION ENT TV n Sleep 120min. Enter numbers. FM AM MEMORY PRESET F / G TUNING H / I f INFO TOP MENU Switches this unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press this key repeatedly to set the time for the sleep timer function. The SLEEP indicator lights up when the sleep timer is on. d Input selector HDMI1-5 V-AUX AUDIO1-2 AV1-6 [A] AV TUNER Switches an external component on and off. 4 AUDIO 5 c SOURCE A (SOURCE Power) h SLEEP Adjust the volume level (☞p. 40). TV CH MUTE t MUTE Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (☞p. 40). J 1 : You can use lExternal component operation keys for each input source to operate registered components. Remote control codes must be registered for each input in advance if you want to operate external components (☞p. 90). En 11 INTRODUCTION Part names and functions ■ Displaying the following menus or viewing the current status of this unit on the TV screen On-screen display When a TV is connected to this unit, the supplied remote control can be used to specify and verify this unit’s settings via menus and options displayed on the TV screen. • ON SCREEN menu Press ON SCREEN to display the ON SCREEN menu. • OPTION menu Press OPTION to display the OPTION menu. • Content window Press Input selector to display the Content window. The following displays are available in the on-screen display. Content window ON SCREEN menu Detailed settings for this unit can be configured. Use this menu to select desired settings, change their values, or check the current status of this unit. Refer to “SETUP” (☞p. 65) for details. Includes the Content browse view and the Now playing view. The Now playing view displays the status of the source from which music is currently played back. Adjust settings for music content from the Content browse view. Refer to “Confirming and operating input sources from the Content window” (☞p. 53) for details. OPTION menu Configure the optional settings for each input source. Settings such as “Tone Control” and “Volume Trim” are applied to this unit regardless of the input source. Refer to “Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu)” (☞p. 49) for details. En 12 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers This unit uses acoustic field effects and sound decoders to bring you the impact of a real movie theater or concert hall. These effects will be brought to you with ideal speaker positioning and connections in your listening environment. Speaker channels and functions ■ Surround left and right speakers ■ Surround back left and right speakers ■ Front left and right speakers The surround speakers are for effect and vocal sounds with the 5.1channel speakers providing rear-area sounds. When used with 6.1/ 7.1-channel (including surround back channel), sound for right and left rear-area is output. Outputs the rear effect. When used with 6.1ch sound, sound from the left and right sound surround back speakers is mixed and output from a single speaker. When used with 5.1ch sound, sound from surround back speakers is distributed between the left and right surround speakers. The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo sound) and effect sounds. Ex. Ex. Front speaker layout: Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position in the front of the room. When using a projector screen, the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the screen from the bottom. ■ Center speaker The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). Ex. Center speaker layout: Place it halfway between the left and right front speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen. Surround speaker layout: Place the speakers at the rear of the room on the left and right sides facing the listening position. They should be placed between 60 degrees and 80 degrees from the listening position and with the speaker tops at a height of 1.5 – 1.8 m from the floor. ■ Presence left and right speakers The presence speakers are used for front effect sounds. When used in combination with the sound programs (☞p. 41), a sound with a richer and more spatial presence is possible. Ex. Surround back speaker layout: When used with 7.1ch sound, arrange the left and right speakers towards the listening position, to the rear of the listening position. Arrange the left and right speakers at least 30 cm apart. The same separation as with the front left and right speakers is optimum. When used with 6.1ch sound, arrange these to the rear of the listening position. ■ Subwoofer The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-frequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS. Use a subwoofer that is equipped with built-in amplifier. Ex. Presence speaker layout: Place the left and right presence speakers 0.5 – 1 m to the outside of the left and right front speakers respectively. The tops of the presence speakers should be 1.8 m above the floor. Ex. Subwoofer speaker layout: Place it to the outside of the front left and right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce echoes from the wall. En 13 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Speaker layout ■ Enjoying the 7.1 channel audio source ■ 7.1-channel speaker layout (7 speakers + subwoofer) Front speaker R Subwoofer Front speaker L Surround speaker R ■ Assigning a speaker configuration ■ Connections of speakers A speaker configuration must be assigned to this unit to activate the speakers. Use the “Power Amp Assign” function to easily apply the appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker configuration. Speakers for this layout can be activated at the default “Power Amp Assign” setting (☞p. 77). Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Presence speaker connection” for details on connecting speakers (☞p. 17). Power Amp Assign ■ Adding the presence speakers for a richer sound field effect ■ Presence speaker layout (7 speakers + subwoofer + presence speakers) Front speaker R Center speaker Front speaker L 30 cm or more Surround speaker L Surround back speaker L Speaker jacks FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER EXTRA SP jack Presence L/R speakers 7ch Normal (Default) Presence speaker L Presence speaker R ■ Assigning a speaker configuration A speaker configuration must be assigned to this unit to activate the speakers. Use the “Power Amp Assign” function to easily apply the appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker configuration. Speakers for this layout can be activated at the default “Power Amp Assign” setting (☞p. 77). Subwoofer Surround speaker R Surround back speaker R Audio from a 7.1-channel audio source can be played back with no degradation with this speaker configuration. Power Amp Assign 7ch Normal (Default) Continues to the next page ■ Connections of speakers Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Presence speaker connection” for details on connecting speakers (☞p. 17). Speaker jacks FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER EXTRA SP jack No used Center speaker Surround speaker L Surround back speaker L 30 cm or more Surround back speaker R This unit automatically selects the presence speakers or surround back speakers to output sounds according to the selected sound program. When the sound program is changed, the speakers that output the sound are switched between the presence speakers and surround back speakers automatically. En 14 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers ■ Enjoying the 7.1 channel audio source without surround back speakers ■ 5.1-channel speaker layout (5 speakers + subwoofer) Front speaker R ■ Assigning a speaker configuration ■ Connections of speakers A speaker configuration must be assigned to this unit to activate the speakers. Use the “Power Amp Assign” function to easily apply the appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker configuration. Speakers for this layout can be activated at the default “Power Amp Assign” setting (☞p. 77). Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Bi-amp connection” for details on connecting speakers (☞p. 17, p. 18). Subwoofer Front speaker L Power Amp Assign Surround speaker R ■ Using the front speakers that support bi- amp connections for a high quality sound ■ 5-channel speaker layout (Front speakers (Bi-amp) + 3 speakers) Front speaker R (Bi-amp connection) Center speaker Front speaker L (Bi-amp connection) This unit can mix 7.1-channel audio source down to 5.1-channel sound. This enables 7.1-channel sound without surround back speakers. Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Presence speaker connection” for details on connecting speakers (☞p. 17). Speaker jacks FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SUBWOOFER EXTRA SP jack No used FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER EXTRA SP jack No used ■ Assigning a speaker configuration Use the “Power Amp Assign” function which can easily apply the appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker configuration (☞p. 77). Power Amp Assign Subwoofer Surround speaker R Surround speaker L ■ Connections of speakers Speaker jacks 7ch Normal (Default) 5ch BI-AMP Continues to the next page Center speaker Surround speaker L Using the front speakers that support bi-amp connections reproduces a high quality sound. En 15 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers ■ Using speakers in two rooms (Zone2 function) ■ 7.1-channel speaker layout + Zone2 (7 speakers (in main zone) + subwoofer (in main zone) + front speakers (in secondary zone)) In addition to the main room, speakers in another room can also be controlled. When the built-in amplifier for the speakers in another room is turned on, the speakers that output the sound are switched from the surround back speakers to the speakers in another room automatically. J1 Main zone ■ Connections of speakers Front speaker R Front speaker L Subwoofer Surround speaker R Connect the speakers to the following jacks according to the speaker layout. Refer to “Front/Center/Surround/Surround back speaker and Subwoofer connection” and “Multi-zone audio system using the internal amplifier of this unit” for details on connecting speakers (☞p. 17, p. 18). Speaker jacks FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER EXTRA SP jack Zone2 speakers Center speaker ■ Assigning a speaker configuration 30 cm or more Surround speaker L Surround back speaker L Surround back speaker R Use the “Power Amp Assign” function which can easily apply the appropriate speaker settings to this unit according to the speaker configuration (☞p. 77). Power Amp Assign Zone2 7ch + 1ZONE Front speaker R Front speaker L J 1 : Sound cannot be output from both the surround back speakers and the speakers in the second zone at the same time. En 16 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Connecting speakers and subwoofer Connect your speakers to their respective terminals on the rear panel. CAUTION • Remove the AC power cable of this unit from the power outlet before connecting the speakers. • Generally speaker cables consist of two parallel insulated cables. One of these cables is a different color, or has a line running along it, to indicate different polarity. Insert the different colored (or lined) cable into the “+” (positive, red) terminal on this unit and the speakers, and the other cable into the “–” (negative, black) terminal. • Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES!” will appear on the front panel display when this unit is switched on. ■ Front/Center/Surround/Surround back speaker and Subwoofer connection Front speaker R Surround speaker L R Surround back speaker L R ■ Presence speaker connection When using the presence speakers, connect the speakers to the EXTRA SP jacks as shown in the diagram below. Presence speaker R L The presence speakers (PL/PR) that output front effect sounds can be connected to this unit. With the sound programs (☞p. 45), sound with a richer and more spatial presence can be created. Presence speaker L 1.8 m HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 FRONT CENTER HDMI 5 SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE EXTRA SP MOTE ZONE2/ PRESENCE SINGLE +12V 0.1A MAX. FRONT CENTER ND SUR.BACK TI CH INPUT SUBWOOFER SINGLE AUDIO OUT ZONE2 OUT FRONT SURROUND 0.5 – 1 m PL PR FL FR 1.8 m • Connection of presence speakers is recommended to take full advantage of the effects of CINEMA DSP sound programs. • Although you can connect both surround back speakers and presence speakers to this unit, you cannot output sounds from those speakers at the same time. SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SURROUND GER OUT CENTER 0.5 – 1 m SUR.BACK PRE OUT CENTER 1 Continues to the next page OOFER 2 SPEAKERS ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 2 HDMI 1 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 FRONT CENTER SURROUND FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE REMOTE GND AM PR PR IN SINGLE OUT 75 PB EXTRA SP PB ZONE2/ PRESENCE VIDEO VIDEO Y +12V 0.1A MAX. Y MONITOR OUT CENTER Center speaker OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP TRIGGER OUT SURROUND SUR.BACK MULTI CH INPUT SUBWOOFER SINGLE AUDIO OUT ZONE2 OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK PRE OUT CENTER 1 SUBWOOFER 2 Subwoofer En 17 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers ■ Bi-amp connection This unit can be connected to speakers that support bi-amp connections. When connecting speakers, connect the FRONT jacks and the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks as in the diagram below. Configure the bi-amp settings to activate connections. ■ Changing speaker impedance ■ Multi-zone audio system using the internal amplifier of this unit Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP jacks as in the diagram below. EXTRA SP ZONE2/ PRESENCE Zone2 SINGLE SPEAKERS ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 2 HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 3 HDMI 4 FRONT COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER HDMI 5 SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP SINGLE REMOTE GND AM PR PR IN SINGLE OUT 75 PB EXTRA SP PB ZONE2/ PRESENCE VIDEO VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT FRONT CENTER COAXIAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 Switch this unit to the standby mode. Press MAIN ZONE A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel. Release the keys when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on the front panel display. After approximately a few seconds, the top menu item is displayed. J1 AUDIO 2 SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SURROUND TRIGGER OUT CENTER COAXIAL 1 2 +12V 0.1A MAX. Y OPTICAL This unit is configured for 8 Ω speakers at the factory setting. When connecting to 6 Ω speakers, carry out the following procedure to switch to 6 Ω. When this unit is configured for 6 Ω speakers, 4 Ω speakers can also be used as the front speakers. SURROUND SUR.BACK MULTI CH INPUT SUBWOOFER SINGLE AUDIO OUT ZONE2 OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK PRE OUT CENTER 1 SUBWOOFER 2 MAIN ZONE A FRONT SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP CAUTION NOTES • Before making bi-amplification connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manuals of speakers for details. When not making bi-amplification connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. • If connecting a bi-amp, then surround back speakers cannot be used. The EXTRA SP jacks of this unit should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of this unit. MAIN ZONE YPAO MIC ZONE2 ZONE CONTROL INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM SCENE BD DVD PHONES SILENT CINEMA INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO STRAIGHT H STRAIGHT Continues to the next page J 1 : Refer to the “Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu)” (☞p. 92) for details on the Advanced Setup menu. En 18 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers 3 Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front panel. SPIMP.-8MIN 4 5 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select a “6ΩMIN.” ■ Connecting speakers This type of jack can connect to the following speakers or connection. • • • • • Front L/R speakers Center speaker Surround L/R speakers Surround back L/R speakers Bi-amp connection (Front speaker L/R speakers) 4 Tighten the terminal. Connecting the banana plug Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into the end of the terminal. Banana plug Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then switch it on again. 3 The power turns on, when the settings you made has been configured. 2 FR ON T 1 4 FR ON T 1 Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires of the cables together firmly so that they will not cause short circuits. 2 3 Loosen the speaker terminals. Insert the bare wire of the speaker cable into the gap on the side of the terminal. En 19 CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers ■ Connecting extra speakers ■ Connecting the subwoofer The EXTRA SP jacks can connect to the following speakers. SUR ROU N BI-A D BAC MP K/ • Presence L/R speakers • Zone2 speakers Red: positive (+) EX ZO PR 1 2 Black: negative (–) Press down the tab and insert the bare end of the speaker cable into the hole in the terminal. 1 Connect the subwoofer input jack to the SUBWOOFER 1 or 2 jack on this unit with an audio pin cable. 2 Set the subwoofer volume as follows. Volume: Set to approximately half volume (or slightly less than half). Crossover frequency (if available): Set to maximum. Release the tab to secure the wire. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN MAX Subwoofer examples NOTE After connection, applying this setting to this unit is required to activate all speaker connections. With using “Power Amp Assign” function, you can easily apply the speaker configuration. Refer to “Power Amp Assign” (☞p. 77) for details on using “Power Amp Assign” function. En 20 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components Cable plugs and jacks VIDEO jacks This unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are going to connect. These jacks transmit conventional analog video signals. Use video pin cables. ■ Audio/Video jacks Video pin cable HDMI jacks Digital video and digital sound are transmitted through a single jack. Only use an HDMI cable. HDMI cable ■ Audio jacks • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. • We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation. • When a TV that supports HDMI functions and Audio Return Channel function is connected, audio output from the TV can be input to this unit (☞p. 97). • When a player and TV that support the 3D video format are connected to this unit, 3D content can be played back. • If you connect this unit to a component that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is required. ■ Analog video jacks OPTICAL jacks COAXIAL jacks These jacks transmit optical digital audio signals. Use fiber-optic cables for optical digital audio signals. These jacks transmit coaxial digital audio signals. Use pin cables for digital audio signals. Digital audio fiber-optic cable Digital audio pin cable AUDIO jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks The signal is separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use component video pin cables with three plugs. Component video pin cable These jacks transmit conventional analog audio signals. Use stereo pin cables, connecting the red plug to the red R jack, and the white plug to the white L jack. Stereo pin cable En 21 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components Connecting a TV monitor When connecting to a non-HDMI compatible TV This unit is equipped with the following three types of output jack for connection to a TV. HDMI OUT, COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO. Select the proper connection according to the input signal format supported by your TV. Connect to the TV using the same type of connection that you used to connect to the external component, and change the inputs on your TV to match that of the external component you are using for playback. If the external component and TV are equipped with different types of analog video jacks, this unit will convert the video signal to component video signal, or vice-versa, according to the type of video input jacks used by the TV. J2, J3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks HDMI OUT jack (MONITOR OUT) ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM Output HDMI HDM HDMI 1 ANTENNA Input REMOTE GND AM PR PR TV Component video input IN OUT 75 PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y +12V 0.1A MAX. Y MONITOR OUT TRIGGER OUT Video input VIDEO jack (MONITOR OUT) Through Converted When connecting to an HDMI compatible TV Video signal such as component video and video received by this unit is converted to HDMI and output to the TV. Just select HDMI input on the TV to view video from any external source connected to this unit. J1 Input Output HDMI HDMI TV HDMI input COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO Through Converted J 1 : You can change the resolution and aspect ratio when converting to HDMI to suit your requirements (☞p. 83). J 2 : Set “Analog to Analog Conversion” to “On” (☞p. 82). J 3 : Analog to analog conversion is available only for 480i/576i-resolution video signal. En 22 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Connecting an HDMI video monitor ■ Connecting a component video monitor J1 Connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI OUT jack. Connect the component video cable to the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jacks. Component video input HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO ARC ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI input COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR FM COMPONENT VIDEO RE GND AM PR PR PR HDMI 1 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO RE GND AM (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT PR PR IN PB IN HDMI OUT 75 PB PB 75 PB Y PB PB HDMI Y Y MONITOR OUT Y VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO OUT Y Y OR OUT TRIG TRIG TV TV OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROU MUL • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. • We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m long to prevent signal quality degradation. • When a TV that supports the HDMI function and Audio Return Channel function is connected, audio output from the TV can be input to this unit (☞p. 97). • When a player and TV that support the 3D video format are connected to this unit, 3D content can be played back. OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 SURROU MUL AUDIO 2 ■ Connecting a video monitor J1 Connect the video pin cable to the VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack. ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM Video input COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO RE GND AM PR PR IN VIDEO OUT 75 PB PB V VIDEO Y Y MONITO TRIG TV V OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROU MUL J 1 : When connecting to a TV that supports HDMI input, the video signal for the COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO jacks is converted and output from HDMI OUT jack. When connecting to a TV via the HDMI jack, you do not need to use these jacks. En 23 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Listening to TV audio To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect as followings according to the TV: When using a TV that supports the Audio Return Channel function and HDMI Control function When your TV supports both HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link) and Audio Return Channel functions, audio/video output from the unit to the TV and audio output from the TV to the unit are possible using a single HDMI cable. The input source is switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV, and that makes TV sound control easier to use. For the connections and settings, refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return Channel function” (☞p. 97). When using a TV that supports the HDMI Control functions When using a TV that supports HDMI Control functions (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link), if HDMI Control functions are enabled on the unit, then input source can be switched automatically to match operations carried out on the TV. For the connections and settings, refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 96). When using other TVs To transmit sound from the TV to this unit, connect AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 jacks to the TV’s audio output jacks. TV audio output Connection Optical digital audio output Connect to the OPTICAL jack of the AV1 or AV4 with a fiber-optic cable. Coaxial digital audio output Connect to the COAXIAL jack of the AV2 or AV3 with a digital audio pin cable. Analog stereo output Connect to one of the AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2 with a stereo pin cable. Select the input source connected via TV’s audio output jack to enjoy the TV sound. If the TV supports optical digital audio output, we recommend that you connect the TV audio output to the receiver’s AV4 jack. Connecting to AV4 allows you to switch the input source to AV4 with just a single key operation using the SCENE function (☞p. 41). Available input jacks Audio output (Optical, coaxial, or analog) ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA AUDIO COAXIAL OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO FM COMPONENT VIDEO RE GND AM PR PR IN OUT 75 PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT TRIG TV OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 4 AV OUT FRONT SURRO MUL You can control your TV using the receiver’s remote control by entering the TV’s remote control code (☞p. 90). En 24 CONNECTIONS MAIN Connecting external components ZONE 2 CODE SET Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 5 V-AUX 1 4 This unit has the following input jacks. Connect them to the appropriate output jacks on the playback devices such as BD/DVD players. AUDIO 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER Input jack [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET MUSIC SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT j SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU HDMI HDMI2 HDMI HDMI HDMI3 HDMI HDMI HDMI4 HDMI HDMI MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT INPUT MUTE ARC HDMI/Audio (Optical) output (BD/DVD) ( HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 2 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM PR HDMI5 HDMI HDMI AV1 Component video Optical digital HDMI k PB VIDEO VIDEO AV3 Video Coaxial digital AV4 Video Optical digital AV5 Video Analog (Stereo) AV6 Video Analog (Stereo) AUDIO1 — Analog (Stereo) AUDIO2 — Analog (Stereo) VIDEO AUX HDMI/Video HDMI/Analog (Stereo) OPTICAL ARC (BD/DVD) (BD/DVD HDMI REMOTE GND AM PR IN OUT 75 PB VIDEO VIDEO +12V 0.1A MAX. Y HDMI MONITOR OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND TRIGGER OUT HDMI COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROUND SUR.BACK SUBWO MULTI CH INPUT BD/DVD player HDMI FM TRIGGER OUT O Connect the device with an HDMI cable to one of the HDMI1-5 jacks. The HDMI IN jack on the front panel can also be used. Select the HDMI input (HDMI1-5 or VIDEO AUX) that the playback device is connected to for playback. HDMI output MONITOR OUT O ■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with COMPONENT VIDEO +12V 0.1A MAX. Y CENT Coaxial digital ANTENNA IN OUT 75 PB Y Component video HDMI OUT REMOTE PR HDMI AV2 j ON SCREEN k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER HDMI GND AM OPTICAL OPTION ON SCREEN Audio input HDMI This unit can use the AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 input jacks to receive audio signals from other input jacks. For example, if a playback device cannot produce audio signals from an HDMI jack, use the following method to change the audio input. TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE Video input HDMI1 ■ Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals from a jack other than HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press jON SCREEN to display the ON SCREEN menu. Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Input,” and then press kENTER. J1 Press kCursor D / E repeatedly to select the desired HDMI input source, and then press kCursor B. Press kCursor C repeatedly to select “Audio In,” and then press kENTER. Press kCursor B / C to select the audio input source. Once you have completed the setup, press jON SCREEN to close the menu. CENTER COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROUND SUR.BACK MULTI CH INPUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT ZONE2 OUT FRONT SURROUND J 1 : Refer to the “Configuring input sources (Input menu)” (☞p. 65) for details on selecting the input source. BD/DVD player En 25 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with component video cables Connect the device with a component video cable to one of the AV1-2 input jacks. ■ Component connections to analog audio output devices Component video / Audio output Using optical digital audio output sources Select the AV1 input to which the playback device is connected for playback. COMPONENT VIDEO ARC PR PB (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK Component video / Audio (Optical) output FM Y PR PR PB PB Y Y HDMI 2 HDMI 1 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE GND AM PR IN OUT AUDIO ARC 75 PB VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT ANTENNA FM PR PR PB PB +12V 0.1A MAX. Y HDMI 1 MONITOR OUT TRIGGER OUT CENT R COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR L (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK L RE GND AM PR IN R PB OUT 75 Y COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 2 SURROUND SUR.BACK SUBWO MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO VIDEO Y OPTICAL PB Y Y MONITOR OUT OPTICAL TRIG Game console O O OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 FRONT AV OUT AV 6 AUDIO 1 SURROU MUL AUDIO 2 BD/DVD player Using coaxial digital audio output sources Select the AV2 input to which the playback device is connected for playback. The video input from the AV1-2 jacks can be used in combination with the audio input from other AV inputs or AUDIO1-2. When connecting these devices, select the AV input jacks or the AUDIO1-2 jacks as the audio input for AV1 or AV2. Refer to “Receiving video signals from the HDMI jack and audio signals from a jack other than HDMI” (☞p. 25) for detailed setup guidance. For playback of the connected device, select the AV input source (AV1-2) to which the device is connected with the component video cable. Component video / Audio (Coaxial) output ARC COMPONENT VIDEO (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA PR COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM PR RE GND AM PR PR IN PB OUT PB PB Y Y Y 75 PB VIDEO VIDEO Y MONITOR OUT COAXIAL TRIG C C OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROU MUL BD/DVD player En 26 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Connecting BD/DVD players and other devices with video cables Connect the playback device with a video pin cable to one of the AV3-6 input jacks. Using analog stereo audio output sources Select the AV5 or AV6 input to which the playback device is connected for playback. Using optical digital audio output sources Select the AV4 input to which the playback device is connected for playback. ARC Video / Audio output (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM PR V (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK PR HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM RE GND AM PR OUT 75 PB PB VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR AUDIO V Y Y IN MONITOR OUT TRIG L OUT 75 PB VIDEO R VIDEO V Y L PB VIDEO V IN VIDEO ARC Video / Audio (Optical) output RE GND AM R Y MONITOR OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 TRIG OPTICAL OPTICAL AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROU MUL O O OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL AV OUT (CD) AV 5 AV 6 FRONT AUDIO 1 SURROU MUL AUDIO 2 BD/DVD player BD/DVD player Using coaxial digital audio output sources Select the AV3 input to which the playback device is connected for playback. ARC Video / Audio (Coaxial) output (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM RE GND AM PR PR IN OUT 75 PB VIDEO PB VIDEO VIDEO V V Y Y MONITOR OUT TRIG COAXIAL C C OPTICAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 COAXIAL (CD) OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROU MUL BD/DVD player En 27 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components ■ Connecting CD players and other audio devices Using coaxial digital output sources Select the AV input (AV2 or AV3) to which the playback device is connected for playback. Using analog stereo output sources Select the audio input (AUDIO1-2) to which the playback device is connected for playback. ARC FM (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM PR PR IN OUT RE GND AM PR IN Audio (Coaxial) output OUT 75 PB RE GND AM COMPONENT VIDEO PR 75 PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y PB MONITOR OUT VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Audio output HDMI 1 ANTENNA ARC DOCK (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK Y Y L MONITOR OUT TRIG C COAXIAL C TRIG L R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) AV 1 OPTICAL ( TV ) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROU MUL R OPTICAL AV 1 COAXIAL AV 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 FRONT AV OUT SURROU MUL CD player CD player We recommend connecting audio devices with a coaxial digital output to the AV3 coaxial digital jack on this unit. This connection allows you to switch to the AV input 3 just by pressing the “CD” SCENE key (☞p. 41). Using optical digital output sources Select the AV input (AV1 or AV4) to which the playback device is connected for playback. ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK HDMI 1 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM RE GND AM PR PR IN OUT 75 PB Audio (Optical) output PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT OPTICAL TRIG O O OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 OPTICAL (CD) AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROU MUL CD player En 28 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components Connecting game consoles Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as a game console to the receiver. Select the V-AUX input to use these connected devices. ■ When connecting an HDMI compatible device Connect the HDMI output of the device to the HDMI IN jack of this unit. VOLUME RADIO VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT HDMI IN VIDEO L AUDIO • Be sure to turn down the volume when connecting this unit and the other devices. • When both the HDMI connection and the analog video/audio connection are performed between the HDMI compatible device and this unit, only the HDMI signal will be input. Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit has 8 sets of input jacks (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SUR. BACK and SUBWOOFER) to input multi-channel analog sound signals. If your playback component, such as a DVD player or SACD player, has multi-channel analog output capability, you can enjoy up to 7.1channel multi-channel sound. To output multi-channel sound, connect the audio output jacks of your playback component to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit, and set the input source of this unit to “MULTI CH.” R CENTER HDMI HDMI output HDMI HDMI FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER MULTI CH INPUT Game console L R L R L R ■ When connecting an non-HDMI compatible device Connect the video and audio outputs of the device to the VIDEO and AUDIO jacks of this unit. L V L AUDIO R Center out VIDEO Subwoofer out HDMI IN Front out VIDEO AUX STRAIGHT Surround out RADIO Surround back out VOLUME R Video output VIDEO V AUDIO L Analog audio output Multi-format player/External decoder (7.1-channel output) R Game console • When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field processor and tone control are automatically disabled. • Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system when using this feature. • When the input source is switched to “MULTI CH,” images input from a component connected to the HDMI1-5, AV1-6, or VIDEO AUX jacks can be displayed on a video monitor (☞p. 68). If your DVD player does not support multi-channel digital output, connect it to these input jacks. En 29 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components Connecting an external amplifier Connecting a SCENE link playback-compatible device The same channel signals are output from the jacks of the PRE OUT terminals as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker output, connect the input terminals of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT terminals of this unit. When the components are the Yamaha products and have the capability of the transmission of the remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote control input and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows. NOTE Remote control out When a component is connected to the PRE OUT terminals, do not connect speakers to the SPEAKERS terminals corresponding to those PRE OUT terminals. ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 3 Infrared signal receiver or Yamaha component COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR IN OUT 75 EXTRA SP ZONE2/ PRESENCE PB VIDEO VIDEO +12V 0.1A MAX. Y MONITOR OUT TER SURROUND SINGLE CENTER SURROUND SUR.BACK PRE OUT Remote control in CENTER COAXIAL FRONT FRONT TRIGGER OUT SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROUND SUR.BACK MULTI CH INPUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT Yamaha component (CD or DVD player, etc.) 1 SUBWOOFER 2 abc d e a FRONT (PRE OUT) jacks Front channel output jacks. • When a Yamaha component that supports the SCENE link playback function is connected via the REMOTE OUT jack, playback begins automatically when the SCENE function is used (☞p. 41). • If the component connected to the REMOTE OUT jack is not a Yamaha product, set “SCENE IR” in the SCENE menu to “Off” (☞p. 70). b SURROUND (PRE OUT) jacks Surround channel output jacks. c SUR. BACK (PRE OUT) jacks Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SUR. BACK (SINGLE) jack. d SUBWOOFER (PRE OUT) 1/2 jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. When two subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them. e CENTER (PRE OUT) jack Center channel output jack. En 30 CONNECTIONS Connecting external components Using the Trigger function to link external component power Connecting audio/video recording devices When this unit is connected to a Yamaha subwoofer that supports the system connection or the component with TRIGGER IN jack, you can turn on and off the component by using this unit. This receiver can transmit selected incoming analog audio/video signals to external components through the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks. You can record these input audio and video signals to VCRs or similar devices, or send them to other TVs or external components. ■ When connecting a Yamaha subwoofer Video / Audio input System connection input VIDEO V ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM HDMI 3 AUDIO COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE GND AM PR L IN OUT 75 VIDEO +12V 0.1A MAX. FM HDMI 3 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER HDMI 2 HDMI 1 ANTENNA FRONT MONITOR OUT (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK Y R ARC PB VIDEO REMOTE GND AM PR PR IN OUT 75 PB PB VIDEO VIDEO COAXIAL OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 SURROUND SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER MULTI CH INPUT AUDIO 2 V Y AUDIO OUT MONITOR OUT Yamaha subwoofer that supports the system connection VCR +12V 0.1A MAX. Y FRONT TRIGGER OUT CENTER R R OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 Audio input L L AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROUND SUR.BACK MULTI CH INPUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT ■ When connecting a component with the TRIGGER IN jack AUDIO L R Trigger input ARC TRIGGER IN (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 ANTENNA FM Using the AV OUT jacks REMOTE GND AM PR IN Connect this jacks to the external component’s video input jack and analog audio input jacks. OUT 75 PB VIDEO VIDEO Using the AUDIO OUT jacks +12V 0.1A MAX. Y FRONT MONITOR OUT CENTER COAXIAL Audio recorder HDMI 3 COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 SURROUND SUR.BACK MULTI CH INPUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT Component with the TRIGGER IN jack (Power amplifier or DVD player, etc.) Connect this jack to the external component’s analog audio input jacks. HDMI audio/video signals, component video signals, and digital audio signals cannot be transmitted from these jacks. Functions of the TRIGGER OUT jack can be specified (☞p. 87). En 31 CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM/AM antennas An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are supplied with this receiver. Connect these antennas properly to their respective jacks. AM loop antenna Position the AM antenna away from the receiver. The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. You can connect either wire to the AM jack or the GND jack. Indoor FM antenna ARC We recommend using an outdoor antenna. For more information, consult the nearest authorized dealer. ■ Improving AM reception Connect this unit to an outdoor antenna with a 5 – 10 m vinyl-coated wire. Make sure the AM loop antenna is still connected. Connecting the GND jack can reduce noise. Connect the jack to a store-bought ground bar or copper plate with a vinyl-covered wire and bury this new attachment in moist ground. The GND jack is not to be connected to the ground socket of an electrical outlet. (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK ■ Improving FM reception HDMI 1 COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FM PR GND AM PR O 75 PB PB VIDEO VIDEO Y Y MONITOR OUT Connecting the AM loop antenna Press and hold Insert Release Assembling the AM loop antenna En 32 CONNECTIONS Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) This unit is equipped with a Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) that adjusts the status, size, and volume balance of the speakers in order to provide an optimal sound field. Using YPAO allows you to automatically configure settings, such as adjusting speaker output and acoustic parameters to suit your listening room (the room in which this unit is placed). J1 When using YPAO, a test tone will be output from the speakers for approximately 3 minutes to measure acoustics. Be aware of the following when using YPAO. • The test tone is output at high volume. Refrain from using this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others. • Take care that the test tone does not frighten small children. YPAO operations can be viewed on the front panel display or TV screen. 1 Check the following before using YPAO. 2 Place the supplied YPAO microphone at ear height in your listening position. Face the head of the YPAO microphone upwards. This unit • The headphones are removed. YPAO microphone TV • This unit is connected to the TV correctly. • The power is turned on. • The video input to which the video output from this unit has been selected. Subwoofer • The power is turned on. • Volume is set to approximately half, and the cross-over frequency (if present) is set to maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN When positioning the microphone, we recommend that you use equipment that allows you to adjust the height (such as a tripod) as a microphone stand. When using a tripod, use the tripod screws to fix the microphone in place. MAX Subwoofer examples 3 Switch this unit on. Continues to the next page J 1 : When you have changed the number of speakers or the locations in which they are installed, first use YPAO to adjust the speaker balance. En 33 CONNECTIONS MAIN Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) ZONE 2 CODE SET Display during measurement SOURCE RECEIVER 4 HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 1 V-AUX Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. 2 • It takes approximately 3 minutes to accurately measure acoustics. Keep the room as quiet as possible while acoustics are measured. • Wait in a corner of the room, or leave it entirely, while acoustics are measured to avoid creating an obstruction between the speakers and the YPAO microphone. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK MAIN ZONE TUNER [ A ] YPAO MIC ZONE2 FM ZON AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP This completes preparation. To achieve more accurate results, take note of the following when measuring acoustics. YPAO VOL. Progress 0% SW PL PR C L R SL SR SBL SBR STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU k “Mic On. View ON SCREEN” appears on the front panel display, and the following display appears on the front panel display or TV screen. MUTE YPAO REC ENTER to Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 VOL. PL L SL SBL SW C PR R SR SBR 5 Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select the “Measure” and press kENTER to start measurement. Auto measurement starts in 10 seconds. • To start the measurement immediately, press kENTER again. • To cancel the automatic setup and return to the previous screen, press kRETURN and then kENTER. The following display appears when measurement finishes without any problems. YPAO VOL. Save/Exit L SL SW C R SR ENT INPUT MUTE k Cursor B / C k ENTER k RETURN Continues to the next page En 34 CONNECTIONS MAIN Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 5 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 Result Displays the results of automatic acoustics measurement. Refer to “Reviewing and reloading automatic setup parameters” for details (☞p. 36). Save/Exit Applies the result to the speaker setup and finishes the automatic measurement. 4 AUDIO AV 1 5 2 6 TUNER MULTI DOCK Press kCursor D / E to select “SAVE” and press kENTER. YPAO VOL. Disconnect Mic L SL SW C R SR [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING NOTE ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD 7 TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN k If a problem occurs, an error message or report is displayed either during or after acoustic measurement. Refer to “When an error message is displayed during measurement” (☞p. 37), or “When a warning message is displayed after measurement” (☞p. 37) to resolve the problem and measure acoustics with YPAO again. DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE 6 REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT INPUT Press kCursor B / C to select “Save/Exit” and press kENTER. YPAO Select:Save VOL. L SL SW C R SR 8 Press kENTER. YPAO is automatically terminated. Disconnect the YPAO microphone. The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat. When you have finished measuring, store the microphone out of direct sunlight, and away from locations that may experience high temperatures, such as on top of AV equipment. MUTE k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER En 35 CONNECTIONS MAIN Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) ZONE 2 CODE SET ■ Reviewing and reloading automatic SOURCE RECEIVER setup parameters HDMI 1 2 3 5 V-AUX 1 4 The results of automatic acoustics measurement can be reviewed once measurement is complete. Automatic setup parameters can also be reloaded if you are not satisfied with manually configured speaker setup and sound adjustments. AUDIO 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET NOTE TUNING When automatic setup parameters are reloaded, manually configured settings are cleared. To save manually configured settings before reloading automatic setup parameters, see “Prohibiting setting changes” (☞p. 87). ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE k 1 2 Select the desired menu item (or enable a function) using kCursor B / C / D / E and kENTER. 3 Press kRETURN to finish “Result” menu. Wiring Displays the polarity of each connected speaker. • “Normal” is displayed when the polarity of the connected speaker is normal. Size Displays the size of the connected speakers. • “Large” is displayed when the connected speaker has the ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively. • “Small” is displayed when the connected speaker does not have the ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively. Distance Displays the distance from the listening position to speakers. The unit for distance can be switched between “ft” (feet) and “m” (meter) by pressing kCursor D / E. Level Displays the result of the adjustment of each connected speaker output level. Setup Reload Applies “Result” menu settings to this unit. Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Result” and press kENTER immediately after the automatic measurement. REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 The “Result” menu can also be viewed from the display shown after the YPAO microphone is connected. ENT The results of acoustics measurement are displayed. INPUT MUTE b k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER k RETURN a c The type of parametric equalizer can also be selected from “PEQ Select” (☞p. 80). a List of menu items Menu items available in the Result menu are displayed. b Diagram Shows the speaker setup and sound adjustment as diagram. c Message Displays warning or error messages. En 36 CONNECTIONS MAIN Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) ZONE 2 CODE SET ■ When an error message is SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER displayed during measurement See “Error messages” (☞p. 38) for instructions on resolving the problem and measure acoustics again. FM AM MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO Check the error code displayed and use YPAO to measure acoustics again as described below. OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN POP-UP MENU k When “E-1,” “E-2,” “E-3,” “E-4” or “E-6” is displayed DISPLAY TOP MENU Press kCursor E to select “RETRY.” NOTE Press kENTER to use YPAO again. Although the results of acoustics measurement can be applied when a warning message is displayed, optimal sound will not be achieved. Resolving the problem and using YPAO to measure acoustics again is recommended. When “E-10” is displayed [ A ] INFO 3 4 MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT INPUT MUTE k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER k RETURN 1 2 3 4 5 Press kENTER. Press kCursor E to select “EXIT.” 1 2 3 4 5 Press kENTER. Press kCursor E to select “EXIT.” Press kENTER to terminate YPAO. Switch the unit to standby mode. Turn on the unit and use YPAO again. To exit YPAO with some options 1 2 Use kCursor B / C to select “Save/Exit” and press kENTER. Use kCursor D / E to select one of the following options and press kENTER. SAVE: Exits YPAO applying the results of measurement. CANCEL: Returns to the previous screen (warning message screen). EXIT: Exits YPAO without saving the results. ■ When a warning message is Press kENTER to terminate YPAO, and switch the unit to standby mode. Check that the speakers are properly connected. displayed after measurement See “Warning messages” (☞p. 39) for instructions on resolving the problem. The speaker causing the problem can be confirmed from the TV screen display. Turn on the unit and use YPAO again. When “E-5,” “E-7,” “E-8” or “E-9” is displayed 1 2 Press kENTER. Check that the environment is suitable for accurate measurement. En 37 CONNECTIONS Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) ■ Message list ■ Error messages NOTE If the following messages appear, resolve the problems that have occurred and carry out the measurement process again. ■ When a warning message is displayed before measurement Connect MIC! The YPAO microphone is not connected. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug HP! The headphones are connected. Remove the headphones. Memory Guard! The settings of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” in the Setup menu to “Off” (☞p. 87). E-1: No Front SP E-2: No Sur. SP The unit was not able to find the front channel. Check that the left and right front speakers are connected correctly. The unit was only able to find one of side of the surround channels. Check that the left and right surround speakers are connected correctly. The unit was only able to find one of side of the presence channels. Check that the left and right presence speakers are connected correctly. E-4: SBR→SBL Only one surround back speaker is connected and only the right side surround back channel sound is detected. When only one surround back speaker is connected, connect to the left side (SINGLE) terminal. E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud, preventing accurate measurements from being taken. Measure again in quiet surroundings. Turn off any devices in the room that may be emitting noise, or place them further away from the YPAO microphone. When this message is displayed, selecting “PROCEED” will allow you to continue measuring. However, we recommend resolving the problem and measuring again, as continuing measurement without doing so will not give accurate results. E-3: No F.PRNS SP E-6: Check Sur. Even though surround left and right speakers are not connected, only the surround back speakers are connected. E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. While measuring, take care not to touch the YPAO microphone. E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone could not distinguish a test tone. Check that the YPAO microphone has been installed correctly. Check that each speaker has been connected and installed correctly. The YPAO microphone or the YPAO MIC jack may be broken. Inquire at the retailer where you purchased this unit, or the nearest Yamaha service center. E-9: User Cancel You have carried out an operation that has cancelled the measuring process. Carry out the measuring process again. Do not operate this unit by, for example, adjusting the volume. E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Carry out the measuring process again. Contact a Yamaha service center if “E-10” is displayed again. When using surround back speakers, connection of the surround left/right speakers is necessary. En 38 CONNECTIONS Setting up the speaker parameters automatically (YPAO) ■ Warning messages W-1: Out of Phase The speakers displayed are connected with the opposite polarity. Depending on the type of speakers you are using and the environment in which you have them installed, this message may occur even if the speakers are connected correctly. Depending on the type of speakers, “W-1” may display even if the speakers are connected correctly. W-2: Over 24m/80ft The speakers displayed are separated from the listening position by more than 24 m, and cannot be adjusted correctly. Install the speakers with 24 m of the listening point. W-3: Level Error Volume level varies greatly for individual channels, and cannot be adjusted correctly. Check that all speakers are installed in the same surroundings. Check that the speaker polarity + (positive), and - (negative) are correct. If these are connected correctly, you can use the speakers normally even this message appears. Check that the speaker polarity + (positive), and - (negative) are correct. We recommend the same speakers or speakers with as similar specifications as possible. Adjust the volume of the subwoofer. If “W-2” or “W-3” appears, you can apply measurement results, but they will not give optimal results. We recommend that you resolve the problem and carry out the measurement process again. En 39 PLAYBACK MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET Basic playback procedure SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 1 V-AUX 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER FM d [ A ] AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC 1 2 Turn on external components (TV, DVD player, etc.) connected to this unit. Use the dInput selector to select the input source. The name of the selected input source is displayed for a few seconds. J1 TUNING Adjusting high/low-frequency sound (Tone control) You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired tone. 2 Press PROGRAM l / h to adjust the output level in those frequency ranges. Adjustable range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Adjustment increments 0.5 dB ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP When DOCK or TUNER is selected, the Content window is displayed (☞p. 53). STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN VOLUME s MUTE t 3 Play the external component that you have selected as the source input, or select a radio station on the tuner. DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the external component for details on playback. The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be set separately. Set the headphone tone control with the headphones connected. 1 Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.” The display returns to the previous display soon after you release the key. • If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well. • The tone control can also be adjusted in the OPTION menu (☞p. 50). TONE CONTROL REC For details on the following operations, refer to the corresponding pages: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 MAIN ZONE • “FM/AM tuning” (☞p. 54) • “Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™” (☞p. 58) • “Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components” (☞p. 63) ENT INPUT MUTE 4 d Input selector s VOLUME +/t MUTE YPAO MIC ZONE2 Press tMUTE to mute the audio output. Press tMUTE again to unmute. INFO MEMORY PRESET FM SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD RADIO STRAIGHT PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA PROGRAM l / h Press sVOLUME +/- to adjust the volume. To mute the output. ZONE CONTROL The current setting is displayed on the front panel display. TONE Treble VOL. +0.5dB SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR J 1 : You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel display as necessary (☞p. 66). En 40 PLAYBACK MAIN ZONE 2 Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER This unit has a SCENE function that allows you switch this unit on and change input sources and sound programs with one key. HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET Four scenes are available for different uses, such as d playing movies or music. The following input sources and sound programs are provided as the initial factory settings. TUNING SCENE Input ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO Sound program g i Compressed Music Enhancer mode BD/DVD HDMI1 Drama Off TV AV4 STRAIGHT On CD AV3 STRAIGHT Off RADIO TUNER STRAIGHT On Registering input sources/sound program 1 2 Use dInput selector to select the input source you want to register. Use the gSound selection keys to select the sound program or Compressed Music Enhancer mode you want to register. VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Press the iSCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front panel display. SCENE1 VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR SET Complete Release the key when “SET Complete” is displayed • When changing “SCENE,” also change the external component that the remote control operates (☞p. 89). • Selecting a scene and editing the scene function are also available in the SCENE menu (☞p. 69). OPTION ON SCREEN 3 MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT Enjoying the desired sound field effect This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. Multi-channel playback from almost any audio source can be enjoyed using a variety of sound decoders and various sound field effect programs stored on the chip. Sound field effect programs built into this unit are called “sound programs.” INPUT MUTE d Input selector g Sound selection keys i SCENE Selecting sound programs and sound decoders This unit offers sound programs in many different categories suitable for movies, music and other uses. Choose a sound program that sounds best with the source you are playing back, rather than relying on the name or explanation of the program. • Sound programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound program previously selected for that input source is applied again. • When you playback DTS Express sources or audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decoding mode (☞p. 42) is automatically selected. • When you playback DTS-HD sources with CINEMA DSP, the DTS decoder is automatically selected. Continues to the next page En 41 PLAYBACK MAIN Enjoying the desired sound field effect ZONE 2 CODE SET HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK FM [ A ] Press gMUSIC repeatedly Use straight decoding mode when you want to playback sound without sound field processing. You can playback as follows in straight decoding mode. Selecting surround decoder: 2-channel sources such as CD Select “2ch Stereo” from the sound programs when you want to playback 2-channel stereo sound (from the front speakers only), regardless of the playback source. Selecting “2ch Stereo” will playback as follows for the playback of CD and BD/DVD sources. Press gSUR. DECODE repeatedly Stereo sound plays through the front left and right speakers. 2-channel sources such as CD Multi-channel playback sources such as BD/ DVD Multi-channel sources such as BD/DVD (Straight decoding mode) AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD ■ Enjoying stereo playback MOVIE category: Press gMOVIE repeatedly MUSIC category: Press gMUSIC repeatedly Selecting stereo reproduction: AV TUNER ■ Enjoying unprocessed playback Selecting sound program (☞p. 45): SOURCE RECEIVER TV CD g Turning on Pure Direct mode (☞p. 44): Press gPURE DIRECT Turning on Compressed Music Enhancer mode (☞p. 44): VOLUME ENTER RETURN Press gSTRAIGHT RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN Turning on Straight decoding mode: Stereo sound plays back through the front speakers. Plays back audio from a playback source without applying sound field effects, using an appropriate decoder to split the signal into multiple channels. Press gMUSIC repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo.” Press gSTRAIGHT to enable the straight decoding mode. Press gENHANCER repeatedly DISPLAY MUSIC Sound program categories TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE VOL. MOVIE REC VOL. Sci-Fi 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Program ENT INPUT MUTE • You can use the speaker indicators on the front panel display to check what speakers are currently outputting sound (☞p. 10). • You can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters) for each of the programs (☞p. 71). Straight L SL SBL SW C Sci-Fi VOL. SW 2ch Stereo L R R SR SBR To disable stereo playback, press any of the gSound selection keys to select a sound program other than “2ch Stereo.” To disable straight decoding mode, press gSTRAIGHT again. MOVIE Playback channels other than the front channels in the playback source are mixed with the front channels and played back through the front speakers. VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Previously selected program g Sound selection keys g MOVIE g MUSIC g ENHANCER g SUR. DECODE g STRAIGHT g PURE DIRECT En 42 PLAYBACK Enjoying the desired sound field effect ■ Enjoying sound programs without ■ Enjoying more spatial sound fields ■ Enjoying sound programs without This unit allows you to use virtual surround speakers to enjoy sound field surround effects, even without any surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP mode). You can even enjoy surround sound presence with just a minimal configuration of the front speakers only. This unit will switch to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode automatically when surround speakers are unavailable. J1 CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates an intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room. Connection of presence speakers is recommended to take full advantage of the effects of CINEMA DSP 3D mode. Do the following steps and then select a CINEMA DSP sound program (☞p. 45). J3 This unit allows you to use virtual presence speakers to create an intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field, even when no presence speakers are connected (Virtual CINEMA DSP 3D mode). You can even enjoy surround sound presence with front speakers, center speaker, and surround speakers. This unit automatically switches to Virtual CINEMA DSP 3D mode when presence speakers are not available. Do the following steps and then select a CINEMA DSP sound program (☞p. 45). surround sound speakers ■ Enjoying sound programs with headphones Even when headphones are connected, you can enjoy the reproduction sound field presence with ease (SILENT CINEMA mode). J2 (CINEMA DSP 3D mode) • • • • presence speakers Connect the presence speakers to the EXTRA SP jacks (☞p. 17). Set “Front Presence” to “Use” (☞p. 78). Set “Power Amp Assign” to “7ch Normal”(☞p. 77). Enable CINEMA DSP 3D in the OPTION menu (☞p. 50). When a sound program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, the CINEMA DSP 3D indicator on the front panel lights up. • Connect the front speakers, center speaker, and surround speakers. • Enable center speaker and surround speakers in “Configuration” (☞p. 78). • Enable CINEMA DSP 3D in the OPTION menu (☞p. 50). Lights up MUSIC VOL. 3 Hall in Vienna PL L SL SW C PR R SR J 1 : However, Virtual CINEMA DSP mode is not available under the following J 2 : However, SILENT CINEMA mode is not available under the following conditions: • When headphones are connected to this unit. • When a “7ch Stereo” or “2ch Stereo” sound program is selected. • When Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected. conditions: • When a “2ch Stereo” sound program is selected. • When Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected. J 3 : However, CINEMA DSP 3D mode is not available under the following conditions: • When headphones are connected to this unit. • When a “7ch Stereo” or “2ch Stereo” sound program is selected. • When Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected. En 43 PLAYBACK MAIN Enjoying the desired sound field effect ZONE 2 CODE SET ■ Enjoying Hi-Fi Sound Quality SOURCE RECEIVER (Pure Direct mode) HDMI 1 2 3 4 Use Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct mode is enabled, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. J1 AUDIO 5 1 V-AUX 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER FM [ A ] Press gPURE DIRECT to turn Pure Direct mode on. J2 AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING To disable Pure Direct mode, press gPURE DIRECT again. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 INPUT g ■ Enjoying enhanced compression artifacts (Compressed Music Enhancer mode) Compressed Music Enhancer mode improves the sound enhancer near to the original depth and width of compression artifacts. J3 This mode can be used along with any other DSP modes. Press gENHANCER to turn Compressed Music Enhancer mode on. ENT To disable Compressed Music Enhancer mode, press gENHANCER again. MUTE g ENHANCER g PURE DIRECT J 1 : The following features are disabled in Pure Direct mode. • sound program, tone control, YPAO PEQ, and Adaptive DRC • displaying and operating the OPTION menu and Setup menu J 2 : While Pure Direct mode is on, the front panel display screen turns off in order to reduce noise. When turning Pure Direct mode off, the screen returns on. J 3 : However, Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not available in the following audio: • Signals of which sampling rate is over 48kHz • High Definition stream En 44 PLAYBACK Enjoying the desired sound field effect Sound programs Action Game This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing, fighting games and FPS games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer mode for a more dynamic sound field. Roleplaying Game This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects and dialog from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer mode for a more dynamic sound field. Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. in the table indicates the sound program for CINEMA DSP. ■ Category: MOVIE Sound programs optimized for viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, and games. Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of an ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range providing everything from very small sound effects to large, impressive sounds. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimal space to offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium. En 45 PLAYBACK Enjoying the desired sound field effect ■ Category: MUSIC ■ Category: SUR.DEC (Surround decode mode) This sound field is suitable when listening to music sources such as CDs. Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel audio sources in up to 7-channels using a surround decoder. Hall in Munich Hall in Vienna This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. This is an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2-channels. When multi-channel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2-channels and output from the front left and right speakers. 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback multi-channel sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2-channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. q Pro Logic Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of audio sources. q PLIIx Movie / q PLII Movie Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for movies. J1 q PLIIx Music / q PLII Music Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for music. J1 q PLIIx Game / q PLII Game Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for games. J1 Neo:6 Cinema Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for music. J 1 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions: • When “Surround Back” is set to “None” (☞p. 78). • When headphones are connected. En 46 PLAYBACK MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET Configuring the settings of this unit while viewing the TV screen SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 1 V-AUX This unit features a sophisticated on-screen display (OSD) that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the OSD, you can view information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. Visual guidance simplifies operations for menus. 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET MUSIC SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD ■ Selecting an input source 1 Use kCursor B / C to select “Input” and press kENTER. TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE Basic operations via the TV screen display A TV screen is required to display the ON SCREEN or OPTION menu. Refer to “Connecting a TV monitor” for instructions on connecting a TV screen (☞p. 22). • Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu screen. Press kRETURN repeatedly to close the ON SCREEN menu. • In addition to selecting an input source, detailed settings for each input source can be configured. Refer to “Configuring input sources (Input menu)” (☞p. 65) for details. RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE This section describes basic operations for configuring “Input,” “Scene” and “Sound Program” using the OSD. Press jON SCREEN. The ON SCREEN menu is displayed on the TV screen. Input source icons are displayed at the bottom of the TV screen. REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 2 Use kCursor D / E to select a Input source press kENTER. The input source is selected. ENT INPUT MUTE j ON SCREEN k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER k RETURN En 47 PLAYBACK MAIN Configuring the settings of this unit while viewing the TV screen ZONE 2 CODE SET ■ Selecting a scene SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Selecting a sound program HDMI 1 2 3 4 1 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER Use kCursor B / C to select “Scene” and press kENTER. 1 Use kCursor B / C to select “Sound Program” and press kENTER. Menus can be operated and the status of this unit confirmed from the following three main displays. • ON SCREEN menu (☞p. 65) • OPTION menu (☞p. 49) • Content window (☞p. 53) [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET These menus and status features can be used to configure more various functions in addition to selecting “Input,” “Scene” and “Sound Program.” Refer to each references for details on menus and status. TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD NOTES TV CD RADIO Scene icons are displayed at the bottom of the TV screen. OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE Sound program icons are displayed at the bottom of the TV screen. k 2 Use kCursor D / E to select a scene and press kENTER. The scene is selected. 2 Use kCursor D / E to select a sound program and press kENTER. The sound program is selected. REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT INPUT MUTE k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER k RETURN • Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu screen. Press kRETURN repeatedly to close the ON SCREEN menu. • Refer to “Changing input settings with a single key (SCENE function)” (☞p. 41) for details on the default scene settings. • Detailed SCENE function settings can be edited. Refer to “Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu)” (☞p. 69) for details. • Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu screen. Press kRETURN repeatedly to close the ON SCREEN menu. • Refer to “Enjoying the desired sound field effect” (☞p. 41) for various sound programs. • You can configure the detailed settings for each sound program. Refer to “Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu)” (☞p. 71) for details. En 48 PLAYBACK MAIN ZONE 2 Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER This unit has a unique OPTION menu for each input source. OPTION menus can be used to enable features such as volume trim for compatible input sources or to display audio/video data. HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER FM [ A ] OPTION menu display and setup OPTION menu operations are displayed on the front panel display or TV screen. TV display is used here to explain operation. AM PRESET INFO d TUNING MEMORY ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN r DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU k 1 2 Use dInput selector to select an input source to which options will be applied. Press rOPTION. The OPTION menu is displayed. 3 Use kCursor B / C to select the desired setting and press kENTER. 5 Press rOPTION to close the OPTION menu. Parameters of the selected item are displayed. 4 Use kCursor B / C / D / E to select the desired item (or enable a function). The keys on the remote control may not respond for a few seconds after the OPTION menu is closed. Should this occur, select the input source again. • Press kRETURN to display the previous screen or close the OPTION menu. • The OPTION menu may close automatically when some functions are enabled. OPTION menu MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT INPUT MUTE d Input selector k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER k RETURN r OPTION The displayed OPTION menu settings differ depending on the input source. For more information, refer to the “OPTION menu” on the next page. En 49 PLAYBACK Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu) OPTION menu DOCK (iPod) The following items are provided for each input source. J1 HDMI1-5 AV1-4 AV5-6 AUDIO1-2 V-AUX TUNER Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Dialogue Lift Extended Surround Volume Trim Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Dialogue Lift Extended Surround Volume Trim Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Dialogue Lift Volume Trim Tone Control Adaptive DRC Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Dialogue Lift Volume Trim Shuffle J2 Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Dialogue Lift Volume Trim Pairing Connect/ Disconnect MULTI CH Volume Trim Volume Trim Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Dialogue Lift Extended Surround Volume Trim Tone Control Adaptive DRC CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Dialogue Lift Volume Trim J 1 : When “Tone Control,” “Adaptive DRC,” “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode,” “Dialogue Lift,” or “Extended Surround” is adjusted for an input source, the same value is applied to other input sources and “ALL” is displayed on the front panel display. When settings specific to a certain input source are selected, the input source name is displayed on the front panel display. If the name of the input source has been changed (☞p. 66), the original name of the All input sources except MULTI CH You can adjust the balance of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired tone. Adjustable range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Adjustment increments 0.5 dB • The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be set separately. Set the headphone tone control with the headphones connected. • TONE CONTROL on the front panel can also be used (☞p. 40). CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Dialogue Lift Tone Control Input source: Repeat J2 DOCK (Bluetooth) ■ Adjusting high/low-frequency sound input source is displayed. J 2 : Not available for Yamaha iPod wireless receiver. En 50 PLAYBACK Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu) ■ Auto-adjusting the sound level to make even low volumes more audible ■ Adjusts the vertical position of dialogues ■ Selecting the 5.1-channel signal playback method Dialogue Lift Adaptive DRC Input source: Input source: All input sources except MULTI CH Adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level (from minimum to maximum). When you play audio at night or at low volumes, it is a good idea to set parameter to “On.” J1 On Adjusts the dynamic range automatically. Off (Default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically. Extended Surround All input sources except MULTI CH Adjusts the vertical position of center sound such as dialogues when presence speakers are used. Increasing this parameter raises the position. Input source: Selects whether to reproduce 5.1-channel input signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back speakers are used. Auto (Default) The ideal dialog position Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if a flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. q PLIIx Movie If the dialog seems to come out from a lower position than the video monitor screen, increase this parameter. Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when two surround back speakers are connected. q PLIIx Music Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when one or two surround back speakers are connected. EX/ES Automatically selects the most suitable decoder for input signals whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1-channel. Off Always reproduces original channels whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present. When “On” is selected, the dynamic range is adjusted as follows. On Off Input Level Volume: low Output Level Output Level If the volume level is low, the dynamic range is narrow. If the volume level is high, the dynamic range is wide. On Off Input Level Volume: high ■ Enjoying more spatial sound fields CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Input source: All input sources except MULTI CH When CINEMA DSP 3D is enabled, set whether to use sound programs in CINEMA DSP 3D mode (☞p. 43). HDMI1-5, AV1-4, V-AUX J2 Move up to the ideal dialog position “0” (default) corresponds to the lowest position and “5” to the highest position. • “Dialogue Lift” can be adjusted only when the presence speakers are available. • You cannot move the dialog position lower than the default setting. J 1 : “Adaptive DRC” is also effective when you use headphones. J 2 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when “Audio Return Channel” is on, and the input source is used for “TV Audio Input.” En 51 PLAYBACK Configuring settings specific to an individual input source (OPTION menu) ■ Adjusting volume between input sources Volume Trim Input source: ■ Repeat playback with iPod/iPhone Repeat Input source: All Reduces any change in volume when switching between input sources by correcting volume differences in each input source. You can adjust this parameter for each input source. DOCK (iPod) J1 Plays songs or albums repeatedly. When the repeat function is enabled, “ (One)” or “ (All)” appears on the TV screen. Off The repeat function is turned off. -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB One Plays a song back repeatedly. Default setting 0.0 dB All When all songs have completed playback, returns to the start and repeats playback. Adjustment increments 0.5 dB steps Adjustable range ■ Shuffle playback with iPod/iPhone ■ Connect / Disconnect Bluetooth component Connect Shuffle Input source: DOCK (iPod) J1 Plays back songs or albums in random order. When the shuffle function is enabled, “ ” appears on the TV screen. Off The shuffle function is turned off. Songs Plays songs back in random order. Albums Plays albums back in random order. Disconnect Input source: DOCK (Bluetooth) Switches communication with a Bluetooth component on and off (☞p. 63). ■ Pairing Bluetooth component Pairing Input source: DOCK (Bluetooth) Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component (☞p. 63). J 1 : Not available for Yamaha iPod wireless receiver. En 52 PLAYBACK MAIN ZONE 2 Confirming and operating input sources from the Content window CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER When DOCK or TUNER is selected, the Content window is displayed on the TV screen. Playback style for iPod and functions for FM/AM tuner can be set in the Content window. HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK d TUNER [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP A TV screen is required to display the Content window. Refer to “Connecting a TV monitor” for instructions on connecting a TV monitor (☞p. 22). STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT Displaying the Content window on the TV screen SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE Press dDOCK or dTUNER to display the Content window. k The Content window consists of two main displays, the Now playing view and the Content browse view. l 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Buttons to operate each input source are displayed here. These buttons vary depending on the selected input. For details on operations for each input, see the following. – FM/AM tuner (☞p. 56) – iPod (☞p. 59) • In the Now playing view, press kENTER and use kCursor B / C to select the button. Then press kENTER to execute the selection. • In the Content browse view, press kCursor E and use kCursor B / C to select the button. Then press kENTER to execute the selection. • Press kRETURN repeatedly to exit from the operation. Content browse view or lDISPLAY or lDISPLAY Now playing view Below is the example of the Now playing view for TUNER. Switching the display between the Now playing view and the Content browse view REC 1 c Screen button area ENT You can switch the display between the Now playing view and the Content browse view by the following methods. • Press lDISPLAY to cycle between the Now playing INPUT MUTE d DOCK d TUNER k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER k RETURN l DISPLAY a b c a Image display Icon for each input source or album art is displayed. b Information display Information on the current input source is displayed. view and the Content browse view. • In the Now playing view, press kENTER and use kCursor B / C to select the icon. Then press kENTER to switch to the Content browse view. • In the Content browse view, press kCursor E and use kCursor B / C to select the icon. Then press kENTER to switch to the Now playing view. En 53 PLAYBACK MAIN ZONE 2 FM/AM tuning CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 When using the FM/AM tuner, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antenna connected to this unit to get the best reception. 4 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK AV TUNER FM d [ A ] AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP e STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT 1 2 SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning) Press dTUNER to switch to the tuner input. Press eFM or eAM to select a band to receive. DISPLAY 3 Use eTUN./CH H / I to set a frequency to receive. eTUN./CH H Increases the frequency. Press and hold this key for longer than a second to search automatically for a station on a higher frequency than the current one. J1 eTUN./CH I Decreases the frequency. Press and hold this key for longer than a second to search automatically for a station on a lower frequency than the current one. J1 Lights up when a broadcast Lights up when a stereo is received from a station broadcast is received STEREO TUNED VOL. VOL. TOP MENU POP-UP MENU FM87.5 MHz MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 L SL SBL SW C STEREO TUNED R SR SBR SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR FM98.5 MHz ■ Entering a frequency number m In normal tuning mode, use the mNumeric keys to enter a frequency. Leave the decimal point out when entering a number. J2 For example, enter as follows to select a station on 98.5 MHz. ENT INPUT MUTE 9 8 ■ Registering stations manually (Manual Preset) Select stations manually and register them as presets individually. 1 Tune in to the station you want to register, referring to “Selecting a frequency for reception (Normal tuning).” 2 Use one of the following methods to register the station you are currently receiving. ■ Registering to a preset number to which no station is registered Press eMEMORY for 3 seconds or longer. The station will be registered automatically to the lowest open preset number (or the next number after the one registered most recently). MEMORY VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.5 MHz SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Registered frequencies 5 d TUNER e FM e AM e MEMORY e TUN./CH H / I m Numeric keys J 1 : When searching for a station, release the key once the search has started. J 2 : “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the frequency entered is correct. En 54 PLAYBACK MAIN FM/AM tuning ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Designating a preset number for registration HDMI 1 2 3 5 V-AUX 1 4 AUDIO Press eMEMORY once, to display “Manual Preset” on the front panel display. After a small wait, the preset number that the station has been registered to will appear. 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING e ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT TV CD VOL. STEREO TUNED 01:Empty SCENE BD DVD The newly registered frequency 985 MUSIC SLEEP Preset number SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN Blinks VOLUME ENTER RETURN Press ePRESET F / G to select the preset number to register the station to, and then press eMEMORY to register. DISPLAY TOP MENU Empty, or the frequency registered most previously POP-UP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 m 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 To select a registered station, press ePRESET F / G to select the preset number of the station. J1 ENT INPUT MUTE e MEMORY e PRESET F / G m Numeric keys J 1 : To select a station by selecting a preset number, use the mNumeric keys to enter the preset number of the station you want to listen. When an invalid number is entered, “Wrong Num.” appears on the front panel display. Check that you have entered the correct number. En 55 PLAYBACK MAIN FM/AM tuning ZONE 2 CODE SET Confirming and operating the FM/AM tuner from the Content window SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX 1 2 AUDIO Screen buttons on the Now playing view To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER. Manual Tuning AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER FM [ A ] AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO The station currently received can be confirmed from the d menu displayed on the TV screen. Various FM/AM tuner operations can be performed from the Content window rather than controls on the front panel display. The Content window is displayed when dTUNER is pressed. You can operate the FM/AM tuner from the Now playing view or the Content browse view. OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN ■ Operating from the Now playing view k DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by specifying its frequency. MUTE d 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 c e g f ENT You can call preset stations. PRESET - Selects the previous preset number. PRESET + Selects the next preset number. Preset -8 Returns the previous page. FM Switches a band to FM. Preset +8 Goes to the next page. AM Switches a band to AM. Direct Tuning - Decreases the frequency. Selects a station directly by entering the preset number. Tuning + Increases the frequency. Memory Auto - Automatically searches for a station on a lower frequency than the current station. Registers the station currently received as a preset station. Up to 40 FM/AM stations can be registered. Auto + Automatically searches for a station on a higher frequency than the current station. a b REC Preset Select Direct Selects the frequency manually. Memory Registers the station currently received as a preset station. Up to 40 FM/AM stations can be registered. Utility FM Mode Selects “Stereo” or “Mono” when receiving the FM station. Scroll Switches the scroll target. INPUT Browse MUTE a Tuned indicator b d TUNER k Cursor B / C k ENTER c d e f g Lights up when a station is received. Stereo indicator Lights up when a stereo broadcast is received. When “FM Mode” is set to “Mono,” the indicator does not light. Preset number The selected preset number is displayed. Band The selected band (FM or AM) is displayed. Frequency The frequency currently received is displayed. Frequency guide The frequency currently received is displayed as a cursor on the bar. Screen button area Buttons for available operations are displayed. See “Screen buttons on the Now playing view” for details. Switches the display to the Content browse view. Continues to the next page En 56 PLAYBACK MAIN FM/AM tuning ZONE 2 CODE SET ■ Operating from the Content browse SOURCE RECEIVER view HDMI 1 2 3 5 V-AUX 1 4 Now Playing Switches the display to the Now playing view. AUDIO 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER a [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC b PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO a Preset station list OPTION ON SCREEN The list of preset stations is displayed. VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU k b Screen button area Buttons for available operations are displayed. See “Screen buttons on the Content browse view” for details. MUTE Screen buttons on the Content browse view REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then select the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER. Utility INPUT MUTE k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER Auto Preset Detects stations with a strong signal and automatically registers up to 40 stations, beginning with the next number after the current number. Clear Preset Clears registration of the preset station currently selected. Clear All Preset Clears registration of all preset stations. 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Scrolls the list to the next or previous page. En 57 PLAYBACK MAIN ZONE 2 Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER Once you have connected a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-12, sold separately) to this unit, you can enjoy playback of your iPod/iPhone using the remote control supplied with this unit. When playing back from an iPod/iPhone, you can also use the compressed music enhancer sound programs to give compressed audio formats such as MP3 a sharper, more dynamic sound (☞p. 44). A Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10, sold separately) can also be connected to this unit to play back iPod/iPhone with wireless connection. HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 1 V-AUX 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER d • When playing back iPod/iPhone with wired connection [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING f Refer to “Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock.” ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN • When playing back iPod/iPhone with wireless connection Controlling an iPod™/iPhone™ Switch this unit on and place your iPod/iPhone in the dock. The unit is now ready for playback. DOCK After setting your iPod/iPhone in your dock, just press dDOCK to switch to DOCK input to play your iPod/ iPhone. The iPod/iPhone can be operated in the following two ways. VOL. iPodconnected SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Refer to “Playing back iPod™/iPhone™ with wireless connection” (☞p. 61). DOCK VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE COMPONENT VIDEO Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock PR PB VIDEO Y REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 INPUT MUTE d DOCK f INFO ENT Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to the operating instructions of the iPod universal dock for information on how to connect your iPod/iPhone. • iPod touch, iPod (4th Gen/5th Gen/Classic), iPod nano, iPod mini, iPhone, iPhone 3G, and iPhone 3GS are supported (As of March 2010). • When connecting iPhone, iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS, use a YDS-12. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod/iPhone. • Some functions may not be available for some Yamaha iPod universal dock models. This explanation focuses on the YDS-12. Yamaha iPod Universal Dock OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 O (CD) Locate the dock at the distance as far as from the unit. When this unit is in standby mode, iPod/iPhone can be charged automatically (☞p. 67). Menu browse control: Plays the iPod/iPhone while viewing the menu displayed on the TV. Refer to “Playing iPod/iPhone from the menu screen (Menu browse control)” (☞p. 59). Simple remote control: Plays audio and video through this unit while viewing the menu displayed on the iPod/iPhone screen. Refer to “Operating basic playback functions via the remote control (Simple remote control)” (☞p. 61). • Song information (artist, album, song) is displayed on the front panel. Press fINFO repeatedly to display subsequent/previous information. • The Yamaha logo is displayed on the iPod screen when iPod stationed in the iPod universal dock (does not apply to the iPod touch or iPhone). • Manual control of the iPod/iPhone is not possible while the iPod stationed in the iPod universal dock. CAUTION To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode before connecting an iPod universal dock. En 58 PLAYBACK MAIN Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ZONE 2 CODE SET Playing iPod/iPhone from the menu screen (Menu browse control) SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 10 Pages Up ■ Operating from the Now playing view AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER FM [ A ] AM PRESET INFO 10 Pages Down The iPod/iPhone can be operated from the menu displayed on the TV screen. d You can operate the iPod/iPhone from the Now playing view or the Content browse view. MEMORY view ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE MUSIC SLEEP 1 Page Up ■ Operating from the Content browse TUNING 1 Page Down STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT Scrolls the list to the next or previous page. SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU a b k d c e MUTE Now Playing Switches the display to the Now playing view. Close REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT INPUT a b c d MUTE e Returns to the video playback, turning off the menu display. Input name / List name Menu items Input icon Screen button area Buttons for available operations are displayed. See “Screen buttons on the Content browse view” for details. Current menu number / Number of all menu items 1 2 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Press kCursor B / C to select the content (music or video) that you want to play, and press kENTER. J1 Screen buttons on the Content browse view d DOCK k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER To use these buttons, first press kCursor E. Then select the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER. a b c Goes to 10 pages forwards or backwards. 3 Press kCursor B / C to select iPod/iPhone menu items, and press kENTER to play. e f d h k a b c d e f g h i j k g i j Repeat icon Shuffle icon Play icon Album image Artist name Album title Screen button area Buttons for available operations are displayed. See “Screen buttons on the Now playing view” for details. Song title Remaining time Progress bar Elapsed time Screen buttons on the Now playing view To use these buttons, first press kENTER. Then select the desired one with kCursor B / C and kENTER. The Now playing view appears during playback. J 1 : Videos will not be displayed when your iPod or Yamaha iPod universal dock do not support the browser function for browsing video files. En 59 PLAYBACK MAIN Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER Play Control HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX 1 2 Operates the basic playback functions of iPod/iPhone. AUDIO AV 1 2 3 4 p (Play) Starts playback. 5 6 MULTI DOCK s (Stop) Stops playback. e (Pause) Stops playback temporarily. b (Skip -) Skips to the beginning of the currently playing song. Press kENTER at the beginning of the song to skip to a previous song. a (Skip +) Skips to the beginning of the next song. w (Scan -) Searches backwards. f (Scan +) Searches forwards. TUNER [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN k DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE Scroll Switches the scroll target (artist name, album name, or song name). REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT Browse Switches the display to the Content browse view. INPUT Close MUTE Returns to the video playback, turning off the menu display. k ENTER En 60 PLAYBACK MAIN Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ZONE 2 CODE SET Operating basic playback functions via the remote control (Simple remote control) SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP d Use the following remote control keys to operate (playback, stop, skip, etc.) your iPod/iPhone. Press lREC to enable the Simple remote control. Press lREC again to return to the Menu browse control. STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO Switches to the DOCK (iPod) input. kCursor B / C Move the cursor up and down to different fields. kRETURN Returns to the previous menu. OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN k DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU l 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 10 INPUT MUTE d DOCK k Cursor B / C k ENTER k RETURN l REC ls le lp lw lf lb la kENTER Enables the selected menu. lw Searches backwards while held down. lf Searches forwards while held down. lb Skips to the beginning of the currently playing song. Pressing repeatedly skips one song backwards with each press. la Skips to the beginning of the next song. ls Stops playback. le Switches between playback and pause. lp Switches between playback and pause. MUTE REC 9 dDOCK ENT Playing back iPod™/iPhone™ with wireless connection A Yamaha iPod wireless system (YID-W10, sold separately) can be connected to this unit to play back iPod/iPhone with wireless connection. The iPod/iPhone can be used as the remote control. J1 Place the iPod/iPhone in the wireless transmitter. Setup is complete. DOCK Use the dedicated cable to connect the wireless receiver to the DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. Refer to the operating instructions of the YID-W10 for more information. CAUTION To prevent accidents, unplug the power cable of this unit before connecting the iPod wireless receiver. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR iPodconnected ■ Connecting the Yamaha iPod wireless transmitter and playing back iPod/iPhone VOL. DOCK COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Yamaha iPod wireless receiver VIDEO Y OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 O (CD) 12 A 3 B Position the wireless receiver as far as possible from the unit. When this unit is in standby mode, iPod/iPhone can be charged automatically, if “Standby Charge” is set to “Auto” (☞p. 67) or “Power & Input” of “iPod Interlock” is set to “On” (☞p. 68). J 1 : Video signals cannot be transmitted wirelessly. En 61 PLAYBACK MAIN Playing back tunes from your iPod™/iPhone™ ZONE 2 CODE SET Use iPod/iPhone to start playback. SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 When “iPod Interlock” → “Volume” in the Input menu is set to “Off,” the volume of this unit is not adjusted when iPod/iPhone volume controls are adjusted (☞p. 68). AUDIO 5 1 V-AUX 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER d [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING CAUTION ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE • Adjusting volume control on the iPod/iPhone also adjusts the volume (max 0.0dB) of this unit. MUSIC SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT • This unit, which is placed in the main zone, functions as follows when iPod/iPhone controls are used to start playback. – The input source switches to DOCK (iPod) when this unit is turned on. – When this unit is in standby mode when iPod/iPhone playback starts, this unit turns on and the input source switches to DOCK (iPod). J1 • This unit automatically enters standby mode when the following operations are performed. – iPod/iPhone is removed from the YID-W10 – iPod/iPhone is not operated for a while after playback is stopped When iPod/iPhone controls are used to adjust volume, playback volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to this unit or the speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, immediately remove the iPod/iPhone from the Yamaha iPod universal dock. “Max Volume” can be used to specify the maximum volume level to prevent excessively loud playback (☞p. 81). INPUT MUTE d DOCK • Pressing dDOCK also switches the input source to DOCK (iPod). • When a menu is operated, this function is not activated. • When “iPod Interlock” → “Power & Input” in the Input menu is set to “Off,” the power and the input source do not switch automatically (☞p. 68). J 1 : This function is also activated when sound of application is reproduced or ringtone is received. En 62 PLAYBACK MAIN ZONE 2 Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as the YBA-10, sold separately) to this unit and enjoy wireless playback from Bluetooth-compatible portable music players. J1 HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 1 V-AUX 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET e MUSIC SLEEP When playing back from a Bluetooth component for the first time, you must first pair the devices (register the Bluetooth components). When establishing a wireless connection you must carry out pairing on both this unit and on the Bluetooth component. TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE NOTE d STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT Connecting a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver Pairing Bluetooth™ components SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN Use the dedicated cable to connect the dock to the r DOCK jack on the rear panel of this unit. The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection will be k complete when this unit is turned on. DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE REC DOCK Be sure to carry out pairing when connecting a Bluetooth component for the first time, or when settings have been deleted. Refer to the operating instructions of your Bluetooth component as necessary when carrying out pairing. The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When the ninth device is paired, the pairing settings for the device which has not been used for the longest period of time will be deleted. COMPONENT VIDEO 1 2 3 6 7 Press rOPTION to display the OPTION menu and use kCursor B / C to select “Pairing.” OPTION VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Pairing 4 Press kENTER to start pairing. DOCK VOL. Searching... 4 PR 5 3 SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR 8 PB 9 0 10 INPUT ENT Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver VIDEO Y MUTE OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 O (CD) d DOCK e MEMORY k Cursor B / C k ENTER k RETURN r OPTION 1 2 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. • To cancel pairing, press kRETURN. • You can also press and hold eMEMORY on the front panel to begin pairing. Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair with and set it to pairing mode. Continues to the next page CAUTION To prevent accidents, switch this unit to standby mode before connecting a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. J 1 : This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile. En 63 PLAYBACK MAIN Playing back tunes from Bluetooth™ components ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER 5 HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX 1 2 AUDIO AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER FM AM MEMORY PRESET d TUNING 6 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE When the device is recognized, it will appear in the Bluetooth component list, for example as “YBA-10 YAMAHA.” [ A ] INFO MUSIC SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT Make sure the Bluetooth component recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the Bluetooth component list, and enter a pass key “0000” into the Bluetooth component. J1 Using Bluetooth™ components When pairing is complete, perform the following procedure to achieve a wireless connection between this unit and the Bluetooth component. When the wireless connection is complete, Bluetooth components can be played back. Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless connection is established automatically or by operating the Bluetooth components. In that case, it is not necessary to carry out the following procedure. SCENE BD DVD TV CD RETURN r VOLUME ENTER When pairing occurs correctly RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN k DOCK Completed VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 1 2 Press dDOCK to switch to the DOCK input. Press rOPTION to display the OPTION menu. 3 Use kCursor B / C to select “Connect” and press kENTER. J2 When wireless connection is complete DOCK VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR BTconnected “Not found” is displayed when there is an error connecting. Check that the following conditions have been satisfied, and try to establish a wireless connection again. • Both this unit and the Bluetooth component are paired. • The Bluetooth component is switched on. • The Bluetooth component is within 10 m of the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. 4 Operate the Bluetooth component for playback. To disconnect a wireless connection, repeat the same steps, and in step 3, select “Disconnect.” ENT INPUT MUTE d DOCK k Cursor B / C k ENTER r OPTION J 1 : Depending on Bluetooth components, wireless connection is carried out right after the pairing. In this case, “BT connected” is displayed instead of “Completed.” J 2 : “Disconnect” is displayed when a Bluetooth component has been connected. En 64 SETUP MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET Configuring input sources (Input menu) SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 Settings, such as the name of an input source or the icon displayed for an input source can be changed from the Input menu. 4 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK AV TUNER Configuring input sources The name of an input source and its icon, as well as other input source settings, can be changed from the Input menu displayed on the TV screen. [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING 3 Use kCursor D / E to select an input source to be configured and press kCursor B. 4 Use kCursor B / C to select an item and press kENTER. 6 Press jON SCREEN to close the menu. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP 1 STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO j VOLUME k Press jON SCREEN. OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT 2 Use kCursor B / C to select “Input” and press kENTER. INPUT MUTE j ON SCREEN k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER k RETURN If the selected item contains additional items, use kCursor B / C to select the desired item and press kENTER. 5 Use kCursor B / C to adjust the setting. Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu screen. Repeat steps 4 to 5 to adjust multiple settings. En 65 SETUP MAIN Configuring input sources (Input menu) ZONE 2 CODE SET ■ Changing an input source name or Input menu SOURCE RECEIVER icon HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX 1 2 AUDIO HDMI1-5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER Audio In Decoder Mode Enhancer [ A ] AV1-2 FM Rename/ Icon Select AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING Rename/ Icon Select Audio In Decoder Mode Enhancer Enhancer 3 Press kENTER, and then press kCursor B / C / D / E to edit the new input name. 4 Press kENTER and press kCursor C to select “OK” and press kENTER. Rename/Icon Select Input source: HDMI1-5, AV1-6, AUDIO1-2, V-AUX, DOCK (iPod), DOCK (Bluetooth), MULTI CH Changes the input source name (up to nine characters) and icon displayed on the front panel display or TV screen. Confirm the new input name. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT AV3-4 Rename/ Icon Select Decoder Mode AV5-6 Rename/ Icon Select Enhancer AUDIO1-2 Rename/ Icon Select Enhancer V-AUX Rename/ Icon Select Decoder Mode Enhancer TUNER Enhancer DOCK (iPod) Rename/ Icon Select Enhancer Standby Charge SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN k 1 Use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Rename/Icon Select” and press kENTER. 2 Use kCursor D / E to choose an icon and press kCursor C. DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 iPod Interlock J1 ENT INPUT DOCK (Bluetooth) Rename/ Icon Select Enhancer MULTI CH Rename/ Icon Select Video Out MUTE k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER J 1 : Not available when playing back iPod/iPhone with wired connection. En 66 SETUP Configuring input sources (Input menu) ■ Combining HDMI/AV1-2 input source video and audio ■ Setting the format of digital audio signals Decoder Mode Audio In Input source: Input source: HDMI1-5, AV1-2 Combines video from HDMI or AV input sources with analog/ digital audio inputs in situations such as: – an playback device is connected with an HDMI cable but cannot transmit audio through HDMI – an playback device with component video output and analog audio output (such as certain game consoles) are connected to the system To change assignments, select an input source (HDMI1-5 or AV1-2) as the video input first, and then select audio input jacks in this menu. Set as follows according on the desired combination of audio input jacks. Audio inputs Settings method Optical digital audio input Select AV1 or AV4. Connect the external component audio cable to the optical digital jack for the selected input. Coaxial digital audio input Select AV2 or AV3. Connect the external component audio cable to the coaxial digital jack for the selected input. Analog audio input HDMI1-5, AV1-4, V-AUX J1 Sets the format of digital audio to playback to DTS. For example, if the format is not automatically detected correctly even during playback of DTS format audio, this item can be used to set the playback format to DTS. Auto (Default) The audio format is automatically selected to match the format of the input audio. DTS Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not reproduced. ■ Selecting the sound program suitable for listening to compressed audio, such as MP3 Enhancer Input source: All input sources other than MULTI CH Turns on/off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. Off (Default) Turns off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. On Turns on the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. ■ Charging an iPod™/iPhone™ in standby mode Standby Charge Input source: DOCK (iPod) Charges an iPod/iPhone stationed in the iPod universal dock or iPod wireless receiver while the receiver is in standby mode. Auto (Default) This unit charges iPod/iPhone when this unit is in standby mode. While charging an iPod/iPhone, the HDMI Through/iPod Charge indicator lights. When HDMI Through function is off, the indicator goes out after the charging is complete. Off This unit does not charge iPod/iPhone. Select one of AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2. Connect the external component audio cable to the audio jack for the selected input. J 1 : AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 are also available when “Audio Return Channel” is on, and the source is used for “TV Audio Input.” En 67 SETUP Configuring input sources (Input menu) ■ Setting the interlock functions with iPod/ iPhone (when a Yamaha iPod wireless receiver is connected) iPod Interlock Input source: ■ Outputting a video signal input from another input source while playing a multi-channel audio signal Video Out DOCK (iPod) This unit can be automatically operated in conjunction with operations on iPod when the iPod wireless receiver is connected to this unit. Power & Input Starting playback of iPod/iPhone turns on this unit and switches the input source to DOCK (iPod) automatically when this item is set to “On.” This unit automatically enters standby mode when iPod/iPhone is not operated for a while after playback is stopped. This interlock function is disable with “Off.” Volume Adjusting the volume on the iPod/iPhone also adjusts the volume of this unit when this item is set to “On.” This interlock function is disable with “Off.” When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, a video signal input from another terminal can be output to the video monitor. For example, even if an audio and video component such as a DVD player that does not support a multi-channel digital audio output, the video signal can be output to the video monitor while reproducing a multi-channel analog audio signal. En 68 SETUP MAIN ZONE 2 Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER The SCENE function (☞p. 41) can be edited from the SCENE menu displayed on the TV screen. HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 Editing a scene AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER Various settings, such as the name of a scene or the icon displayed for a scene, can be changed from the SCENE menu. [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP 1 STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT 3 Use kCursor D / E to select a scene to be edited and press kCursor B. 5 Use kCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the setting. Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu screen. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust multiple settings. Press jON SCREEN. SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO j 6 OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN k 4 DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Press jON SCREEN to close the menu. Use kCursor B / C to select an item and press kENTER. MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT 2 Use kCursor B / C to select “Scene” and press kENTER. INPUT MUTE j ON SCREEN k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER k RETURN When the Utility is available in the selected item, use kCursor B / C to select the desired item and press kENTER. En 69 SETUP MAIN Editing the SCENE function (SCENE menu) ZONE 2 CODE SET SCENE menu SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK AUDIO SCENE1 AV TUNER FM AM MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING SCENE2 Save Load Rename/Icon Select Reset ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO SCENE3 OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN Save Load Rename/Icon Select Reset k DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU Registers settings applied with “Setting.” CANCEL Cancels settings applied with “Setting.” DETAIL Specifies “SCENE IR” function and displays settings registered with the SCENE function in detail. Foe more information, see “SCENE IR” and “Detail” at right. Save Load Rename/Icon Select Reset [ A ] INFO Ok 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT INPUT MUTE ■ Registering SCENE function settings Save k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER Registers adjustments to SCENE menu setting for each SCENE. ■ Adjusting settings to be registered on the SCENE function Load Loads input sources or sound programs that have been registered with the SCENE function, or specifies whether or not an external component registered as the input source is automatically turned on when a scene is selected. 2 3 Use kCursor D / E to choose an icon and press kCursor C. Specify whether or not a Yamaha BD/DVD player or CD player connected to this unit turns on automatically. Off Disables the SCENE IR function. Yamaha BD/DVD Player1 Select this when a Yamaha BD/DVD player is connected to this unit. Yamaha BD/DVD Player2 Select this if the player dose not turn on when “Yamaha BD/DVD Player1” is selected. Yamaha CD Player Select this when a Yamaha CD player is connected to this unit. SCENE4 Save Load Rename/Icon Select Reset Use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Rename/Icon Select” and press kENTER. SCENE IR MUTE REC 1 4 Press kENTER, and then press kCursor B / C / D / E to edit the new scene name. Press kENTER and press kCursor C to select “OK” and press kENTER. Confirm the new scene name. Detail Display details of settings registered with the SCENE function. ■ Resetting a scene Reset Input Displays “Input” setting registered with the SCENE function. Mode Displays the sound program registered with the SCENE function. Enhancer Displays the setting of “Enhancer” registered with the SCENE function. Restores all settings to their default values. ■ Changing a scene name and icon Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front panel display or TV screen. En 70 SETUP MAIN ZONE 2 Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER Sound effects can be adjusted from the Sound Program menu. HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 Editing sound programs AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER FM Adjust sound field elements (sound program parameters) to achieve sound effects suited to the acoustics of audio/ video sources or rooms if you are not satisfied with the results achieved with default sound program settings. Follow the procedure described below to adjust sound program parameters. [ A ] AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT 3 Use kCursor D / E to select a sound program and press kCursor B. Sound programs TV CD RADIO j VOLUME k OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU 1 2 Press jON SCREEN. MUTE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Press jON SCREEN to close the Sound Program menu. ■ To initialize sound program parameters Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Sound Program” and press kENTER. 4 REC Use kCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the parameter and press kRETURN. J1 When there are multiple parameters in the selected sound program, repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust other parameters. 6 SCENE BD DVD 5 Use kCursor B / C to select a parameter and press kENTER. To set the parameters of the sound program back to their default settings, use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Reset” in step 4 and press kENTER. When the following message is displayed, select “OK” and press kENTER to initialize. Sound program parameters ENT INPUT MUTE j ON SCREEN k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER k RETURN Choices To cancel initializing, select “CANCEL” and press kENTER when the message above is displayed. J 1 : An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the sound field parameter name displayed on the TV when you change the parameter from its default setting. En 71 SETUP Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu) -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB Default setting 0 dB Adjust “DSP Level” as follows: Surround Room Size Surround Back Initial Delay Surround Back Room Size Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the apparent size of the sound field by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound field seems to the listener. Adjustable range 1 to 99 ms (Initial Delay) 1 to 49 ms (Surround Initial Delay and Surround Back Initial Delay) • The effect sound is too soft. • There are no differences between effects of the sound programs. → Increase the effect level. • The sound is dull. • The sound field effect is added too much. → Reduce the effect level. Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. Adjustable range Source sound 0.1 to 2.0 Level Level Early reflections Time Delay Source sound Time Time Delay Delay Audio source Time Time Time Audio source Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Early reflections Level Adjustable range Surround Initial Delay Level Change the effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking the sound effect. Room Size Level DSP Level Initial Delay Level CINEMA DSP parameters Large value = 99 ms When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding room size parameters likewise. Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. En 72 SETUP Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu) Reverb Time Surround Liveness Surround Back Liveness Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of an audio source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead,” while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live.” This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. Reverb Delay Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time to get more sustaining reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get articulate sound. Adjustable range Adjustable range Reverberation Source sound 60 dB Source sound (dB) 60 dB 60 dB 60 dB Reverberation Short reverberation Source sound Reverberation Early reflections Rev. Time 0 to 10 0 to 250 ms 1.0 to 5.0 s Time Adjustable range Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. Level Liveness Time Rev. Time Time Time Rev. Time Long reverberation Rev. Delay Rev. Time Audio source Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 Level Dead Level Level Live Time Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 En 73 SETUP Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu) Reverb Level Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. 2ch Stereo only Direct 0 to 100% Level Adjustable range Parameters usable in certain sound programs Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit depending on the condition of tone control etc., when an analog audio source is played back. You can enjoy a higher quality sound. Source sound Auto (Default) Rev. Level Off Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone control circuit when both tone controls of “Bass” and “Treble” are set to 0dB. Surround R Level Adjusts the volume of the surround R channel. J2 Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 100% Surround Back L Level Adjusts the volume of the surround back L channel. J2 Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 35% (7.1-channel configuration) 50% (6.1-channel configuration) Does not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control circuit. Time Surround Back R Level 7ch Stereo only Decode Type Adjusts the volume of the surround back R channel. J2 Selects a surround decoder to be used with a sound program in the MOVIE category. J1 PLIIx Movie PLII Movie Selects the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (or Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) decoder. Neo:6 Cinema Selects the Neo:6 (Cinema) decoder. Center Level Adjusts the center channel volume. J2 Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 100% Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 35% (7.1-channel configuration) 50% (6.1-channel configuration) Front Presence L Level Surround L Level Adjusts the volume of the front presence L channel. J2 Adjusts the volume of the surround L channel. J2 J 1 : Surround decoders cannot be changed when used with the following MOVIE Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 100% Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 33% J 2 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive. sound programs. • Mono Movie • Sports • Action Game • Roleplaying Game En 74 SETUP Setting sound program parameters (Sound Program menu) Front Presence R Level Parameters usable in surround decoder Adjusts the volume of the front presence R channel. J1 Decode Type Adjustable range 0 to 100% Default setting 33% Selects a surround decoder. Pro Logic Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. This is suitable for all kinds of audio sources. PLIIx Movie / PLII Movie Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for movies. J2 PLIIx Music / PLII Music Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for music. J2 PLIIx Game / PLII Game Reproduces sound using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder. This is suitable for games. J2 Neo:6 Cinema Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music Reproduces sound using the DTS Neo:6 decoder. This is suitable for music. Center Width Spreads the center channel sound to the front left and right speakers to suit your needs or preferences. Set this parameter to 0 for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker only. Adjustable range 0 to 7 Default setting 3 Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative, and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value more positive. Adjustable range -3 to +3 Default setting 0 Dolby PLIIx Music and Dolby PLII Music only When Neo:6 Music is selected Panorama Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends front left/ right channels sounds to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Off (Default) Disables the effect. On Enables the effect. Center Image Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Adjustable range 0.0 to 1.0 Default setting 0.3 J 1 : Not displayed when speakers are set to be inactive. J 2 : You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder in the following conditions: • When “Surround Back” is set to “None” (☞p. 78). • When headphones are connected. En 75 SETUP MAIN ZONE 2 Setting various functions (Setup menu) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER Various settings, such as speaker volume or HDMI functions, can be changed from the Setup menu. HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 Operating the Setup menu AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER 1 2 [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT Setup menu setting Speaker Adjusts parameters for speakers, such as speaker status, and volume adjustment for each speaker. Sound Sets functions related to audio output, such as adjustment of maximum volume and of dynamic range. Video Sets video output functions, such as video conversion settings (resolution and aspect ratio). HDMI Sets HDMI functions, such as the HDMI Control function and output destination for HDMI sound. Press jON SCREEN. Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Setup” and press kENTER. SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO j VOLUME k OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE Multi Zone Sets multi-zone functions, such as volume adjustment for speakers in the secondary zone. Function Sets functions such as the Auto Power Down function, that make the unit easier to use. Language Selects the language of the menus and messages displayed on TV screen. REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT INPUT 3 Use kCursor D / E to select a menu and press kENTER. 4 Use kCursor B / C to select an item and press kENTER. When the selected item contains detailed ones, use kCursor B / C to select the detailed item and press kENTER. 5 Use kCursor B / C / D / E to adjust the setting. Pressing kRETURN displays the previous menu screen. Repeat steps 4 to 5 to adjust multiple settings. MUTE j ON SCREEN k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER k RETURN 6 Press jON SCREEN to close the menu. En 76 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) Setup menu Manages settings for speakers ■ Manual speaker setup Manual Setup The following parameters can be specified manually. Speaker Auto Setup Manual Setup Sound Lipsync Dynamic Range Max Volume Initial Volume Adaptive DSP Level Speaker Setup items Video Analog to Analog Conversion Processing HDMI HDMI Control ARC (Audio Return Channel) TV Audio Input Audio Output Standby Through Multi Zone Auto Setup Optimizes the speaker configuration automatically. Manual Setup Manually adjusts parameters for speakers. Power Amp Assign Adds the extra speakers to the 7.1-channel speaker connection. Configuration Manually manages speaker configuration, such as speaker size (sound production capacity), and bass audio processing. Distance Manually adjusts the output of each speaker based on distance to the listening position. Level Manually adjusts the volume of each speaker. Parametric EQ Selects an equalizer to adjust speaker output characteristics. Test Tone Generates test tones. ■ Automatic speaker setup Auto Setup Optimizes the speaker configuration automatically using YPAO (☞p. 33). Power Amp Assign In addition to the 7.1-channel speaker connection, various speaker configurations are possible using the presence speakers connection, bi-amp connection or Zone2 function (☞p. 17, p. 18). Zone2 Set Function Auto Power Down Display Set Trigger Output Memory Guard Language En 77 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) Configuration Adjusts the output characteristics of the speakers based on manually set parameters. In the “Configuration,” you can select the speaker size characteristic (Large or Small). Select the size (sound reproduction capacity) that matches your speakers. Front Selects the size (sound reproduction capacity) of the front speakers. J1 Large Small (Default) Select this for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Select this for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components. J2 Center Selects the size of the center speakers. Woofer diameter • 16 cm or larger → Large • 16 cm or smaller → Small When speaker size is set to “Small,” low-frequency components of the speakers that you configured are produced from the subwoofer (or from the front speakers if there is no subwoofer). Large Select this when a large center speaker is connected. Small (Default) Select this when a small center speaker is connected. None Select this when there is no center speaker. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. Surround Selects the size of the surround speakers. Large Select this when the surround speakers are large. Small (Default) Select this when the surround speakers are small. None Select this when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio signals. • When set to “None,” no sound is produced from the surround back speaker even if that speaker is connected. • When set to “None,” the sound programs will change to Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Surround Back Selects the size of the surround back speakers. Largex1 Select when one large surround back speaker is connected. Largex2 Select when two large surround back speakers are connected. Smallx1 Select when one small surround back speaker is connected. Smallx2 (Default) Select when two small surround back speakers are connected. None Select this when no surround back speakers are connected. • When there are no surround speakers are connected, the setting will automatically change to “None.” • You can set surround back audio signals, including from the playback source, to be mixed down and produced from a single speaker (6.1-channel layout) or produced from left and right surround speakers (5.1-channel layout). Front Presence Specify connection of front presence speakers. Use (Default) Select this when front presence speakers are connected. None Select this when front presence speakers are not connected. J 1 : When “Subwoofer” is set to “None,” you can only choose “Large.” If the front speaker setting is “Small” and you change “Subwoofer” to “None,” it will automatically change to “Large.” J 2 : You can set the low-frequency components of audio signals transmitted from the front speakers to the subwoofer by using “Bass Cross Over.” En 78 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) Subwoofer Confirms the subwoofer. Use (Default) Select this when subwoofer is connected. During playback, the subwoofer will produce audio from the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel and bass audio from other channels. J1 None Select this when subwoofer is not connected. The front speakers will produce audio from the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel and bass frequency audio from other channels. Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer if the bass audio is lacking or unclear. Normal (Default) Does not change the subwoofer phase. Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase. Extra Bass Allows the front channel low-frequency components to be produced exclusively by the subwoofer, or by both the subwoofer and the front speakers. Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component which is produced from speakers of which the size is set to “Small.” A frequency sound which is lower than the specified frequency will be produced from the subwoofer or the front speakers. J2 Level Separately adjusts the volume of each speaker. Use kCursor B / C to select the desired speaker, and press kENTER. Then use kCursor D / E to adjust the volume for the selected speaker. 40Hz 110Hz 60Hz 120Hz Adjustable range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB 80Hz (Default) 160Hz Default setting 90Hz 200Hz 0.0 dB (Front L/Front R/Center/Surround L/Surround R/Surround Back L/Surround Back R/Front Presence L/Front Presence R/Subwoofer) Adjustment increments 0.5 dB 100Hz Distance Adjusts the timing at which the speakers produce audio so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. Selecting adjustment units Use kCursor B / C to select the unit for distance (meters or feet), and press kENTER. Setting distances for each speaker Off (Default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the front speakers or the subwoofer produce the front channel low-frequency components. On The subwoofer and the front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components. When “Subwoofer” is set to “None” or “Front” is set to “Small,” “Extra Bass” is disabled. Use kCursor B / C to select the speaker you want to configure, and press kENTER. Then use kCursor D / E to set the distance from the speaker to your listening position. Adjustable range 1.0 ft to 80.0 ft (0.30 m to 24.0 m) Default setting 10.0 ft (3.00 m) (Front L/Front R/Center/Surround L/ Surround R/Surround Back L/Surround Back R/Front Presence L/Front Presence R/Subwoofer) Adjustment increments 0.2 ft (0.05 m) J 1 : Enabling “Extra Bass” allows both the subwoofer and the front speakers to produce bass audio. J 2 : If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set the crossover frequency to maximum and the volume to half (or slightly less). En 79 SETUP MAIN Setting various functions (Setup menu) ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER Parametric EQ HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 Adjusts sound quality of tone using a parametric equalizer. AUDIO AV 1 5 2 6 TUNER MULTI PEQ Select Select an equalizer type. DOCK [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING Manual Manually adjust equalizer sound. Flat Adjust individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. Select this option if speakers offer the same quality. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO j VOLUME k Front OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN Adjust individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front left and right speakers. Select this option if front left and right speakers offer significantly greater quality than other speakers. DISPLAY Natural TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT INPUT MUTE Through (Default) Disable the equalizer. PEQ Data Copy Select 1 of the 3 parametric equalizer types acquired with automatic setup and manually copy that information to the manual adjustments. Flat > Manual j ON SCREEN k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER Adjust all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Select this if high-frequency sounds seem too strong when “PEQ Select” is set to “Flat.” Copy the “Flat” parametric equalizer information acquired with automatic setup. Front > Manual Copy the “Front” parametric equalizer information acquired with automatic setup. Natural > Manual Copy the “Natural” parametric equalizer information acquired with automatic setup. Front L / Front R / Center / Surround L / Surround R / Surround Back L / Surround Back R / Front Presence L / Front Presence R The parametric equalizer can be used to manually adjust sound quality for individual speakers. Set “PEQ Select” to “Manual” and use “PEQ Data Copy” to copy information acquired with automatic setup. This information can be used as a basis for performing manual adjustments. 1 Use kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Band / Gain,” “Freq. / Gain,” or “Q / Gain” and press kENTER. 2 Use kCursor D / E repeatedly to adjust the parameter and use kCursor B / C repeatedly to adjust the gain. 3 4 Press kENTER to exit the edit window. Test Tone Turns the test tone generator on or off. Off (Default) Does not generate test tones. On Generates test tones. While “On” is selected, test tones are produced constantly. You can use the test tone in a variety of circumstances. For example, you can adjust the volume balance settings for each speaker, or whenever you adjust the settings on the internal parametric equalizer, you can listen to the actual effect while operating this unit. Turn the test tone off when you have finished making adjustments. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to configure other parameters. To reset all parameter settings for the selected speaker, select “Reset to Flat” and press kENTER. 5 Press jON SCREEN to close the menu. En 80 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) Setting the audio output function of this unit ■ Synchronizing audio/video output Mode Selects a compensation method for the delay between audio and video output. Auto (Default) Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for Dolby Digital and DTS playback. Max Volume Sets the maximum volume for this receiver. Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. Adaptive DSP Level Adjusts the level of DSP effect in conjunction with the volume level. dynamic range Lipsync Adjusts the delay between audio and video output (Lipsync function). Sound Setup items ■ Auto-adjusting Dolby Digital and DTS Manual When connecting to a TV via HDMI, automatically adjusts output timing if the TV supports an automatic lipsync function. Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for audio bitstream (Dolby Digital and DTS) signal playback. MAX (Default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. STD Adjusts the dynamic range for optimum volume for regular home use. MIN/AUTO (MIN) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals. (AUTO) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD signals based on input signal information. Manually adjusts the correction time. Select this when the monitor does not support the automatic lipsync function. ■ Setting the maximum volume Delay Adjustable range 0 ms to +250 ms Default setting 0 ms Adjustment increments 1 ms Max Volume Specify the maximum volume level so that sound is not too loud. The default setting of +16.5 dB produces the highest volume. Adjustable range -30.0 dB to +16.5 dB (maximum volume) Default setting +16.5 dB Adjustment increments 5.0 dB En 81 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Setting the startup volume Setting this unit’s video output function Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. When this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set at the level when the receiver last entered standby mode. J1 Adjustable range Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Default setting Off Adjustment increments 0.5 dB Video Setup items ■ Adjusting DSP effect and volume level Adaptive DSP Level Automatically adjust the level of DSP effect in conjunction with the volume level. Off Disables automatic adjustment of the level of DSP effect. On (Default) Adjusts the degree of DSP effect in conjunction with volume level. The higher the volume level, the less the DSP effect applied. The lower the volume level, the greater the DSP effect applied. Analog to Analog Conversion Enable or disable video conversion between analog video jacks. Processing Enable or disable adjustment of resolution and aspect ratio for video signal converted to HDMI video. • Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is always possible unless video signals are being input at the HDMI input jacks or 1080presolution analog video signals are being input (☞p. 108). • This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals interchangeably. • 480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals can not be output at the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack (☞p. 108). • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. • When composite video signals from a VCR are converted into component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “Analog to Analog Conversion” to “Off.” ■ Analog-to-analog video conversion Analog to Analog Conversion Enables or disables video conversion between analog video jacks. Off Disables video conversion between analog video jacks. On (Default) Enables video conversion between analog video jacks. J 1 : When you set “Max Volume” at a lower level than “Initial Volume,” “Max Volume” has priority. En 82 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Adjusting resolution and aspect ratio with conversion of video signal to HDMI Through (Default) The aspect ratio of HDMI video signal sources is not adjusted. 16:9 Normal Transmits 4:3 aspect ratio video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. Processing Adjust resolution and aspect ratio with conversion of video input to HDMI video (upscaling). Off (Default) Resolution and aspect ratio are not adjusted with processing. On Resolution and aspect ratio are adjusted with processing. Setting HDMI functions Aspect • The Aspect setting is automatically disabled when “Resolution” is set to “Through.” • The Aspect setting is automatically disabled for video input with aspect ratios other than 4:3. • Changing the aspect ratio of 720p, 1080i, or 1080p has no effect. HDMI Setup items Resolution Auto (Default) Automatic upscaling in accordance with TV resolution. 480p Upscaling to 480p (576p). 720p Upscaling to 720p. 1080i Upscaling to 1080i. 1080p Upscaling to 1080p. Through No upscaling. • The 720p-, 1080i- and 1080p-resolution video signals cannot be upscaled (☞p. 108). • When a TV is connected to this unit via the HDMI jack, this unit automatically detects a resolution that the TV supports. Only the detected resolution can be selected. • If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the TV supports, set “MON.CHK” in the Advanced Setup menu to “SKIP” (☞p. 93) and try again. HDMI Control Turns the HDMI Control on or off. ARC (Audio Return Channel) Turns the Audio Return Channel function on or off. TV Audio Input Chooses automatically selected audio input in conjunction with TV operation when the HDMI Control is turned on. Audio Output Specifies whether or not audio signal is output through this unit and a TV connected via the HDMI OUT jack. Standby Through J1 Turns the Standby Through function on or off. J 1 : This item appears depending on “HDMI Control.” En 83 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Receiver operation via TV (HDMI Control) ■ Listening to TV audio via single HDMI cable (Audio Return Channel) ■ Selecting an input source to assign audio input for the TV HDMI Control Set the HDMI Control function to “On” to operate devices connected via HDMI. If the TV or other external components support HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link), you can use the remote controls of those devices to operate some of this unit’s functions, and to synchronize this unit with the operation of those devices. Refer to “Using the HDMI Control function” (☞p. 95) for setting instructions. Off (Default) Sets HDMI Control to “Off.” On Sets HDMI Control to “On.” J1 If this unit is connected to HDMI devices that do not support the HDMI Control function, these functions will not operate. ARC (Audio Return Channel) TV Audio Input You can enable or disable the Audio Return Channel function. When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and the function is enabled, the TV’s audio output is transmit to this unit via an HDMI cable. The TV audio input to this unit is regarded as the input source selected in “TV Audio Input.” J2 By means of this function, you do not need to connect the TV’s audio output (digital audio output or analog audio output) to the unit. Off (Default) Sets the Audio Return Channel to “Off.” On Sets the Audio Return Channel to “On.” Select the input source that receives audio signals from TV while the HDMI Control function is on. When using a TV that supports Audio Return Channel function and the function is enabled, the audio input for the TV is assigned to the input source selected here. J2 Audio input AV1-6 or AUDIO1-2 Default setting AV4 Refer to “Switching the input source on this unit automatically when listening to TV audio” (☞p. 96) for instructions. When the TV audio is input to the unit using Audio Return Channel, “TV” is displayed on the front panel display. TV AV4 VOL. SW C R L SL SR SBL SBR Refer to “Single HDMI cable input to TV audio with Audio Return Channel function” (☞p. 97) for setting instructions. J 1 : When the HDMI Control is “On,” the Standby Through function is automatically enabled. When this unit enters standby mode, the audio and video signals from the last-selected HDMI input source will continue to be transmitted to the TV. The HDMI input source can only be changed using the remote control. J 2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input source cannot be used. En 84 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Specify whether or not audio signal is output through this unit and a TV Audio Output ■ Transmitting HDMI audio/video to the TV during standby mode (Standby Through) Setting this unit’s multi-zone function Standby Through Choose whether audio is played back through this unit or through a TV. Amp Specify whether or not audio signal is output through this unit. Off Audio is not output through this unit. On (Default) Audio is output through this unit. When this setting is selected, audio from the external component is output in a format compatible with this unit. OUT Specify whether or not audio signal is output through a TV connected via the HDMI OUT jack. Off (Default) Audio is not output through a TV connected via the HDMI OUT jack. On Outputs audio through a TV connected via the HDMI OUT jack. When this setting is selected, audio from the external component is output in a format compatible with the TV. This function allows audio/video signals from HDMI inputs to continue to be transmitted to a TV when this unit is in standby mode. When the Standby Through function is “On,” audio/video signals continue to be output to the TV from the last HDMI input source before this unit enters standby mode. The HDMI input source can be selected using dHDMI1-5 or dV-AUX in standby mode. Multi Zone Setup item Off (Default) Sets Standby Through to “Off.” On Transmits audio/video signals from the selected HDMI input source to the TV. • When “HDMI Control” is “On,” Standby Through function is automatically enabled and “Standby Through” is not displayed. • When the Standby Through function is on, the HDMI Through/ iPod Charge indicator on the front panel lights during the standby mode. This unit consumes approximately 3 W of power. Zone2 Set Adjusts Zone2 volume level. ■ Adjusting Zone2 volume Zone2 Set Max Volume Specify the maximum volume level in Zone2 so that sound is not too loud. Adjustable range -30.0 dB to +16.5 dB (maximum volume) Default setting +16.5 dB Adjustment increments 5.0 dB Initial Volume Specify the initial volume level in Zone2 when this unit is turned on. Adjustable range Off, Mute, -80 dB to +16.5 dB Default setting Off Adjustment increments 0.5 dB En 85 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) Making the receiver easier to use ■ Goes enter standby mode automatically when you leave it without operating ■ Specifying menu display Display Set Auto Power Down Specify front panel display brightness and TV screen wall paper. If you do not operate this unit or use the remote control for an extended period of time, it will automatically go into standby mode (Auto Power Down function). This function’s default setting is “Off.” When you want to enable this function, set the amount of time to pass before this unit will enter standby. 4hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated this unit for four hours. 8hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated this unit for eight hours. 12hours Goes into standby mode, when you have not operated this unit for twelve hours. Off (Default) Auto Power Down function is disabled. Function Setup items Auto Power Down This unit enters standby mode if no operations are performed. Display Set Specifies menu items displayed on TV screen and the front panel. Trigger Output Specifies TRIGGER OUT jack function. Memory Guard Protects some settings against accidental modification. This unit starts a countdown of 30 seconds before entering the standby mode. Pressing any key of the remote control during the countdown cancels entering the standby mode and reset the timer. Front Panel Display Specify front panel display brightness and message scroll pattern. Dimmer Adjustable range: -4 - 0 Reduce brightness of the front panel display. As the value is lowered, the panel display darkens. Scroll Selects the manner in which display scrolls when the total number of characters exceeds the display area on the front panel display. Select “Continue” for continuous scrolling of all characters. Select “Once” to scroll through all characters once and then halt scrolling for display of only the first 14 characters. Wall Paper Specify the wall paper displayed on the TV screen when no video signal is input. Select one that you prefer. Picture Displays an image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. En 86 SETUP Setting various functions (Setup menu) ■ Setting TRIGGER OUT functions All Trigger Output Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function synchronized with power status of each zone or input switching. Trigger Mode Specify the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Power (Default) Source Manual The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone.” The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone.” Electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Target Source.” Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual.” Target Zone Specify the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized. Main (Default) Zone2 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with input switching in the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with input switching in Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with power status of the main zone or Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is synchronized with input switching in the main zone or Zone2. Target Source Specify the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input switching. Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. High (Default) Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. ■ Prohibiting setting changes Memory Guard Prohibits setting changes to prevent careless changes being made to the settings on Setup menu. Off (Default) Settings are not protected. On Prohibits changes to the settings on Setup menu until it is returned to “Off.” While set to “On,” the unit displays “Memory Guard!” when an attempt is made to change the settings. Language This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source.” Manual Manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external component connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High (Default) Transmits the electronic signal. This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual.” Select the language used for display of menus and messages. J1 Choices: English (English), (Japanese), (French), (German), (Spanish), (Russian) J 1 : Content window information is displayed in the language in which that information was released. En 87 SETUP MAIN ZONE 2 Confirming information of this unit (Information menu) CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER A variety of information for this unit can be displayed. HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 Selecting information AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER 1 [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING Press jON SCREEN. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE Displays information on the current video signal. Format Signal format. When this unit is unable to detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. Sampling The number of samples taken per second from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE TV CD RADIO j VOLUME k Channel OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. HDMI signal Source video signal type and video signal output to this unit’s HDMI OUT jack. HDMI Resolution Input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) resolution. Analog Resolution Resolution of the source video signal and the analog video signal output to this unit’s COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks. HDMI Error Error message for HDMI sources or connected HDMI devices (☞p. 100). DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Video information Displays information on the current audio signal. MUSIC SLEEP BD DVD ■ Audio information 0 10 2 Use kCursor B / C to select “Information” and press kENTER. ENT INPUT MUTE j ON SCREEN k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER 3 Use kCursor D / E to select an Information menu and press kENTER. Bitrate The number of bits passing a given point per second. ■ HDMI monitor Dialogue The dialogue normalization level preset to the current input bitstream signal. Displays information on the TV screen connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT jack. • “___” is displayed when this unit cannot display the corresponding information. • Some high-definition audio bitstream contents may not include the discrete surround back left and right channel signals, but are encoded at a bitrate of 192 kHz. • Even when direct bitstream output settings are applied, some players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams, while converting DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio bitstreams to DTS bitstreams. Interface Displays information on the current connection interface. Video Resolution Displays the frequency for each video resolution of the TV currently connected. ■ System information Displays information on the current settings of “Remote ID,” “TV Format” and “Speaker Impedance.” ■ Zone information Displays information on Zone2 settings. En 88 SETUP MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER c q You can operate an external component such as TV and DVD player with the remote control of this unit by setting the code for external component (remote control code). The remote control code can be set for each input source. Individual setting allows you to switch external components seamlessly depending on the selected input source. HDMI 1 2 3 4 AUDIO 5 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 AV 1 5 2 6 MULTI TUNER Controlling other components with the remote control d Selecting input source connected to DVD player DOCK Selecting input source connected to CD player [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING DVD player DVD player ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD Keys connecting external components TV CD Playback/Stop RADIO Playback/Stop OPTION ON SCREEN CD player VOLUME ENTER RETURN k If you are unable to operate this unit after operating an external component, light up qSOURCE/RECEIVER in orange by pressing it, and then try operating the remote control again. DISPLAY TOP MENU P MENU MUTE l REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 CD player m 10 TV VOL TV CH cSOURCE A Switches an external component on and off. kCursor, kENTER, kRETURN Operates the menus of external components. lDISPLAY Switches an external component display. lExternal component operation keys Functions as a recording or playback key of an external component, or a menu display key. mNumeric keys Functions as numeric keys of an external component. ENT TV INPUT MUTE The remote control keys for controlling external components are available only when the external components have corresponding control keys. n nTV control keys J1 c SOURCE A d Input selector k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER k RETURN l External component nINPUT Switches video inputs of TV. nMUTE Mutes TV volume temporarily. nTV VOL +/- Controls the volume of TV. nTV CH +/- Switches TV channels. nA Turns on and off TV. operation keys l DISPLAY m Numeric keys n TV control keys n INPUT n MUTE n TV VOL +/n TV CH +/nA q SOURCE/RECEIVER J 1 : You can register remote control codes for external components to dInput selector and remote control codes for TVs in nA (nTV control keys). To register a TV remote control code to dInput selector: You can use the kCursor, mNumeric keys, and nTV To register a remote control code for a device other than a TV to dInput selector: You can use the kCursor and mNumeric keys etc to control external components, and the nTV control keys to control TVs registered in nA. control keys to control a TV you have registered. En 89 SETUP MAIN Controlling other components with the remote control ZONE 2 CODE SET o SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX 1 2 d Default remote control code settings Registering remote control codes for external component operations The following remote control codes are assigned to input sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM. The following section describes how to register remote control code using an example of the registration of the remote control codes of a Yamaha BD player connected to HDMI2 jack. AUDIO AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY TUNING Manufacturer Remote control code Blu-ray player/ recorder Yamaha 2064 HDMI2 — — — HDMI3 — — — HDMI4 — — — HDMI5 — — — AV1 — — — AV2 — — — AV3 CD player Yamaha 5095 AV4 — — — AV5 — — — AV6 — — — AUDIO1 — — — AUDIO2 — — — V-AUX — — — A J1 — — — DOCK — — — TUNER — — — Input Category ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MUSIC SLEEP HDMI1 STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL Press oCODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. blinks twice ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER PRESET MOVIE 2 TV CH MUTE d HDMI2 n TV control keys nA o CODE SET n J 1 : Use A for external component operations only. Set these keys to remote control codes if you want to perform external component operations without linking to input source selection of this unit. For example, it may be convenient to assign remote control codes for devices such as TVs. • Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 2. • Remote control code of an external component cannot be set from the name or model number of a unit. Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to search the available remote control codes from the category or manufacturer of external components. • If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first code in the list, if it does not work then try the other codes. 1 HDMI 1 3 2 3 4 Press dHDMI2 to switch the input source to HDMI2. J2 Perform the following steps to register the selected input source here to the remote control code. Continues to the next page Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CDROM to search the available remote control codes from the category or manufacturer of external components. “2064” can be used for a Yamaha BD player. J 2 : When you want to register a remote control code to the nTV control keys, press nA (nTV control keys) in step 3. En 90 SETUP MAIN Controlling other components with the remote control ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER o q HDMI 1 2 3 5 V-AUX 1 4 d AUDIO 4 Enter a remote control code “2064” using mNumeric keys. J1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER 2 AM INFO MEMORY PRESET TUNING Registration successful: blinks twice Registration failed: blinks 6 times ENHANCER SUR. DECODE MOVIE 3 Enter “9981” using mNumeric keys. 9 Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 1. 8 9 1 Once the remote control code is reset successfully qSOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice. Reset successful: blinks twice Reset failed: blinks 6 times MUSIC SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD Resetting all remote control codes for external components to the initial factory settings. 4 Once the remote control code is registered successfully qSOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice. [ A ] FM 6 0 Resetting all remote control codes TV CD RADIO ZONE 2 i 1 Press oCODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE RECEIVER OPTION ON SCREEN CODE SET blinks twice HDMI HDMI VOLUME ENTER RETURN 1 2 3 1 4 DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 m MUTE d HDMI2 i SCENE m Numeric keys o CODE SET q SOURCE/RECEIVER 5 CODE SET 3 4 If setup fails, repeat from step 1. SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI 1 2 ENT INPUT ZONE 2 • If the registration fails, repeat from step 2. • In case of an external component with multiple remote control codes, the other remote control codes may be supported. Repeat from step 2 with the other remote control codes. 2 2 3 4 Press qSOURCE/RECEIVER on the remote control. To switch between BD player linked to scene selections, press iSCENE and at the same time press dHDMI2 and hold it for approximately 3 seconds. Then you can operate the external components by switching the input source to HDMI2, or selecting HDMI2 in the registered scene. Same steps for operating other external components, press iSCENE and at the same time press the input source key selected in step 3 and hold it for approximately 3 seconds. J 1 : When you want to register a remote control code to the nTV control keys, enter the TV remote control code in step 4. En 91 SETUP Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu) The Advanced Setup menu can be used for unit initialization and other useful extended functions. The Advanced Setup menu can be operated as follows. Displaying/Setting the Advanced Setup menu 3 Use PROGRAM l / h to select the item to be set from the following items. Setting the impedance of speakers In the Advanced Setup menu, you can set the following settings. 1 2 Switch this unit to the standby mode. Press MAIN ZONE A while pressing and holding STRAIGHT on the front panel. Release STRAIGHT when “ADVANCED SETUP” is displayed on the front panel display. After a few seconds, the top menu items are displayed. MAIN ZONE A STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE YPAO MIC ZONE2 ZONE CONTROL INFO MEMORY PRESET FM SCENE BD DVD PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL TV CD PROGRAM RADIO SP IMP. Sets the impedance of speakers. REMOTE ID Changes the remote control ID of a receiver. TV FORMAT Specifies the TV’s color encoding format. MON.CHK Removes the up-scaling limitation on HDMI video output. INIT Initializes various settings for this unit. 4 5 SPIMP.-8MIN Changes the unit settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. J1 6ΩMIN Select the impedance when 6 Ω speakers are connected. 8ΩMIN (Default) Select the impedance when speakers above 8 Ω are connected. Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select the value you want to change. Switch this unit to the standby mode, and then switch it on again. The settings become effective and the unit is powered on. STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA PROGRAM l / h J 1 : For detailed procedures of speaker impedance settings, refer to “Changing speaker impedance” (☞p. 18). En 92 SETUP MAIN Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu) ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER o q HDMI 1 2 3 5 V-AUX 1 4 AUDIO 2 Avoiding crossing remote control signals when using multiple Yamaha receivers AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER FM AM MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET REMOTEID-ID1 TUNING The remote control of the unit can only receive signals from a receiver which has an identical ID (remote control ID). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. On the contrary, if you are setting the same remote control ID for all receivers, you can use one remote control to operate 2 receivers. ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE ID1 (Default) REC ID2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 m Receives the remote control signals set in ID1. Receives the remote control signals set in ID2. 1 2 3 Press oCODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. Press qSOURCE/RECEIVER. MUTE ID1 is set for both remote control and receiver by default. To avoid crossing remote control, change the remote control ID for both remote control and receiver. TVFORMAT-NTSC Change the color encoding format of OSD to PAL or NTSC (default), to match the format used by the TV connected via the HDMI OUT or VIDEO (MONITOR OUT) jack. Removing HDMI video output upscaling limits Enter the desired remote control ID code. To switch to ID1: Enter “5019” using mNumeric keys. To switch to ID2: Enter “5020” using mNumeric keys. Once the remote control code is registered successfully qSOURCE/RECEIVER will blink twice. ENT INPUT Changing TV format Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Settings will be automatically stopped if more than 1 minute passes since the last operation. To reset, repeat from step 1. [ A ] INFO BD DVD ■ To change the remote control ID Registration successful: blinks twice Registration failed: blinks 6 times ZONE 2 MON.CHK-YES Removes the up-scaling limitation on video resolution when this unit and a TV are connected via HDMI jacks. If a resolution supported by the monitor cannot be detected when configuring the up-scaling settings, this setting will remove the output limitation. YES (Default) Video output signals of a resolution not supported by the TV will not be transmitted. SKIP This unit ignores the TV’s support capability and transmits input video signals to the TV. CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER HDMI m Numeric keys o CODE SET q SOURCE/RECEIVER 1 2 3 4 • If setup fails, repeat from step 1. • Returns to ID1 after the remote control code is initialized (☞p. 91). En 93 SETUP Extended functionality that can be configured as needed (Advanced Setup menu) Initializing various settings for this unit INIT- CANCEL Initializes various settings stored in this unit and sets it back to default. Select the items to be initialized from the following. DSP PARAM Initializes all parameters for the sound programs. VIDEO Resets video conversion settings (resolution/aspect ratio) in the Setup menu. ALL Resets this unit to default factory settings. CANCEL (Default) Does not initialize. When an option other than CANCEL is selected, the applicable default settings will be restored when the unit switches to standby mode. En 94 SETUP Using the HDMI Control function This unit supports the HDMI Control function, which allows you to operate external components via HDMI. If devices that support HDMI Control (e.g., Panasonic VIERA Link-compatible TVs, DVD/Blu-ray Disc recorders, etc.) are connected J1, remote controls for those devices can be used to perform the following operations: – Power synchronization (on/standby) – Volume control, including Mute – Changing the audio signal output device (either the TV or this unit) 1 2 3 Connect the TV that supports the HDMI Control function to this unit’s HDMI output jack. 4 Set the TV and this unit’s HDMI Control function to “On.” 8 If DVD recorder that supports the HDMI Control function are connected to this unit, turn them on. Connect the DVD recorder that supports the HDMI Control function to this unit’s HDMI input jack. Receiver unit Confirm that the input source for the DVD recorder has been selected. If a different input source has been selected, change it manually. Turn on the TV and this unit. TV/DVD Recorder Confirm that the video signal from the recorder is being properly received by the TV. Refer to the TV’s instruction manual on how to operate external components. Operations 1-8 will not be required more than twice. TV Control signal (such as volume control) HDMI connection Receiver unit Confirm that “HDMI Control” in the Setup menu (HDMI Setup) is set to “On” (☞p. 84). J2 TV/DVD Recorder Check the instruction manuals for those devices. HDMI Remote control of TV 5 Turn the TV off. 6 Turn the TV on. 7 Change the TV’s input setting to the input jack that is connected to this unit (e.g., HDMI1). Other synchronized HDMI Control devices are turned off with the TV. If they are not synchronized, turn them off manually. This unit NOTE The following is an example of how to connect this unit, a TV, and a DVD recorder. Follow the instructions in your TV and DVD recorder manuals, as well as the ones written below. Confirm that this unit has turned on in conjunction with the TV. If it is still off, turn it on manually. 9 Confirm that this unit is properly synchronized with the TV through the following operations by using the TV remote control. • Power On/Off • Volume Control • Switching between audio output devices If this unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check that the HDMI Control function is set to “On” for both devices. If they will not properly synchronize, unplugging and replugging the devices and turning them on and off may solve the problem. – Set the TV’s HDMI Control function to “On” – Follow the AV amplifier connection instructions, and connect this unit to the TV J 1 : We recommend that you use TVs and DVD/BD recorders from the same manufacturer whenever possible. J 2 : The default setting for the HDMI Control function is “Off.” En 95 SETUP MAIN Using the HDMI Control function ZONE 2 CODE SET ■ Switching the input source on this SOURCE RECEIVER unit automatically when listening to TV audio HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK AUDIO When the HDMI Control (☞p. 95) is operating properly, the input source of this unit is automatically changed to match operations carried out on the TV. The default input jack is AV4. If the AV4 optical digital jack is connected to the TV’s audio output jack, then you can enjoy TV sound through this unit right away. AV TUNER FM [ A ] AM PRESET INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC TUNING TV output jack Input jack Optical digital audio output AV1 or AV4 (Default) Coaxial digital audio output AV2 or AV3 Analog stereo output AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, or AUDIO2 5 Press kCursor D / E repeatedly to select “HDMI” and press kENTER. 6 Make sure that “HDMI Control” is “On.” 7 8 9 Press kCursor C to select “TV Audio Input” and press kENTER. Available input jacks ARC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP TV CD COMPONENT VIDEO Audio output (Optical) STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT j FM 75 PB FM MONITOR OUT RE GND AM +12V 0.1A MAX. Y COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO FRONT CENTER SURROU TRIGGER OUT CENTER PR IN OUT 75 PB VIDEO VIDEO OPTICAL Y VOLUME k COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) MONITOR OUT OPTICAL AV OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK MULTI CH INPUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT ZONE2 OUT FRONT SURR TRIG When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off,” press kENTER and kCursor B / C to set to “On.” TV O DISPLAY POP-UP MENU VIDEO Y Y TOP MENU PB HDMI 1 O PB ENTER HDMI 5 IN VIDEO (BD/DVD) ANTENNA OPTICAL OPTION RETURN HDMI 4 REMOTE PR OUT ARC HDMI OUT PR ON SCREEN HDMI 3 COMPONENT VIDEO GND AM PR DOCK RADIO HDMI 2 HDMI 1 ANTENNA SCENE BD DVD (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT DOCK OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL (CD) ( TV ) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 OPTICAL AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO 1 SURROU AUDIO 2 MUL MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT INPUT MUTE j ON SCREEN k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER To use other jacks to input audio signals from TV, carry out the following procedure. 1 2 Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI cable. Connect TV’s audio output to this unit. The input jacks listed below are available to input TV’s audio signals. Use the same jack type as used for the TV. 3 4 Press jON SCREEN. J1 Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Setup” and press kENTER. Use kCursor B / C to select the input jack connected in step 2. Press jON SCREEN when you have finished changing the settings. If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this unit will automatically switch to the input source chosen in step 7. J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 76) for details on the Setup menu. En 96 SETUP MAIN Using the HDMI Control function ZONE 2 CODE SET ■ Single HDMI cable input to TV SOURCE RECEIVER audio with Audio Return Channel function HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX 1 2 AUDIO 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT j SCENE BD DVD Press kCursor B / C repeatedly to select “Setup” and press kENTER. When using a TV that supports HDMI functions and Audio Return Channel function, audio/video output from this unit to the TV or audio output from the TV to this unit can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable (Audio Return Channel function). Audio signals transmitted from the TV to this unit can be assigned to any input source. AV 1 3 TV CD RADIO Connect this unit and the TV with an HDMI cable. 1 OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN 4 Press kCursor D / E repeatedly to select “HDMI” and press kENTER. HDMI POP-UP MENU HDMI MUTE REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 Video / Audio output 8 9 Press kCursor C to select “ARC (Audio Return Channel)” and press kENTER. J2 Press kCursor B / C to select the input source to which the HDMI audio signals will be assigned, and press kRETURN. Press kCursor C to select “On.” The Audio Return Channel function will turn on. Press jON SCREEN to close the Setup menu. If the TV hereafter transmits audio output signals, this unit will automatically switch to the input source chosen in step 6. DISPLAY TOP MENU Press kCursor C to select “TV Audio Input” and press kENTER. 10 TV k 6 7 TV audio output HDMI ENT INPUT ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT MUTE HDMI 2 HDMI 1 ANTENNA NT FM HDMI 3 HDMI 4 COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE GND AM PR IN 5 Make sure that “HDMI Control” is “On.” When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off,” press kENTER and kCursor B / C to set to “On.” OUT 75 PB VIDEO j ON SCREEN k Cursor B / C / D / E k ENTER k RETURN 2 VIDEO Press jON SCREEN. J1 J 1 : Refer to the “Setting various functions (Setup menu)” (☞p. 76) for details on the Setup menu. J 2 : While the Audio Return Channel function is on, the jack selected for the input source cannot be used. En 97 SETUP Using multi-zone configuration This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone2). You can control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control. From the ZONE2 OUT jacks ■ Using the external amplifier An amplifier located in the secondary zone can be connected to this unit as shown below. Audio input Amplifier Main zone SPEAKERS AUDIO Second zone (Zone2) L HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 R SINGLE DVD player (etc.) EXTRA SP Remote control This unit Infrared signal emitter From the REMOTE OUT jack ZONE2/ PRESENCE Amplifier FRONT CENTER Infrared signal receiver SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SURROUND NTER Second Zone (Zone2) SINGLE CENTER L R WOOFER AUDIO OUT ZONE2 OUT FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK PRE OUT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 To the REMOTE IN jack Only analog signal can be sent to Zone2. If you want to output sound from Zone2, connect an external component to AV5-6, AUDIO1-2, or VIDEO AUX by analog connection. For example, if you want to output sound from an HDMI DVD player in Zone2, you must connect the component to this unit by both HDMI and analog connections. To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. ■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP jacks directly (☞p. 18). Connecting Zone2 ■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks for multi-zone components You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit: This unit is equipped with REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks. You can use these jacks to control this unit and other components from Zone2 (☞p. 30). • An infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits infrared signals from the remote control to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An amplifier and speakers in the second zone. Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone2 connections that best meet your requirements. Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. These models may not require an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below. REMOTE IN Infrared signal receiver REMOTE OUT IN This unit REMOTE OUT Yamaha component En 98 SETUP MAIN ZONE 2 CODE SET SOURCE RECEIVER Using multi-zone configuration b p Controlling Zone2 HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 V-AUX 1 2 AUDIO AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 MULTI DOCK TUNER d [ A ] FM AM INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC PRESET TUNING ENHANCER SUR. DECODE SLEEP STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE BD DVD TV CD RADIO OPTION ON SCREEN VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY TOP MENU POP-UP MENU MUTE h The remote control can be used to select and control Zone2 devices. The available operations are as follows: • Selecting the input source of Zone2. • Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source of Zone2. • Adjust the volume of Zone2 devices (when connected via the built-in amplifier). ■ Activating the Zone2 operation mode Set bMAIN/ZONE2 to ZONE2 before attempting to use the remote control to control Zone2 devices. ■ Operating Zone2 To switch between on and standby for Zone2 Press pRECEIVER A. To select an input source for Zone2 Press dInput selector. REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 INPUT MUTE ENT To enable the sleep timer for Zone2 Automatically switch the Zone2 device to standby mode after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press hSLEEP repeatedly to specify a time for the sleep timer function. Sleep 120min. Sleep Off Sleep 90min. Sleep 30min. Sleep 60min. b MAIN/ZONE2 d Input selector h SLEEP p RECEIVER A En 99 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. General Problem Cause Remedy See page The power will not turn on. The protection circuitry operated 3 times consecutively. As a safety precaution, when the protection circuitry operates 3 times consecutively, the capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. — The unit enters standby mode soon after the power is turned on. The power cable is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall outlet. — (When this unit is turned back on and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The protection circuitry has been activated because this unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit and speakers are connected properly. 19 The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again. — The batteries in the remote control may have lost their charge. Replace all batteries. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. This unit cannot be turned off or does not work properly. The unit enters standby mode. The sleep timer has turned off the unit. Problem Cause Remedy See page After display of a countdown on the front panel, the unit goes into standby mode. If you do not use take any action, the Auto Power Down function operates. Turn on the unit, and play the source again. — In the Setup menu “Auto Power Down” (“Function” → “Auto Power Down”), increase the time until switching to standby mode, or turn off the Auto Power Down function. 86 No sound. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 25 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 19 The HDMI components connected to the unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. — The audio input into the device is set to playback through the TV. In the Setup menu, set the “Amp” of “Audio Output” (“HDMI” → “Audio Output” → “Amp”) to “On.” 85 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with Input selector. 40 7 — — The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. Check that the speaker with an impedance of at least 6 Ω. 18 Use an input source that has signals that can be reproduced on this unit. Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other, then turn the unit back on. — Signals that this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CDROM. — Check that the speaker impedance settings are correct. Turn on the unit, and play the source again. — En 100 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Problem No picture. No sound is output from a specific speaker. See page Cause Remedy The video signal output from this unit is not supported by a monitor connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT jack. Displays the Advanced Setup menu and select “VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video parameters. 94 Displays the Advanced Setup menu and set “MON.CHK” to “YES.” 93 An appropriate video input is not selected on the TV. Select an appropriate video input on the TV. — The speaker is malfunctioning. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator lights up, connect another speaker and check if sound is output. If sound is not output, the unit may be malfunctioning. 10 The playback component or speakers are not connected properly. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 19, 25 Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off, try the following. 1) Change to a different input source. 2) With the selected sound program, sound is not output from that speaker. Select another sound program. 3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on this unit. Display “Speaker” in the Setup menu, and set respective parameters to enable output from that speaker (“Speaker” → “Manual Setup” → “Configuration”). 10, 77 The volume of that speaker is set to the minimum in “Speaker” in the Setup menu. Display “Speaker” in the Setup menu and adjust the volume (“Speaker” → “Manual Setup” → “Level”). 79 (If hardly any sound comes from one channel) Speaker output balance is not set correctly. Balance the volume of each speaker from “Level” in the Setup menu (“Speaker” → “Manual Setup” → “Level”). 79 Sound may not be output from certain channels, depending on the input source or sound program. Try another sound program. 41 Problem Cause See page Remedy Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When a monaural source sound program is applied, for some surround decoders, sound from all channels is output from the center speaker. Try another sound program. 41 No sound is heard from the presence speakers. This unit is in straight decoding mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press STRAIGHT to exit straight decoding mode. 42 Sound may not be output from certain channels depending on input sources or sound programs. Try another sound program. 41 This unit is in straight decoding mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press STRAIGHT to exit straight decoding mode. 42 Sound may not be output from certain channels depending on input sources or sound programs. Try another sound program. 41 No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. “Extended Surround” in the OPTION menu is set to “OFF,” or an input signal does not contain a surround back flag with “Extended Surround” set to “Auto.” Set “Extended Surround” other than “OFF” or “Auto.” 51 No sound is heard from the subwoofer. A subwoofer is not connected, or it is inactive. Check that a subwoofer is connected correctly, and from the Setup menu “Subwoofer” (“Speaker” → “Manual Setup” → “Configuration” → “Subwoofer”), set the subwoofer to “Use.” 20, 79 The subwoofer is turned off. Turn the subwoofer power on. If the subwoofer includes an Auto Power Off function, then lower the Auto Power Off sensitivity settings. — No sound is heard from the surround speakers. The source does not contain LFE (☞p. 107) or low frequency signals. The right combination of audio / video jacks to connect cannot be found. Combine input connected to the external component video output with another input audio jack. — Display the Input menu for the connected video output, select “Audio In” and select the jack to use for audio input. En 67 101 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy See page The audio input sources cannot be played in the desired digital audio signal format. The connected component is not set to output the desired digital audio signals. There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency equipment. Noise/hum noise is heard. Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this unit by digital connection and playback the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved, the problem may results from the playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback component. 2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Input menu after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS.” — The component connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned on. When the component connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned on, the sound may be distorted, or the volume may decreased due to the nature of AV receivers. Turn on all components connected to this unit. — “Max Volume” is set to a low value. Set it to a higher value. 81 The volume cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. Set the playback component properly referring to its instruction manual. Move this unit further away from such equipment. HDMI™ — Problem — Cause See page Remedy The front panel display HDMI indicator is flashing. An error with the HDMI connection has occurred. Try re-inserting the HDMI cable. — Confirm that HDMI video that is not supported by the unit is not being input (Information menu → “Video information”). 88 No picture or sound. The number of components is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI components. — The connected HDMI component does not support high-bandwidth digital copyright protection (HDCP). Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. — The TV audio output is not connected to this unit, or the setting to match operations carried out on TV is not set. Connect the TV audio output to this unit, and then select the connected input source in “TV Audio Input” (Setup menu → HDMI → TV Audio Input). 84 (When using Audio Return Channel function) The Audio Return Channel function is not working. Make sure that your TV supports Audio Return Channel. Set the Audio Return Channel function to on (Setup menu → HDMI → ARC (Audio Return Channel)). 84 (When using HDMI Control function) TV sound is not output from this unit when operating the remote control of the TV. En 102 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Tuner (FM/AM) AM FM Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. Cause You are too far from the station transmitter, or the input from the antenna is weak. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 32 Switch to monaural mode. 56 Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna. — Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. — There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. You are in an area far from a station, or input from the antenna is weak. Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi element antenna. — Use TUNING H / I to manually select the station. 54 “No Presets” is displayed. No preset stations are registered. Register stations you want to listen to as preset stations before operation. 54 “Wrong Station” is displayed. An invalid FM/AM frequency has been input. Input a frequency that can be received. — See page Problem Cause Remedy The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak, or the antenna connections are loose. Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 32 Use the manual tuning method. 54 Automatic station preset does not work. Automatic station preset is not available for AM stations. Use manual station preset. 54 Continuous crackling and hissing noises are heard. The supplied AM loop antenna is not connected. Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even if you use an outdoor antenna. 32 The noises may be caused by lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise, but it can be reduced by installing and properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna. 32 Buzzing and whining noises are heard. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — En 103 APPENDIX Troubleshooting iPod™/iPhone™ Display Loading... Connect error Bluetooth™ Cause Remedy See page The unit is in the process of recognizing the connection with your iPod/iPhone. — The unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod/iPhone. — There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod/iPhone to the unit. Turn off the unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK jack of the unit. 58 Remove your iPod/iPhone from the Yamaha iPod universal dock and then place it back in the dock. 58 Connect an iPod/iPhone supported by the unit. — Display Searching... Cause See page Remedy The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the process of pairing. — The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the process of establishing a connection. — Completed The pairing is completed. — Canceled The pairing is canceled. — BT connected The connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component is established. — — Unknown iPod The iPod/iPhone being used is not supported by the unit. iPod connected Your iPod/iPhone is properly placed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. — Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. Your iPod/iPhone is properly placed in the Yamaha iPod wireless transmitter and connected with this unit via wireless transmission. 61 Not found The Bluetooth component is not found. — Your iPod/iPhone is removed from the Yamaha iPod universal dock. — Your iPod/iPhone is disconnected with this unit via wireless transmission. — During pairing: – pairing must be performed on the Bluetooth component and this unit simultaneously. Check if the Bluetooth component is in pairing mode. During connecting: – check if the Bluetooth component is turned on. – check if the Bluetooth component is within 10 m of the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. Pairing may not have been achieved. Try pairing again. 63 Disconnected Unable to play The unit cannot playback the songs currently stored on your iPod/iPhone. Check that songs are currently stored on your iPod/iPhone. — En 104 APPENDIX Troubleshooting Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. External components cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m, and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. — Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 7 The remote control ID of the remote control and this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit and the remote control. 90 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “Remote control code search” on the CDROM. — Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “Remote control code search” on the CD-ROM. — If this unit does not work when you press Cursor B / C / D / E, do the following. When the key does not work during DVD disc menu operation: press the Input selector again. When there is no response with remote control operation of the OPTION menu/ Setup menu: press SOURCE/RECEIVER (it should glow orange) and try operating the remote control again. — Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. — En 105 APPENDIX Glossary Audio information Audio and video synchronization (Lipsync) Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem, and the capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction. Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5 full-range channels, and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Digital Surround Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. DTS Express This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-ray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while playing the main program. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. En 106 APPENDIX Glossary DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack. LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1, because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5-channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems. Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced. Sound program information Video information CINEMA DSP Component video signal Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha’s original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the PB and PR signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in compression artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass, providing improved performance for the overall sound system. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. Deep Color Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Additionally, Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Virtual CINEMA DSP HDMI Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers, by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and audio/video monitors (such as digital televisions), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http:// www.hdmi.org/.” SILENT CINEMA CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room. En 107 APPENDIX Glossary “x.v.Color” A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics. Video conversion Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is performed according to resolution of video signals as shown below. Analog-to-analog video conversion is also possible when “Analog to Analog Conversion” is set to “On” (☞p. 82). ✓: HDMI output HDMI input COMPONENT VIDEO output Resolution 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/576i ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 480p/576p ✓ 480p/576p ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ VIDEO output 1080i 1080p 480i/576i ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 1080i ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 720p 480i/576i 720p ✓ 1080p VIDEO input 480p/576p ✓ 1080i COMPONENT VIDEO input 480i/576i ✓ 720p 480i/576i available conversion ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ En 108 APPENDIX Information on HDMI™ ■ HDMI signal compatibility NOTES Audio signals Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. • If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can playback the audio sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the digital audio input (optical or coaxial) connections. • Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately. • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details. To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). • This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD content. Video signals This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: – – – – 480i/60 Hz 576i/50 Hz 480p/60 Hz 576p/50 Hz – 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz – 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz – 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz About trademarks Bluetooth™ Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. “HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. iPod™, iPhone™ “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “iPhone” is a trademark of Apple Inc. En 109 APPENDIX Specifications ■ Input jacks ■ Remote jacks ■ TUNER • Analog audio [Canada model] Audio x 5 (AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, V-AUX) MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8ch Input) [Australia model] Audio x 6 (PHONO, AV5, AV6, AUDIO1, AUDIO2, V-AUX) MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8ch Input) • Digital audio Optical x 2 (AV1, AV4) Coaxial x 2 (AV2, AV3) • Video Composite x 5 (AV3, AV4, AV5, AV6, V-AUX) Component x 2 (AV1, AV2) • HDMI input HDMI (Front Panel) x 1 (V-AUX) HDMI (Rear Panel) x 5 (HDMI 1-5) • Other DOCK x 1 (AUDIO, VIDEO [Composite]) • REMOTE IN x 1 • REMOTE OUT x 1 • Analog Tuner FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) • TRIGGER OUT x 1 ■ Compatible Decoding Formats ■ Output jacks • Analog Audio Speaker out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R*1, EXTRA SP L/R*2) *1 Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] *2 Note: assignment is possible. [ZONE2, PRESENCE] Pre Out x 7 [FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R] Subwoofer out x 2 (MONO, SUBWOOFER) AV OUT x 1 AUDIO OUT x 1 ZONE2 OUT x 1 • Video MONITOR OUT - Component x 1 - Composite x 1 AV OUT - Composite x 1 • HDMI Output HDMI OUT x 1 ■ HDMI • HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lips Sync, ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - VGA - 480i/60 Hz - 576i/50 Hz - 480p/60 Hz - 576p/50 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz • Analog up Conversion - 480i/60 Hz (NTSC) - 576i/50 Hz (PAL) - 480p/60 Hz - 576p/50 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • Up-Scaling - 480i → 480p/720p/1080i/1080p - 480p → 720p/1080i/1080p - 576i → 576p/720p/1080i/1080p - 576p → 720p/1080i/1080p • Decoding Format - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS Express - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX - DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema ■ AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω) FRONT L/R ............................................................... 105 W+105 W CENTER................................................................................. 105 W SURROUND L/R ...................................................... 105 W+105 W SURROUND BACK L/R .......................................... 105 W+105 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω...................................125/160/190/230 W • Dynamic Headroom [Canada model] 8 Ω ........................................................................................ 1.43 dB • Audio Format - Dolby Digital - DTS - DSD 6ch - Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby TrueHD - DTS-HD - PCM 2ch-8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible En 110 APPENDIX • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance [Canada model] AV5, etc. ....................................................................200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH IN ...........................................................200 mV/47 kΩ [Australia model] PHONO ......................................................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ AV5, etc. ....................................................................200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH IN ...........................................................200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Voltage [Canada model] AV5, etc. (1 kHz 0.5% THD) ..................................... 2.3 V or more [Australia model] PHONO (1 kHz 0.1% THD) .................................... 60 mV or more AV5, etc. (1 kHz 0.5% THD) ..................................... 2.3 V or more • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT ............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT......................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo & Front: Small)................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE2 OUT ............................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ..................................100 mV/560 Ω • Frequency Response AV5 to FRONT..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/-3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion [Canada model] AV5, etc. to FRONT (PURE DIRECT) (20-20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................................ 0.06% or less [Australia model] PHONO (20-20 kHz, 1V)............................................ 0.02% or less AV5, etc. to FRONT (PURE DIRECT) (20-20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................................ 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) [Canada model] AV5, etc. (PURE DIRECT). Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers)...................................100 dB or more [Australia model] PHONO Input Shorted (5 mV to Front Speakers)......81 dB or more AV5, etc. (PURE DIRECT). Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers)...................................100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front Speakers ............................................................150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) [Canada model] AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shorted) .............................. 60 dB/45 dB or more [Australia model] PHONO Input shorted..................................... 60 dB/55 dB or more AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shorted) .............................. 60 dB/45 dB or more ■ AM SECTION • Volume Control.......................................MUTE / -80 dB to +16.5 dB • Power Supply [Canada model]...................................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz • Tone Control (Front Speakers) Bass Boost/Cut .............................................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB at 50 Hz Bass Turnover Frequency.......................................................350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut ......................................... ±6 dB/0.5 dB at 20 kHz Treble Turnover Frequency ...................................................3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back) .............12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ............................................................24 dB/oct. ■ VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type [Canada model] ....................................................................... NTSC [Australia model] ....................................................................... PAL • Tuning Range [Canada model]....................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz [Australia model] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz ■ GENERAL • Power Consumption [Canada model]..........................................................400 W/500 VA [Australia model] .................................................................... 400 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control off / Standby Through off ....................0.2 W or less HDMI Control on/ Standby Through on (Input: HDMI1, when no HDMI signal is input) ... 2.7 W (typical) • Dimensions (W x H x D) 435 x 151 x 364 mm • Weight 10.5 kg • Video Conversion...............................................................NTSC/PAL • Signal Level Composite ..................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component ...................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) .......1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................... 50 dB or more • Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT] Component (Video Conversion Off) ............ 5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB ■ FM SECTION • Tuning Range [Canada model] ................................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Australia model] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono ...................................................................... 3.0 µV (20.8 dB) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo..................................................................74 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo........................................................................0.3/0.3% • Antenna Input (unbalanced)......................................................... 75 Ω En 111 APPENDIX Index Numerics 5 channel speaker layout .............................................................. 15 5.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 15 7.1-channel speaker connection ................................................... 17 7.1-channel speaker layout........................................................... 14 A Adaptive DRC, OPTION menu ................................................... 51 Advanced Setup menu ................................................................. 92 AM antenna connection ............................................................... 32 AM tuning.................................................................................... 54 Analog to Analog Conversion, Video Setup................................ 82 ARC (Audio Return Channel), HDMI Setup............................... 84 Aspect, Processing, Video Setup ................................................. 83 Audio In, Input menu ................................................................... 67 Audio information, Information menu......................................... 88 AUDIO jack ................................................................................. 21 Audio Output, HDMI Setup......................................................... 85 Audio Return Channel function ................................................... 97 Auto Power Down, Function Setup ............................................. 86 Auto Preset................................................................................... 57 Auto Setup, Speaker Setup .......................................................... 77 B BD player connection .................................................................. 25 Bi-amp connection, speaker......................................................... 18 Bluetooth™ component playback................................................ 63 C Cable plug .................................................................................... 21 Center Image, Sound Program menu ........................................... 75 Center Level, Sound Program menu............................................ 74 Center speaker.............................................................................. 13 Center Width, Sound Program menu ........................................... 75 Changing speaker impedance ...................................................... 18 CINEMA DSP 3D mode.............................................................. 43 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, OPTION menu................................... 51 CINEMA DSP indicator .............................................................. 10 Clear All Preset ........................................................................... Clear Preset ................................................................................. COAXIAL jack ........................................................................... COMPONENT VIDEO jack....................................................... Compressed Music Enhancer mode ............................................ Configuration, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ............................. Connect, OPTION menu............................................................. Connecting speakers.................................................................... Connections................................................................................. Content browse view................................................................... Content window .......................................................................... Cursor indicators ......................................................................... 57 57 21 21 44 78 52 17 13 53 53 10 D Decode Type, Sound Program menu .................................... 74, 75 Decoder Mode, Input menu......................................................... 67 Dialogue Lift, OPTION menu..................................................... 51 Dimension, Sound Program menu .............................................. 75 Direct, Sound Program menu...................................................... 74 Disconnect, OPTION menu ........................................................ 52 Display Set, Function Setup........................................................ 86 Distance, Speaker Setup.............................................................. 79 DSP Level, Sound Program menu .............................................. 72 DVD player connection............................................................... 25 Dynamic Range, Sound Setup..................................................... 81 E Enhancer, Input menu ................................................................. Extended Surround, OPTION menu ........................................... External component connection .................................................. External decoder connection ....................................................... 67 51 21 29 Front Presence L Level, Sound Program menu........................... Front Presence R Level, Sound Program menu .......................... Front speaker ............................................................................... Function Setup............................................................................. 74 75 13 86 G Game connection......................................................................... 29 H HDMI Control function............................................................... HDMI Control, HDMI Setup ...................................................... HDMI indicator ........................................................................... HDMI jack................................................................................... HDMI monitor, Information menu.............................................. HDMI Setup ................................................................................ High-frequency sound adjustment............................................... 95 84 10 21 88 83 40 I Information menu ........................................................................ INIT, Advanced Setup menu....................................................... Initial Delay, Sound Program menu ............................................ Initial Volume, Sound Setup ....................................................... Input menu................................................................................... iPhone™ playback ...................................................................... iPod Interlock, Input menu.......................................................... iPod wireless system ................................................................... iPod™ playback .......................................................................... 88 94 72 82 65 58 68 61 58 J Jack.............................................................................................. 21 F L FM antenna connection ............................................................... 32 FM Mode..................................................................................... 56 FM tuning.................................................................................... 54 Front panel .................................................................................... 8 Front panel display...................................................................... 10 Language ..................................................................................... Level, Speaker Setup................................................................... Lipsync, Sound Setup.................................................................. Liveness, Sound Program menu.................................................. Load, SCENE menu .................................................................... En 87 79 81 73 70 112 APPENDIX Index Low-frequency sound adjustment................................................ 40 R M Rear panel...................................................................................... 9 Remote control ............................................................................ 11 Remote control battery installation ............................................... 7 Remote control connection ......................................................... 30 Remote control, Controlling other components .......................... 89 REMOTE ID, Advanced Setup menu ......................................... 93 Rename/Icon Select, Input menu ................................................ 66 Rename/Icon Select, SCENE menu ............................................ 70 Repeat, OPTION menu ............................................................... 52 Reset, SCENE menu ................................................................... 70 Resolution, Processing, Video Setup .......................................... 83 Reverb Delay, Sound Program menu.......................................... 73 Reverb Level, Sound Program menu .......................................... 74 Reverb Time, Sound Program menu........................................... 73 Room Size, Sound Program menu .............................................. 72 Manual Preset............................................................................... 54 Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ...................................................... 77 Manual Tuning............................................................................. 56 Max Volume, Sound Setup .......................................................... 81 Memory Guard, Function Setup .................................................. 87 Menu browse control ................................................................... 59 MON.CHK, Advanced Setup menu............................................. 93 Multi information display ............................................................ 10 Multi Zone ................................................................................... 85 Multi-format player connection ................................................... 29 Multi-zone function ..................................................................... 98 MUTE indicator ........................................................................... 10 N Normal tuning .............................................................................. 54 Now playing view ........................................................................ 53 O ON SCREEN menu...................................................................... 47 On-Screen display ........................................................................ 12 OPTICAL jack ............................................................................. 21 OPTION menu ............................................................................. 49 P Pairing, OPTION menu ............................................................... 52 Panorama, Sound Program menu................................................. 75 Parametric EQ, Speaker Setup..................................................... 80 PHONES jack ................................................................................ 8 Portable audio player connection................................................. 29 Power Amp Assign, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ..................... 77 PREOUT connection ................................................................... 30 Presence speaker .......................................................................... 13 Presence speaker layout ............................................................... 14 Preset Select ................................................................................. 56 Pure Direct mode ......................................................................... 44 S Save, SCENE menu .................................................................... 70 SCENE function.......................................................................... 41 SCENE menu .............................................................................. 69 Setup menu.................................................................................. 76 Shuffle, OPTION menu .............................................................. 52 SILENT CINEMA mode ............................................................ 43 Simple remote control ................................................................. 61 Sound program ............................................................................ 41 Sound Program menu.................................................................. 71 Sound Setup ................................................................................ 81 SP IMP., Advanced Setup menu ................................................. 92 Speaker connection ..................................................................... 13 Speaker indicators ....................................................................... 10 Speaker layout............................................................................. 14 Speaker setting ............................................................................ 33 Speaker Setup.............................................................................. 77 Standby Charge, Input menu....................................................... 67 Standby Through, HDMI Setup .................................................. 85 Straight Decoding Mode ............................................................. 42 Subwoofer ................................................................................... 13 Supplied accessories...................................................................... 7 Surround Back Initial Delay, Sound Program menu................... 72 Surround Back L Level, Sound Program menu .......................... 74 Surround Back Liveness, Sound Program menu......................... 73 Surround Back R Level, Sound Program menu .......................... 74 Surround Back Room Size, Sound Program menu ..................... 72 Surround back speaker ................................................................ 13 Surround Initial Delay, Sound Program menu ............................ 72 Surround L Level, Sound Program menu.................................... 74 Surround Liveness, Sound Program menu ............................ 72, 73 Surround R Level, Sound Program menu ................................... 74 Surround speaker......................................................................... 13 T Test Tone, Speaker Setup............................................................ Tone control ................................................................................ Tone Control, OPTION menu ..................................................... Trigger connection ...................................................................... Trigger Output, Function Setup................................................... Tuner indicator ............................................................................ TV Audio Input, HDMI Setup .................................................... TV FORMAT, Advanced Setup menu........................................ TV monitor connection ............................................................... 80 40 50 31 87 10 84 93 22 V VIDEO AUX input cover.............................................................. 7 Video information, Information menu ........................................ 88 VIDEO jack................................................................................. 21 Video Out, Input menu................................................................ 68 Video Setup ................................................................................. 82 Virtual CINEMA DSP 3D mode................................................. 43 Virtual CINEMA DSP mode....................................................... 43 VOLUME...................................................................................... 8 VOLUME indicator..................................................................... 10 Volume Trim, OPTION menu..................................................... 52 Y YPAO .......................................................................................... 33 Z Zone2 Set, Multi Zone................................................................. 85 En 113 © 2010 Yamaha Corporation YC514A0/OMEN1